Documenti di Didattica
Documenti di Professioni
Documenti di Cultura
Country: Palestine
December 2016
iii
Table of Contents
Table of Clauses
A. General ................................................................................................................... 1-1-9
1. Scope of Bid ...................................................................................................... 1-1-9
2. Source of Funds ................................................................................................ 1-1-9
3. Corrupt Practices ............................................................................................... 1-1-9
4. Eligible Bidders .............................................................................................. 1-1-12
5. Eligible Plant and Installation Services ......................................................... 1-1-14
B. Contents of Bidding Document .......................................................................... 1-1-14
6. Sections of Bidding Document ...................................................................... 1-1-14
7. Clarification of Bidding Document, Site Visit, Pre-Bid Meeting ................... 1-1-15
8. Amendment of Bidding Document ................................................................. 1-1-16
9. Cost of Bidding ............................................................................................... 1-1-16
10. Language of Bid .............................................................................................. 1-1-16
C1. First Stage Technical Proposals: Preparation .................................................. 1-1-16
11. Documents Comprising the First Stage Technical Proposal........................... 1-1-17
12. Letter of First Stage Bid and Attachments ...................................................... 1-1-17
13. Alternative Technical Proposals ..................................................................... 1-1-17
14. Documents Establishing the Eligibility of Plant and Installation Services.... 1-1-18
15. Documents Establishing the Eligibility and Qualifications of the Bidder ...... 1-1-18
16. Documents Establishing Conformity of the Plant and Installation Services .. 1-1-18
17. Format and Signing of First Stage Technical Proposal .................................. 1-1-19
C2. First Stage Technical Proposals: Submission and Opening ........................... 1-1-20
18. Submission, Sealing and Marking of First Stage Technical Proposals .......... 1-1-20
19. Deadline for Submission of First Stage Technical Proposals ......................... 1-1-21
20. Substitution and Modification of First Stage Technical Proposals ................. 1-1-21
21. Opening of First Stage Technical Proposals by Employer ............................. 1-1-21
C3. First Stage Technical Proposals: Evaluation ................................................... 1-1-21
22. Determination of Responsiveness of First Stage Technical Proposals ........... 1-1-21
23. Technical Evaluation of First Stage Technical Proposals............................... 1-1-22
24. Eligibility and Qualification of the Bidder ..................................................... 1-1-23
D. Clarification of First Stage Technical Proposals.............................................. 1-1-23
25. Clarification Procedures.................................................................................. 1-1-23
1-8 Section I. Instructions to Bidders
3. Corrupt Practices 3.1 The Bank requires that Borrowers (including beneficiaries of
Bank Grants), as well as Bidders, Suppliers, Contractors and
their agents (whether declared or not), personnel,
subcontractors, sub-consultants, service providers and
suppliers, under Bank-financed contracts, observe the highest
standard of ethics during the procurement and execution of
1-10 Section I. Instructions to Bidders
1
“another party” refers to a public official acting in relation to the procurement process or contract execution].
In this context, “public official” includes World Bank staff and employees of other organizations taking or
reviewing procurement decisions.
2
“Party” refers to a public official; the terms “benefit” and “obligation” relate to the procurement process or
contract execution; and the “act or omission” is intended to influence the procurement process or contract
execution.
3
“Parties” refers to participants in the procurement process (including public officials) attempting to establish
bid prices at artificial, non competitive levels.
4
“Party” refers to a participant in the procurement process or contract execution.
Section I. Instructions to Bidders 1-11
a
A firm or an individual may be declared ineligible to be awarded a Bank-financed contract upon
completion of the Bank’s sanctions proceedings as per its sanctions procedures, including inter alia: (i)
temporary suspension in connection with an ongoing sanctions proceeding; (ii) cross-debarment as agreed
with other International Financial Institutions, including Multilateral Development Banks; and (iii) the
World Bank Group corporate administrative procurement sanctions procedures for fraud and corruption.
b
A nominated sub-contractor, consultant, manufacturer or supplier, or service provider (different names are
used depending on the particular bidding document) is one which either has been: (i) included by the bidder
in its pre-qualification application or bid because it brings specific and critical experience and know-how
that are accounted for in the evaluation of the bidder’s pre-qualification application or the bid; or (ii)
appointed by the Borrower.
1-12 Section I. Instructions to Bidders
4.2 A Bidder, and all partners constituting the Bidder, shall have a
nationality of an eligible country, as defined in Guidelines:
Procurement under IBRD Grants and IDA Credits, October
2006, (hereinafter referred to as the Guidelines), in accordance
with Section V, Eligible Countries. A Bidder shall be deemed
to have the nationality of a country if the Bidder is a national
or is constituted, incorporated, or registered and operates in
conformity with the provisions of the laws of that country.
This criterion shall also apply to the determination of the
nationality of proposed subcontractors or suppliers for any
part of the Contract including related services.
4.3 A Bidder shall not have a conflict of interest. All Bidders
found to have a conflict of interest shall be disqualified. A
Bidder may be considered to have a conflict of interest with
one or more parties in this bidding process, if :
(a) they have a controlling partner in common; or
(b) they receive or have received any direct or indirect
subsidy from any of them; or
(c) they have the same legal representative for purposes of
this bid; or
(d) they have a relationship with each other, directly or
through common third parties, that puts them in a
position to have access to information about or
influence on the bid of another Bidder, or influence the
decisions of the Employer regarding this bidding
process; or
Section I. Instructions to Bidders 1-13
5. Eligible Plant and 5.1 The Plant and Installation Services to be supplied under the
Installation Contract shall have their origin in eligible source countries as
Services defined in ITB 4.2 above and all expenditures under the
Contract will be limited to such Plant and Installation Services
5.2 For purposes of ITB 5.1 above, “origin” means the place
where the plant, or component parts thereof are mined, grown,
produced or manufactured, and from which the services are
provided. Plant components are produced when, through
manufacturing, processing, or substantial or major assembling
of components, a commercially recognized product results that
is substantially in its basic characteristics or in purpose or
utility from its components.
9. Cost of Bidding 9.1 The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation
and submission of its Bid, and the Employer shall not be
responsible or liable for those costs, regardless of the conduct
or outcome of the bidding process.
10. Language of Bid 10.1 The Bid, as well as all correspondence and documents relating
to the bid exchanged by the Bidder and the Employer, shall be
written in the language specified in the BDS. Supporting
documents and printed literature that are part of the Bid may
be in another language provided they are accompanied by an
accurate translation of the relevant passages in the language
specified in the BDS, in which case, for purposes of
interpretation of the Bid, such translation shall govern.
11. Documents 11.1 The first stage technical proposal submitted by the Bidder
Comprising the shall comprise the following:
First Stage
Technical (a) Letter of First Stage Bid;
Proposal (b) alternative technical proposals in accordance with ITB
13;
(c) written confirmation authorizing the signatory of the Bid
to commit the Bidder, in accordance with ITB 17.2;
(d) documentary evidence established in accordance with
ITB 14 that the Plant and Installation Services offered by
the Bidder in its bid or in any alternative bid are eligible;
(e) documentary evidence in accordance with ITB 15
establishing the Bidder’s eligibility and qualifications to
perform the contract if its Bid is accepted;
(f) documentary evidence established in accordance with
ITB 16 that the Plant and Installation Services offered by
the Bidder conform to the Bidding Document;
(g) in the case of a technical proposal submitted by a JVA,
JVA agreement, or letter of intent to enter into a JVA
including a draft agreement, indicating at least the parts
of the Plant to be executed by the respective partners;
(h) List of subcontractors, in accordance with ITB 16.3; and
(i) any other document required in the BDS.
First stage technical proposals are unpriced proposals and
shall contain no prices or price schedules or other reference
to rates and prices for completing the facilities. First stage
technical proposals containing such price information will
be rejected.
12. Letter of First 12.1 The Letter of First Stage Bid and any attachments shall be
Stage Bid and prepared using the relevant forms furnished in Section IV,
Attachments Bidding Forms. The forms must be completed as instructed in
each form.
13. Alternative 13.1 Bidders shall note that they are permitted to propose technical
Technical alternatives with their first stage technical proposals in
Proposals addition to or in lieu of the requirements specified in the
bidding documents, provided they can document that the
proposed technical alternatives are to the benefit of the
Employer, that they fulfill the principal objectives of the
contract, and that they meet the basic performance and
1-18 Section I. Instructions to Bidders
14. Documents 14.1 To establish the eligibility of the Plant and Installation
Establishing the Services in accordance with ITB Clause 5, Bidders shall
Eligibility of provide documentary evidence consisting of a statement on
Plant and the country of origin of the Plant and Installation Services
Installation offered.
Services
15. Documents 15.1 To establish its eligibility and qualifications to perform the
Establishing the Contract in accordance with Section III, Evaluation and
Eligibility and Qualification Criteria, the Bidder shall provide the information
Qualifications of requested in the corresponding information sheets included in
the Bidder Section IV, Bidding Forms.
15.2 Domestic Bidders, individually or in joint ventures, applying
for eligibility for domestic preference shall supply all
information required to satisfy the criteria for eligibility as
described in ITB 46.
16. Documents 16.1 The Bidder shall furnish a first stage technical proposal
Establishing including the information stipulated in Section IV, in
Conformity of the sufficient detail to demonstrate substantial responsiveness of
Plant and the Bidders’ proposal to the Employer’s requirements and the
Installation completion time.
Services
16.2 The documentary evidence of the conformity of the Plant and
Installation Services with the bidding documents may be in the
form of literature, drawings and data, and shall include:
(a) detailed description of the essential technical and
performance characteristics of the Plant and Installation
Services, including the functional guarantees of the
proposed Plant and Installation Services, in response to
the Specification. The functional guarantees of the
proposed Plant and Installation Services shall be stated
in the applicable form in Section IV Bidding Forms;
(b) a list giving full particulars, including available sources,
of all spare parts, special tools, etc., necessary for the
proper and continuing functioning of the plant for the
period named in the BDS, following completion of
Plant and Installation Services in accordance with
provisions of contract; and
Section I. Instructions to Bidders 1-19
17. Format and 17.1 The Bidder shall prepare one original of the documents
Signing of First comprising the bid as described in ITB 11 and clearly mark it
Stage Technical “FIRST STAGE TECHNICAL PROPOSAL - ORIGINAL.” Alternative
Proposal bids, if permitted in accordance with ITB 13, shall be clearly
marked “FIRST STAGE TECHNICAL PROPOSAL - ALTERNATIVE”.
In addition, the Bidder shall submit copies of the bid, in the
number specified in the BDS and clearly mark them “FIRST
STAGE TECHNICAL PROPOSAL - COPY.” In the event of any
discrepancy between the original and the copies, the original
shall prevail.
17.2 The original and all copies of the first stage technical proposal
shall be typed or written in indelible ink and shall be signed by
a person duly authorized to sign on behalf of the Bidder. This
authorization shall consist of a written confirmation as
specified in the BDS and shall be attached to the first stage
technical proposal. The name and position held by each
person signing the authorization must be typed or printed
below the signature. All pages of the first stage technical
proposal where entries or amendments have been made shall
1-20 Section I. Instructions to Bidders
23. Technical 23.1 The Employer will carry out a detailed evaluation of the first
Evaluation of stage technical proposals in order to determine whether the
First Stage technical aspects are in compliance with the Bidding
Technical Document. In order to reach such a determination, the
Proposals Employer will examine and compare the technical proposals
on the basis of the information supplied by the bidders, taking
into account the following:
(a) overall completeness and compliance with the Employer’s
Requirements; the technical merits of alternatives offered;
conformity of the Plant and Installation Services offered
with specified performance criteria, including conformity
with the specified minimum (or maximum, as the case may
be) requirement corresponding to each functional
guarantee, as indicated in the Specification and in Section
III Evaluation and Qualification Criteria; suitability of the
Plant and Installation Services offered in relation to the
environmental and climatic conditions prevailing at the
site; and quality, function and operation of any process
control concept included in the bid;
24. Eligibility and 24.1 The Employer shall determine to its satisfaction whether
Qualification of Bidders determined as having submitted responsive First Stage
the Bidder Technical Proposals are eligible and meet the qualification
criteria specified in Section III, Evaluation and Qualification
Criteria.
24.2 The determination shall be based upon an examination of the
documentary evidence of the Bidder’s qualifications submitted
by the Bidder, pursuant to ITB 15, and on any additional
information which the Employer may request from the Bidder
to support such evidence.
24.3 An affirmative determination will be a prerequisite for the
Employer to invite the Bidder to a clarification meeting in
accordance with ITB 25. A negative determination will result
in rejection of the Bidder’s first stage technical proposal.
24.4 The capabilities of the manufacturers and subcontractors
proposed to be used by the Bidders for Employer-identified
major items of supply or services will also be evaluated for
acceptability in accordance with Section III, Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria. Should a manufacturer or subcontractor
be determined to be unacceptable, if invited to submit a
Second Stage Bid, the Bidder will be required to substitute an
acceptable manufacturer or subcontractor.
33. Format and 33.1 The Bidder shall prepare one original of the documents
Signing of Second comprising the bid as described in ITB 27 and clearly mark it
Stage Bid “SECOND STAGE BID - ORIGINAL.” In addition, the Bidder shall
submit copies of the bid, in the number specified in the BDS
and clearly mark them “SECOND STAGE BID - COPY.” In the
event of any discrepancy between the original and the copies,
the original shall prevail.
33.2 The original and all copies of the bid shall be typed or written
in indelible ink and shall be signed by a person duly
authorized to sign on behalf of the Bidder. This authorization
shall consist of a written confirmation as specified in the BDS
and shall be attached to the bid. The name and position held
by each person signing the authorization must be typed or
printed below the signature. All pages of the bid where entries
or amendments have been made shall be signed or initialed by
the person signing the bid.
33.3 A bid submitted by a JVA shall comply with the following
requirements:
(a) Unless not required in accordance with ITB 4.1 (a), be
signed so as to be legally binding on all partners and
(b) Include the Representative’s authorization referred to in
ITB 4.1 (b), consisting of a power of attorney signed by
those legally authorized to sign on behalf of the JVA.
33.4 Any interlineations, erasures, or overwriting shall be valid
only if they are signed or initialed by the person signing the
bid.
37. Withdrawal, 37.1 A Bidder may withdraw, substitute, or modify its bid after it
Substitution, and has been submitted by sending a written notice, duly signed by
Modification of an authorized representative, and shall include a copy of the
Second Stage authorization in accordance with ITB 33.2, (except that
Bids withdrawal notices do not require copies). The corresponding
substitution or modification of the bid must accompany the
respective written notice. All notices must be:
(a) prepared and submitted in accordance with ITB 33 and ITB
34 (except that withdrawals notices do not require copies),
and in addition, the respective envelopes shall be clearly
marked “SECOND STAGE BID - WITHDRAWAL,” “SECOND
STAGE BID - SUBSTITUTION,” “SECOND STAGE BID -
1-34 Section I. Instructions to Bidders
MODIFICATION;” and
(b) received by the Employer prior to the deadline prescribed
for submission of bids, in accordance with ITB 35
37.2 Bids requested to be withdrawn in accordance with ITB 37.1
shall be returned unopened to the Bidders.
37.3 No bid may be withdrawn, substituted, or modified in the
interval between the deadline for submission of Second Stage
bids and the expiration of the period of bid validity specified
by the Bidder on the Letter of Bid or any extension thereof.
38. Second Stage Bid 38.1 The Employer shall conduct the Second Stage bid opening in
Opening public, in the presence of Bidders` designated representatives
and anyone who choose to attend, and at the address, date and
time specified in the Letter of Invitation to submit Second
Stage Bids. Any specific electronic bid opening procedures
required if electronic bidding is permitted in accordance with
ITB 34.1, shall be as specified in the BDS.
38.2 First, envelopes marked “SECOND STAGE BID - WITHDRAWAL”
shall be opened and read out and the envelope with the
corresponding bid shall not be opened, but returned to the
Bidder. No bid withdrawal shall be permitted unless the
corresponding withdrawal notice contains a valid
authorization to request the withdrawal and is read out at bid
opening. Next, envelopes marked “SECOND STAGE BID -
SUBSTITUTION” shall be opened and read out and exchanged
with the corresponding bid being substituted, and the
substituted bid shall not be opened, but returned to the Bidder.
No bid substitution shall be permitted unless the
corresponding substitution notice contains a valid
authorization to request the substitution and is read out at bid
opening. Envelopes marked “SECOND STAGE BID -
MODIFICATION” shall be opened and read out with the
corresponding bid. No bid modification shall be permitted
unless the corresponding modification notice contains a valid
authorization to request the modification and is read out at bid
opening. Only bids that are opened and read out at bid opening
shall be considered further.
38.3 All other envelopes shall be opened one at a time, reading out:
the name of the Bidder and the Bid Price(s), including any
discounts, and indicating whether there is a modification; the
presence or absence of a bid security or a Bid-Securing
Declaration; and any other details as the Employer may
consider appropriate. Only discounts read out at bid opening
Section I. Instructions to Bidders 1-35
may be rejected.
41. Deviations, 41.1 During the evaluation of bids, the following definitions apply:
Reservations, and
Omissions (a) “Deviation” is a departure from the requirements
specified in the Bidding Document;
(b) “Reservation” is the setting of limiting conditions or
withholding from complete acceptance of the
requirements specified in the Bidding Document; and
(c) “Omission” is the failure to submit part or all of the
information or documentation required in the Bidding
Document.
48. Comparison of 48.1 The Employer shall compare all substantially responsive bids
Bids in accordance with ITB 47.3 to determine the lowest evaluated
bid,.
49. Qualification of 49.1 The Employer shall determine to its satisfaction whether the
the Bidder Bidder that is selected as having submitted the lowest
evaluated and substantially responsive bid still meets the
qualifying criteria specified in Section III, Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria.
49.2 An affirmative determination shall be a prerequisite for award
of the Contract to the Bidder. A negative determination shall
result in disqualification of the bid, in which event the
Employer shall proceed to the next lowest evaluated bid to
make a similar determination of that Bidder’s qualifications to
perform satisfactorily.
49.3 The participation of the manufacturers and subcontractors
proposed in its Bid to be used by the lowest evaluated Bidder
should be confirmed with a letter of intent between the parties,
as needed. The capabilities of additional or different
manufacturers and subcontractors proposed in its Bid to be
used by the lowest evaluated Bidder will also be evaluated for
acceptability in accordance with Section III, Evaluation and
Qualification Criteria. Should any additional or substitute
manufacturer or subcontractor be determined to be
unacceptable, the Bid will not be rejected, but the Bidder will
be required to substitute an acceptable manufacturer or
subcontractor without any change to the bid price. Prior to
signing the Contract, the corresponding Appendix to the
1-40 Section I. Instructions to Bidders
F. Award of Contract
51. Award Criteria 51.1 Subject to ITB 50.1, the Employer shall award the Contract to
the Bidder whose offer has been determined to be the lowest
evaluated bid and is substantially responsive to the Bidding
Document, provided further that the Bidder is determined to
be eligible and qualified to perform the Contract satisfactorily.
52. Notification of 52.1 Prior to the expiration of the period of bid validity, the
Award Employer shall notify the successful Bidder, in writing, that its
bid has been accepted. The notification letter (hereinafter and
in the Conditions of Contract and Contract Forms called the
“Letter of Acceptance”) shall specify the sum that the
Employer will pay the Contractor in consideration of the
execution and completion of the Plant and Installation
Services (hereinafter and in the Conditions of Contract and
Contract Forms called “the Contract Price”).
52.2 At the same time, the Employer shall also notify all other
Bidders of the results of the bidding, and shall publish in
UNDB online and in the dgMarket the results identifying the
bid and lot numbers and the following information: (i) name
of each Bidder who submitted a Bid; (ii) bid prices as read out
at Bid Opening; (iii) name and evaluated prices of each Bid
that was evaluated; (iv) name of bidders whose bids were
rejected and the reasons for their rejection; and (v) name of the
winning Bidder, and the Price it offered, as well as the
duration and summary scope of the contract awarded.
52.3 Until a formal contract is prepared and executed, the
notification of award shall constitute a binding Contract.
52.4 The Employer shall promptly respond in writing to any
unsuccessful Bidder who, after notification of award in
accordance with ITB 52.1, requests in writing the grounds on
which its bid was not selected.
53. Signing of 53.1 Promptly upon notification, the Employer shall send the
Section I. Instructions to Bidders 1-41
ITB 7.4 Concurrent Pre-Bid meetings for Contract “A” HRWWTP Design, Supply
and Installation (DSI) and Contract “B” HRWWTP Operations and
Maintenance (O&M) Services shall take place at the following date, time
and place:
Date: January 9, 2017
Time: 10:00 AM
Place: Hebron Municipality - Water / Waste water Department Room
#Meeting Room
A site visit conducted by the Employer shall be organized immediately
after the pre-bid meeting.
ITB 10.1 The language of the bid is: English
C1. First Stage Technical Proposals: Preparation
ITB 11.1 (i) The environmental and social risks are evaluated as high and impacts as
significant. Consequently, the Technical Proposal shall include an
environmental, social, health and safety (ESHS) Methodology meeting the
requirements of the ESHS Specifications.
The Bidder shall use the ESHS Methodology Form provided for this
purpose in Section IV – Technical Proposal.
A Bid not comprising an ESHS Methodology shall be rejected.
ITB 11.1 (ii) The Bidder shall submit with its bid the following additional documents:
ITB 16.2 (b) Spares required for operation; number of years following completion 5
yaers
ITB 17.1 In addition to the original of the bid, the number of copies is: 4 printed and
one soft copty
ITB 17.2 a) Notarized certificate confirming that the signatory is duly
authorized to sign bids for and on behalf of the Bidder, with name
and capacity of the signatory, address and date, and
b) In the case of Bids submitted by an existing or intended JV an
undertaking signed by all parties (i) starting that all parties shall be
jointly and severally liable, if so required in accordance with ITB
4.2(a) and (ii) nominating a representative who shall have the
authority to conduct all business for and on behalf of any and all
the parties of the JV during the bidding process and, in the event
the JV is awarded the Contract, during contract execution.
ITB 29.1 Bidders shall quote for the entire Plant and Installation Services on a single
responsibility basis taking into account that the Contarctor will be granted
for the Contrcat Ceiling VAT exemption to enable the Contrcator issuing
the required Zero VAT invoices and the Contractor will be granted
donation number for all Plant and Equipmnet importaed from abroad, all as
per applicable procedures by MoF. However, the Contractor shall copmply
with all the requirements related to registration of the contracting entity
(individual firm or Joint Ventures) as per applicable and adapted
procedures in Palestine. Furher details are presented in the Employer
Requiremnets Annex 5. Considerations For Delivering Imported Goods
And Equipment To The Site
ITB 29.4(a) Named place of destination is: Contrcator’s Stores at the HRWWTP Site
1-46 Section II. Bid Data Sheet
ITB 29.4(d) Named place of final destination is: Contrcator’s Stores at the HRWWTP
Site
ITB 29.6 The prices quoted by the Bidder shall be: adjustable
ITB 30.1 The currency(ies) of the bid shall be as follows: Bidders may express the
price for their financial offer in any fully convertible currency, singly or in
combination of up to three foreign currencies
ITB 31.1 The bid validity period shall be 180 days.
ITB 32.1 The Bid shall include a bid security (issued by bank or surety);
The amount and currency of the bid security shall be US$ 750,000 (Seven
Hundred Fifty Thousand U.S. Dollars) or an equivalent amount in any
freely convertible currency.
ITB 32.10 Not applicable.
ITB 32.3 (d) Other types of acceptable securities:
ITB 33.1 In addition to the original of the bid, the number of copies is: Four (4)
hardcopies and one copy in digital form on electronic medium together
with the hard copies.
ITB 33.2 The written confirmation of authorization to sign on behalf of the Bidder
shall consist of:
Notarized certificate confirming that the signatory is duly authorized to
sign Bids for and on behalf of the Bidder, with name and capacity of the
signatory, address and date
The currency that shall be used for bid evaluation and comparison
purposes to convert all bid prices expressed in various currencies into a
single currency is: US$
The source of exchange rate shall be: www.FT.com
The date for the exchange rate shall be: 14 days before the deadline for
submission of bids as specified in ITB35.1.
Section II. Bid Data Sheet 1-49
1.1. 1. Evaluation
In addition to the criteria listed in ITB (a) – (c) the following factors and methods
will apply:
The E&S risks and impacts are evaluated as high and impacts significant. Consequently,
specific E&S qualification criteria are included. In accordance with BDS11 and BDS42, the
ESHS Methodology submitted by the Bidder will be evaluated to determine whether it is
substantially responsive (i.e. without material deviation, reservation or omission) to the
requirements specified in Section VI – Employer’s Requirements – ESHS Specifications.
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria –Without Prequalification 1-51
2. Qualification
Factor 1 Eligibility
Criteria
Bidder
Joint Venture, Consortium, or Documentati
Sub-Factor Association
Requirement on Required
Single Entity All Each At least
partners partner one
combined partner
2.1.1 Nationality Nationality in accordance Existing or
Form ELI –
with ITB 4.2. intended
Must meet Must meet 1.1 and 1.2,
JVA must N/A
requirement requirement with
meet
attachments
requirement
2.1.2Conflict of No- conflicts of interests Existing or
Interest as described in ITB 4.3. intended
Must meet Must meet
JVA must N/A Letter of Bid
requirement requirement
meet
requirement
2.1.3Bank Not having been declared Existing
Ineligibility ineligible by the Bank as Must meet JVA must Must meet
N/A Letter of Bid
described in, ITB 4.4. requirement meet requirement
requirement
2.1.4 Government Compliance with Form ELI –
Owned Entity conditions of ITB 4.5 Must meet Must meet Must meet 1.1 and 1.2,
N/A
requirement requirement requirement with
attachments
1-52 Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria –Without Prequalification
Factor 1 Eligibility
Criteria
Bidder
Joint Venture, Consortium, or Documentati
Sub-Factor Association
Requirement on Required
Single Entity All Each At least
partners partner one
combined partner
2.1.5Ineligibility Not having been excluded
based on a United as a result of the
Nations resolution or Borrower’s country laws Existing
Borrower’s country or official regulations, or Must meet JVA must Must meet
N/A Letter of Bid
law by an act of compliance requirement meet requirement
with UN Security Council requirement
resolution, in accordance
with ITB 4.8
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 2-53
Factor 4 Experience
Criteria
Bidder
Documentation
Sub-Factor
Requirement Joint Venture, Consortium, or Association Required
Single Entity All partners Each partner At least one
combined partner
2.4.1 General Experience under contracts in
Experience the role of contractor,
subcontractor, or management
contractor for at least the last
Must meet Must meet
five [5] years prior to the N/A N/A Form EXP-2.4.1
requirement requirement
applications submission
deadline, and with activity in at
least nine (9) months in each
year.
2.4.2 (a) (a)Participation as contractor, Must meet
Specific management contractor or requirement
Experience- subcontractor, in at least two [2] for at least
Contract Values contracts within the last ten one contract
[10] years , each with a value of with a value
at least twenty-four million Must meet Must meet of at least Form EXP 2.4.2(a)
N/A
United States dollars U$ requirement requirements twenty-four
24.000.000] or equivalent and million
substantially completed (at least US$24,000,0
80%) and that are similar to the 000 in last
proposed DSI services ten [(10]
years
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 4-57
Must meet
2.5.2 ESHS Availability of in house policies requirement
Documentation and procedures acceptable to the (a JV
Employer for ESHS worksites member
management which would Form ESHS and
Must meet
N/A not meet this N/A supporting
requirement
requirement documentation
must be
presented as
a sub-
contractor)
Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 5-59
Form EXP-ESHS
2.5.4 Specific ESHS Experience of one (1) construction
with supporting
Knowledge Transfer contract over the last five (5) years
documents
Specific Experience in which the ESHS knowledge
transfer to a local partner or the
ESHS capacity building of the
Employer’s country staff was The Applicant
Must meet Must meet
N/A N/A shall submit a
carried out satisfactorily requirement requirement
piece of evidence
supporting the
ESHS knowledge
transfer or
capacity building.
5-60 Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria –Without Prequalification
2.5 Personnel
The bidder must demonstrate that it will have the personnel for the key positions during the DSI phase that
meet the following requirements:
1 Contractor’s Project
15 10 1
manager
2 Deputy Contractor’s
10 5 1
Project manager
3 Civil Engineer 10 5 1
4 Process engineer 10 8 1
5 Construction Chief
8 4 1
engineer
6 Hydraulic engineer 8 4 1
7 Mechanical Engineer 8 4 1
8 Electrical Engineer 8 4 1
9 Supervisor Engineer 8 4 1
10 Scada specialist 10 5 1
11 QA/QC Engineer 10 5 1
12 ESHS Coordinator 10 5 1
2.6 Equipment
2.7 Subcontractors/manufacturers
No minimum requirements are defined for subcontractors/manufacturers.
1-62 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
1. Evaluation
Whereby:
EBP is the evaluated bid price including life cycle costs
ABP is the Bidder’s Bid Price as shown in the Letter of Bid- Two Stage Bidding – Second Stage
Bid and further adjusted, as necessary, in accordance with ITB 47.3
COM is the Grand Total of Operations and Maintenance Costs from Table 1 below
COC is the Grand Total Costs of Consumables from Table 2 below.
(a) Time Schedule:
Time to complete the Plant and Installation Services from the effective date specified in
Article 3 of the Contract Agreement for determining time for completion of pre-
commissioning activities is: nine hundred ten (910) calendar days. No credit will be given
for earlier completion.
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-63
(b) Operating and Maintenance Costs
This table shall correspond with table 1 in the Bid Price From of the O&M bid.
Instructions:
a. Calculate quantity of consumables based on the following four design situations:
• Amount of consumables needed for operating the WWTP when the wastewater temperature is 13C and loads and flows are as
stated for stage 1 year 2020
• Amount of consumables needed for operating the WWTP when the wastewater temperature is 13C and loads and flows are as
stated for stage 1 year 2027
• Amount of consumables needed for operating the WWTP when the wastewater temperature is 30C and loads and flows are as
stated for stage 1 year 2020
• Amount of consumables needed for operating the WWTP when the wastewater temperature is 30C and loads and flows are as
stated for stage 1 year 2027
Calculations, excluding price information, are to be included in the Bid for evaluation and verification purposes
b. The bidder shall state the specific consumption/production of the following items in :
• Specific chemical consumption (polyelectrolytes) will be specified as maximum amount of kg polyelectrolytes used per kg
BOD removed from influent wastewater.
• Specific fuel consumption will be specified as maximum amount of fuel (m3) per amount of influent wastewater treated (m3)
• Specific sludge production will be specified as maximum amount of sludge produced from the plant, kg dried solids per kg
BOD removed from influent wastewater
c. Unit rates are to be completed by Bidder, except for electricity.
d. The unit rates will be subject to price adjustment as per schedule G.9. Bidder has to complete in this Table the source of the index
that will be used for Price Adjustment of the Unit Rates, as well as the Base date index on the date 28 days prior to the submission
deadline of the Bid.
kg
Chemicals polyelectrolytes
US$ ..... /
C 3. polyelectrolytes (as solids per kg US$
tonnes/year tonne
calculated) BOD in
influent
kg dried solids
Sludge transport tonnes US$...... ./
C 4. per kg BOD in US$
and disposal product/year tonne
influent
Instructions:
a. Calculate quantity of consumables based on the following four design situations:
• Amount of consumables needed for operating the WWTP when the wastewater temperature is 13C and loads and flows are as
stated for stage 1 year 2020
• Amount of consumables needed for operating the WWTP when the wastewater temperature is 13C and loads and flows are as
stated for stage 1 year 2027
• Amount of consumables needed for operating the WWTP when the wastewater temperature is 30C and loads and flows are as
stated for stage 1 year 2020
• Amount of consumables needed for operating the WWTP when the wastewater temperature is 30C and loads and flows are as
stated for stage 1 year 2027
Calculations, excluding price information, are to be included in the Bid for evaluation and verification purposes
b. The bidder shall state the specific consumption/production of the following items in :
• Specific chemical consumption (polyelectrolytes) will be specified as maximum amount of kg polyelectrolytes used per kg
BOD removed from influent wastewater.
• Specific fuel consumption will be specified as maximum amount of fuel (m3) per amount of influent wastewater treated (m3)
• Specific sludge production will be specified as maximum amount of sludge produced from the plant, kg dried solids per kg
BOD removed from influent wastewater
c. Unit rates are to be completed by Bidder, except for electricity.
d. The unit rates will be subject to price adjustment as per schedule G.9. Bidder has to complete in this Table the source of the index
that will be used for Price Adjustment of the Unit Rates, as well as the Base date index on the date 28 days prior to the submission
deadline of the Bid.
Table of Forms
Letter of Bid.......................................................................................................................... 5-3
Letter of Bid – Two Stage Bidding, First Stage Bid ........................................................ 5-3
Letter of Bid – Two Stage Bidding, Second Stage Bid ................................................... 5-5
Statement of Integrity, Eligibility and Social and Environmental Responsability ........ 5-7
Schedules of Rates and Prices ........................................................................................... 5-11
Schedule No. 1. Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Abroad .................. 5-11
Schedule No. 2. Plant and Mandatory Spare Parts Supplied from Within the Employer’s
Country .............................................................................................................. 5-12
Schedule No. 3. Design Services .................................................................................. 5-13
Schedule No. 4a. Installation and Other Services ......................................................... 5-14
Schedule No. 4b. Installation and Other Services......................................................... 5-15
Schedule No. 5. Environmental, Social, Health and Safety.......................................... 5-16
Schedule No. 6. Grand Summary ................................................................................. 5-18
Schedule No. 7. Recommended Spare Parts ................................................................. 5-19
Price Adjustment ............................................................................................................ 5-20
FIRST STAGE TECHNICAL PROPOSALS ................................................................. 5-22
SECOND STAGE BID ...................................................................................................... 5-26
Site Organization ........................................................................................................... 5-27
Method Statement .......................................................................................................... 5-28
Mobilization Schedule ................................................................................................... 5-29
Construction Schedule ................................................................................................... 5-30
Plant 5-31
Contractor’s Equipment ................................................................................................. 5-32
Personnel 6-34
Proposed Subcontractors for Major Items of Plant and Installation Services ............... 6-36
Others - Time Schedule ................................................................................................. 6-37
Others – Commercial or contractual aspects of the bidding documents that the Bidder
would like to discuss with the Employer during clarifications .......................... 6-38
Bidder Information Sheet.................................................................................................. 6-39
Party to JVA Information Sheet ....................................................................................... 6-40
1-5-2 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
Letter of Bid
Date:
ICB No.:
Invitation for Bid No.:
To: _______________________________________________________________________
(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Document, including
Addenda issued in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB) Section I
(b) We offer to design, manufacture, test, deliver, install, complete and commission, in
conformity with the Bidding Document including subsequent Addenda, the Hebron
Regional Wastewater Management Plant (Phase I).
(c) We, including any subcontractors or manufacturers for any part of the contract , have
or will have nationalities from eligible countries, in accordance with ITB-4.2;
(d) We, including any subcontractors or manufacturers for any part of the contract, do not
have any conflict of interest in accordance with ITB-4.3;
(e) We are not submitting more than one bid in this bidding process as a Bidder, either
individually or as a partner in a joint venture, in accordance with ITB-4.3, except for
alternative offers permitted under ITB Clause 13;
(f) We, along with any of our subcontractors, suppliers, consultants, manufacturers, or service providers for any part of
the contract, are not subject to, and not controlled by any entity or individual that is subject to, a temporary
suspension or a debarment imposed by a member of the World Bank Group or a debarment imposed by the World
Bank Group in accordance with the Agreement for Mutual Enforcement of Debarment Decisions between the World
Bank and other development banks. Further, we are not ineligible under the Employer’s country laws or official
regulations or pursuant to a decision of the United Nations Security Council;
(g) We are not a government owned entity/ We are a government owned entity but meet the
requirements of ITB-4.5;5
(h) We further undertake, if invited to do so by you, and at our own cost, to attend a
clarification meeting at a place of your choice, for the purpose of reviewing our First
Stage Bid and duly noting all amendments and additions thereto, and noting omissions
therefrom that you may require.
5
Bidder to use as appropriate
1-5-4 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
(i) We further undertake, upon receiving your written invitation, to proceed with the
preparation of our Second Stage Bid, updating our First Stage Bid in accordance with
the requirements from the Memorandum of the clarification meeting, and completing
our Second Stage bid for supplying the Plant and Installation Services.
(j) We have paid, or will pay the following commissions, gratuities, or fees with respect to
the bidding process or execution of the Contract:
Signed
Date:
ICB No.:
Invitation for Bid No.:
To: _______________________________________________________________________
(a) We have examined and have no reservations to the Bidding Document, including
Addenda issued in accordance with Instructions to Bidders (ITB) Section I, and your
requirements incorporated in the Memorandum of the clarification meeting held between
us on [date], ;
(b) We offer to provide design, manufacture, test, deliver, install, complete and commission
, in conformity with the Bidding Document including subsequent Addenda, the Hebron
Regional Wastewater Management Plant (Phase I).
(c) The price of our Bid, excluding any discounts offered in item (d) below is the sum of:
___________________, (___________), and ___________________, (___________).
The discounts offered and the methodology for their application are: ;
(d) Our bid shall be valid for a period of ____________________________ days from the
date fixed for the submission deadline for the Second Stage bids as stipulated in the
Letter if Invitation to submit a Second Stage Bid, and it shall remain binding upon us and
may be accepted at any time before the expiration of that period;
(e) If our bid is accepted, we commit to obtain a performance security in accordance with
the Bidding Document;
(f) We, including any subcontractors or manufacturers for any part of the contract , have or
will have nationalities from eligible countries, in accordance with ITB-4.2;
(g) We, including any subcontractors or manufacturers for any part of the contract, do not
have any conflict of interest in accordance with ITB-4.3;
(h) We are not submitting more than one bid in this bidding process as a Bidder, either
individually or as a partner in a joint venture, in accordance with ITB-4.3, except for
alternative offers permitted under ITB Clause 13;
(i) We, along with any of our subcontractors, suppliers, consultants, manufacturers, or service providers for any part of
the contract, are not subject to, and not controlled by any entity or individual that is subject to, a temporary suspension
or a debarment imposed by a member of the World Bank Group or a debarment imposed by the World Bank Group in
accordance with the Agreement for Mutual Enforcement of Debarment Decisions between the World Bank and other
1-5-6 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
development banks. Further, we are not ineligible under the Employer’s country laws or official regulations or
pursuant to a decision of the United Nations Security Council;
(j) We are not a government owned entity/ We are a government owned entity but meet the
requirements of ITB-4.5;6
(k) We have paid, or will pay the following commissions, gratuities, or fees with respect to
the bidding process or execution of the Contract:
(l) We understand that this bid, together with your written acceptance thereof included in
your notification of award, shall constitute a binding contract between us, until a formal
contract is prepared and executed; and
(m) We understand that you are not bound to accept the lowest evaluated bid or any other bid
that you may receive.
Signed
6
Bidder to use as appropriate
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-5-7
7
In the event of such conviction, you may attach to this Statement of Integrity supporting information
showing that this conviction is not relevant in the context of this AFD-financed contract.
1-5-8 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
2.7) being subject to an exclusion decision of the World Bank since 30 May 2012,
and being listed on the website http://www.worldbank.org/debarr8;
2.8) having committed misrepresentation in documentation requested by the
Beneficiary as part of the contract procurement procedure.
3. We hereby certify that neither we, nor any of the members of our joint venture or any
of our subcontractors are in any of the following situations of conflict of interest:
3.1) being an affiliate controlled by the Contracting Authority or a shareholder
controlling the Contracting Authority, unless the stemming conflict of interest
has been brought to the attention of AFD and resolved to its satisfaction;
3.2) having a business or family relationship with a Contracting Authority’s staff
involved in the selection procedure or the supervision of the resulting contract,
unless the stemming conflict of interest has been brought to the attention of
AFD and resolved to its satisfaction;
3.3) being controlled by or controlling another bidder or being under common
control with another bidder, or receiving from or granting subsidies directly or
indirectly to another bidder, having the same legal representative as another
bidder, maintaining direct or indirect contacts with another bidder which
allows us to have or give access to information contained in the respective
bids, influencing them or influencing decisions of the Contracting Authority;
3.4) being engaged in a consultancy activity, which, by its nature, may be in
conflict with the assignments that we would carry out for the Contracting
Authority;
3.5) in the case of a works or goods procurement procedure:
i. Having prepared or having been associated with a consultant who
prepared specifications, drawings, calculations and other
documentation that are subject of the bid;
ii. having been recruited (or being proposed to be recruited) ourselves or
any of our affiliates, to carry out works supervision or inspection for
this contract;
4. If we are a government-owned entity, we certify that we have legal and financial
autonomy and that we operate under commercial laws and regulations.
5. We undertake to bring to the attention of the Contracting Authority, which will inform
AFD, any change in situation with regard to points 2 to 4 here above.
6. In the context of procurement and performance of the contract:
6.1) We have not and we will not engage in any dishonest conduct (act or
omission) deliberately indented to deceive others, to intentionally conceal
items, to violate or vitiate someone's consent, to make them circumvent legal
8
In the event of such exclusion, you may attach to this Statement of Integrity supporting information
showing that this exclusion is not relevant in the context of this AFD-financed contract.
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-5-9
7. We, as well as members of our joint venture and our subcontractors authorise AFD to
inspect accounts, records and other documents relating to the procurement and
performance of the Contract and to have them audited by auditors appointed by AFD.
9
In case of joint venture, insert the name of the joint venture. The person who will sign the bid on behalf of
the bidder shall attach a power of attorney from the bidder.
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-5-11
Name of Bidder
Signature of Bidder
1
Bidders shall enter a code representing the country of origin of all imported plant and equipment.
2
Specify currency. Create and use as many columns for Unit Price and Total Price as there are currencies.
Name of Bidder
Signature of Bidder
1
Specify currency in accordance with specifications in Bid Data Sheet under ITB 18.1 in Single Stage Bid, or ITB 30.1
in Two Stage Bid.
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-5-13
Name of Bidder
Signature of Bidder
1
Specify currency in accordance with specifications in Bid Data Sheet under ITB 18.1 in Single Stage Bid, or ITB 30.1
in Two Stage Bid.
1-5-14 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
Name of Bidder
Signature of Bidder
1
Specify currency in accordance with specifications in Bid Data Sheet under ITB 18.1 in Single Stage Bid, or ITB 30.1
in Two Stage Bid.
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-5-15
Name of Bidder
Signature of Bidder
1
Specify currency in accordance with specifications in Bid Data Sheet under ITB 18.1 in Single Stage Bid, or ITB 30.1
in Two Stage Bid.
1-5-16 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
ESHS
Item N° Description Unit Amount [specify currency]
Specifications
Clause N°
ESHS 1 Resources allocated to ESHS Clause 4 Lump sum
management
ESHS 2 Drafting and updating the ESHS Clauses 1, 2, Lump sum [Cost ESHS 1 should
documentation, reporting, inspections 3, 5, 6, 7, 9 exclude all or part of the
costs of those tasks]
ESHS 3 Implementation of the Health and Clauses 1, 9, Lump sum [Cost ESHS 1 should
Safety Plan: 20 to 24, 26 to exclude all or part of the
Meetings, health care center, medical 36, 40 costs of those tasks]
check-ups, emergencies and
evacuations, safety protective
equipment, hygiene
ESHS 4 Accommodation, drinking water, Clauses 35,
meals and transportation of staff(*) 38, 39
(*) : The Bidder shall detail the financial
conditions of the supply of [The cost for “site
accommodation, meals and transport to mobilization” should
its staff: exclude all or part of the
Accommodation Lump sum costs of those tasks]
Meals Lump sum
Transport Lump sum
ESHS 5 Training and local recruitment Clauses 8, 37 Lump sum [Cost ESHS 1 should
management costs exclude all or part of the
costs associated to those
tasks]
ESHS 6 Protection of adjacent areas, Clauses 10, Lump sum
prevention of erosion and wastewater 11, 12, 17
management
ESHS 7 Traffic, noise and atmospheric Clauses 13, Lump sum
emissions management, land take 14, 41, 42
ESHS 8 Waste and hazardous products Clauses 15, Lump sum
management 25, 39
ESHS 9 Vegetation clearing and site Clauses 16, Lump sum [The cost for “site
rehabilitation 18, 19 mobilization” should
exclude all or part of the
costs associated to those
tasks]
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-5-17
ESHS
Item N° Description Unit Amount [specify currency]
Specifications
Clause N°
Total for Bill ESHS ______________
ESHS costs are deemed to cover operations on all Sites (as defined in Clause 1.3 of ESHS Specifications)
Interim payment certificates shall include the portion of each ESHS cost amounting to the percentage of the actual
progress achieved in executing the ESHS measures in compliance with the ESHS Specifications and approved by
the Engineer.
1-5-18 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
Name of Bidder
Signature of
Bidder
1
Specify currency in accordance with specifications in Bid Data Sheet under ITB 18.1 in Single Stage Bid,
or ITB 30.1 in Two Stage Bid. Create and use as many columns for Foreign Currency requirement as there
are foreign currencies
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-5-19
Name of Bidder
Signature of Bidder
1-5-20 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
Price Adjustment
Prices payable to the Contractor, in accordance with the Contract, shall be subject to
adjustment during performance of the Contract to reflect changes in the cost of labor and
material components, in accordance with the following formula:
in which:
c=
α…ω = numbering of items included in the Schedule of Indices in which the Bidder
indicates the source of materials and equipment indices and the base date indices in its
bid.
L0, L1= labor indices applicable to the appropriate industry in Palestine on the base date
and the date for adjustment, respectively
The Palestinian Central Bureau of Statistics (PCBS) Consumer Price Index is the
reference for labour indices (L0, L1).
M0, M1= material and equipment indices in the country of origin on the base date and the
date for adjustment, respectively. Sub-numbering α..ω refers to the categories of items in
schedule Indices.
The Bidder shall indicate the source of materials and equipment indices and the base date
indices in its bid.
Schedule of Indices
Item Source of Indices Used Base Date Indices
α.
β.
..
ω.
These indices should correspond with the items included in the following schedules (refer to
Section IV, Schedules of Rates and Prices):
- Schedule no.1: Plant (Including Mandatory Spare Parts) Supplied from Abroad, with
possibility to split-up if Plant is supplied from different origins;
- Schedule no.2: Plant (Including Mandatory Spare Parts) Supplied from within the
Employer’s country;
- Schedule no.4b: Installation and other services - Building (civil works) and other
construction works
All other Schedules of the Schedules of Rates and Prices are considered as part of the ‘fixed
element’ in the Contract price.
The base date shall be the date thirty (28) days prior to the Bid closing date.
The date of adjustment shall be the mid-point of the period of manufacture or installation of
component or Plant.
The following conditions shall apply:
(a) No price increase will be allowed beyond the original delivery date unless covered by
an extension of time awarded by the Employer under the terms of the Contract. No
price increase will be allowed for periods of delay for which the Contractor is
responsible. The Employer will, however, be entitled to any price decrease occurring
during such periods of delay.
(b) If the currency in which the Contract price, P0, is expressed is different from the
currency of the country of origin of the labour and/or materials indices, a correction
factor will be applied to avoid incorrect adjustments of the Contract price. The
correction factor shall correspond to the ratio of exchange rates between the two
currencies on the base date and the date for adjustment as defined above.
(c) No price adjustment shall be payable on the portion of the Contract price paid to the
Contractor as an advance payment.
1-5-22 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
1. Part 1:
Part 1 of the Technical Proposal shall consist of the following sub-parts in the following
order:
A. An Executive Summary of the Technical Section:
A detailed Design, Supply, Install - Workplan including a detailed program
timetable (the “Design, Supply, Install Workplan”) setting out the manner in which
the Bidder proposes to carry out the Design, Supply, Install - services as defined in
the Draft Contract (the “Design, Supply, Install -Services”) and meet the Design,
Supply, Install standards in accordance with the Technical Standards Appendix to
the General Conditions. The Design, Supply, Install Workplan shall be divided into
the following Sections:
A Section entitled “Process Design” which consists of the process calculations and
conceptual drawings, principles of hydraulic design and P&ID’s that are sufficiently
detailed to communicate the Bidders design intent for all components of the
HRWWTP and the site. The design, process calculations and conceptual drawings
shall include the following:
a. A site plan showing the location and footprint of the proposed constructions,
including access roads, pipelines and discharge point(s) and limits to the
operator(s) construction activities;
b. A site plan showing all proposed works:
c. Calculations that demonstrate that Bidder’s plan complies with the Design,
Supply, Install Services. Process calculations need to demonstrate appropriate
system selection and functioning of the HRWWTP, taking into account gradual
increase in loads and flows over time and taking into account variations in
climate and temperatures. Process calculations, to be delivered for water and
sludge handling and discharge of residuals, need to be based upon internationally
accepted principles and need to be self-explaining.
d. Design basedn the process calculations, showing all main components of the
proposed solution and operating philosophy, including redundancy and process
continuity.
e. Calculations demonstrating the amount of energy and chemicals needed for
proper operations of the plant under pre-defined conditions as set out in The
Employers Requirements;
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-5-23
f. Main drawings on preliminary level showing all main components and pipelines;
g. Process flow diagrams and process instrumentation and information diagrams;
h. List of proposed components, sizes, proposed construction materials;
i. List of all main electrical and mechanical equipment to be used, including design
(max.) and nominal capacities;
j. A detailed program and schedule setting out the proposed sequence of works to
be undertaken, including estimated start date, date of finalization and time
allocations for individual components of the work, proposed resources to be
allocated and the identification of all major milestones, including the submission
of detailed design documentation, design development documents and;
k. An itemized list of all principal codes of practice and standards proposed to be
used for the Design, Supply, Install Services.
B. A Section entitled “Plant Equipment, Parts and Components and Operator’s
Equipment” which consists of a list of proposed and selected suppliers of major
Plant Equipment and Operators Equipment (Design, Supply, Install ) and Operator’s
Equipment (Operations) including:
a. fixed plant and equipment
b. mobile plant and equipment
c. materials (consumables/non durable materials) and chemicals
For all items listed in Clause B a - c, the bidders shall provide the Conceptual
design, catalogue cuts or detailed information with respect to manufacturer and
source, model designation, primary specification, and year of manufacture ( as far as
applicable);
C. A detailed Work Plan ( the “Operations Work plan”) setting out the manner in
which the Bidder proposes to carry out the operation and maintenance, under his full
responsibility, of the HRWWTP as set out in the Draft Contract (the “Operations
Services”) and meet the operational technical standards in accordance with the
Technical Standards Appendix to the General Conditions. The Operations Work
plan shall be divided into the following sections:
a. A section entitled “Operations Start-up” which provides the outline contents
and the overview of the Bidder’s proposed plans and programs for the start-up
of the facility and the facility operations and maintenance, including the items
listed in the Bid Data Sheet;
b. A detailed staffing plan (the “Staffing Plan”) setting out the Bidders’ proposed
staffing arrangements for the carrying out of the Design, Supply, Install
Services. The Staffing Plan shall be divided into the following sections:
1-5-24 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
For the Key Staff positions, the names of the Bidder’s employees who
will occupy the Key Staff positions; and
2. Part 2:
Part 2 of the technical Proposal shall comprise Alternative Technical Proposals in accordance
with BDS 13.1, and consist of the sub-parts in the same order as specified in Part 1, A-D.
1-5-26 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
The Second Stage Bid shall comprise the updated First Stage Technical Proposal comprising
any modifications required to the first stage technical proposal as recorded in the
Memorandum entitled “Changes Required Pursuant to First Stage Evaluation.
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-5-27
Site Organization
1-5-28 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
Method Statement
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-5-29
Mobilization Schedule
1-5-30 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
Construction Schedule
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-5-31
Plant
1-5-32 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
Contractor’s Equipment
Form EQU
1 Bidder must demonstrate that he has sufficient access to and has sufficient
experience to make available the equipment needed for the DSI of the HRWWTP.
A summary of proposed equipment shall be submitted which is needed by the
Bidder for the DSI.
The Bidder shall provide further details of proposed items under 1 and 2 of equipment using
per equipment a separate Form.
Item of equipment
The Bidder shall copy in the left column of the table below, the identification of each functional guarantee required in the
Specification and stated by the Employer in the Bid Form Operation and Maintenance Costs, under G1 of Section III.
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria, Chapter 9, and in the right column, provide the corresponding value for each functional
guarantee of the proposed plant and equipment.
Personnel
Form PER -1
Proposed Personnel
Bidders should provide the names of suitably qualified personnel to meet the specified
requirements stated in Section III. The data on their experience should be supplied using the
Form below for each candidate.
1. Title of position*
Name
2. Title of position*
Name
3. Title of position*
Name
4. Title of position*
Name
Form PER-2
Position
Professional qualifications
Address of employer
Fax E-mail
Summarize professional experience over the last 20 years, in reverse chronological order.
Indicate particular technical and managerial experience relevant to the project.
The following Subcontractors and/or manufacturers are proposed for carrying out the item of
the facilities indicated. Bidders are free to propose more than one for each item
Date: ______________________
ICB No.: ___________________
Invitation for Bid No.: ________
Page ________ of _______ pages
Please note that a written authorization needs to be attached to this sheet as required by ITB
21.2 Single Stage Bidding) or ITB 17.2 Two Stage Bidding
1-6-40 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
Date: ______________________
ICB No.: ___________________
Invitation for Bid No.:_________
Page ________ of_ ______ pages
Form CON – 2
Historical Contract Non-Performance
In case a prequalification process was conducted this form should be used only if the
information submitted at the time of prequalification requires updating
Bidder’s Legal Name: _______________________ Date: _____________________
JVA Partner Legal Name: _______________________ ___________________
ICB No.: __________________
Page _______ of _______ pages
-performance did not occur during the stipulated period, in accordance with
Sub- Factor 2.2.1 of Section III, Evaluation Criteria
Form CCC
Bidders and each partner to a JVA should provide information on their current commitments
on all contracts that have been awarded, or for which a letter of intent or acceptance has been
received, or for contracts approaching completion, but for which an unqualified, full
completion certificate has yet to be issued.
2.
3.
4.
5.
etc.
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-6-43
Financial Situation
Historical Financial Performance
Attached are copies of financial statements (balance sheets, including all related notes,
and income statements) for the years required above complying with the following
conditions:
(a) Must reflect the financial situation of the Bidder or partner to a JVA, and not sister
or parent companies
(b) Historic financial statements must be audited by a certified accountant
(c) Historic financial statements must be complete, including all notes to the financial
statements
(d) Historic financial statements must correspond to accounting periods already
completed and audited (no statements for partial periods shall be requested or
accepted)
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-6-45
*Average annual turnover calculated as total certified payments received for work in
progress or completed, divided by the number of years specified in Section III, Evaluation
Criteria, Sub-Factor 2.3.2.
1-6-46 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
Specify proposed sources of financing, such as liquid assets, unencumbered real assets, lines of
credit, and other financial means, net of current commitments, available to meet the total
construction cash flow demands of the subject contract or contracts as indicated in Section III,
Evaluation and Qualification Criteria
Source of financing Amount (US$ equivalent)
1.
2.
3.
4.
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-6-47
Starting Ending
Contract Identification Role of
Month / Month /
Years Bidder
Year Year
*
Contract name:
______ ______ Brief Description of the Works performed by the _________
Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
Contract name:
______ ______ Brief Description of the Works performed by the _________
Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
Contract name:
______ ______ Brief Description of the Works performed by the _________
Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
Contract name:
______ ______ Brief Description of the Works performed by the _________
Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
Contract name:
______ ______ Brief Description of the Works performed by the _________
Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
Contract name:
______ ______ Brief Description of the Works performed by the _________
Bidder:
Name of Employer:
Address:
*List calendar year for years with contracts with at least nine (9) months activity per year
starting with the earliest year
1-6-48 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
Role in Contract
Contractor Management Subcontractor
Contractor
Complexity _________________________________
Methods/Technology _________________________________
Information
Contract Identification _______________________________________
Award date _______________________________________
Completion date _______________________________________
Role in Contract
Contractor Management Subcontractor
Contractor
Information
Description of the key activities in accordance with
Sub-Factor 2.4.2b) of Section III:
Form CER
Quality Management / Environmental, Social, Health and Safety
(ESHS) Certification
DESCRIPTION INFORMATION
Identification of the certificate _______________ [insert full name of the
certificate]
First award date ________________ [insert day, month, year of first
certificate award]
Last update of the certificate __________ [insert day, month, year of latest
renewal, if any]
Issuers Name _______________ [insert full name]
Form ESHS
Environmental, Social, Health and Safety (ESHS) Documentation
The Bidder shall demonstrate the existence of the following in-house policies and
procedures.
DESCRIPTION SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION
REQUIRED IN ENGLISH (ORIGINAL OR
TRANSLATION)
1 Health & Safety Policy Policy document or the index of the health &
safety manual or other relevant documents
acceptable to the Employer.
2 Environmental Management Policy Policy document or the index of the
Environmental Management manual or other
relevant documents acceptable to the Employer
3 Declaration of compliance with ILO The Bidder certifies (by ticking explicitly)
core labour standards10 in operations complying with the following core labour
standards
f Association
The Bidder shall demonstrate the existence of the following in-house policies and
procedures.
DESCRIPTION SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION
REQUIRED IN ENGLISH (ORIGINAL OR
TRANSLATION)
provided to employees
6 Procedures on main ESHS issues Unless information is already provided in policy
documents submitted under the requirements of
Articles 1 and 2 above, provide in-house
procedures for managing the following E&S
issues, acceptable to the Employer:
[Delete items if not applicable and add items
specific to the works and resulting from the
project’s ESMP if any – refer to the “User Guide
for including Environmental and Social (E&S)
Criteria” located at the start of this SBD of
Works]
a) Wastewater effluents
b) Air emissions, noise and traffic
c) Waste
d) Erosion and sedimentation
e) Site rehabilitation and revegetation
f) Hazardous products
g) Training and recruitment
h) Safety on construction sites
i) First aid and medical evacuation for staff
j) Control of infectious and communicable
diseases (HIV/AIDS, malaria…)
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-6-55
_____________________________
[signature(s)]
1-6-58 Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification
11
The amount of the Bond shall be denominated in the currency of the Employer’s country or the equivalent
amount in a freely convertible currency.
Option B-Section III. Evaluation and Qualification Criteria – Without Prequalification 1-6-59
Interested bidders (including sub-contractors or suppliers) are advised that AFD’s decision to
finance its respective part of a contract will be conditional on meeting AFD’s legal financing
requirements relating to EU and French financial and commercial sanctions as set forth in the
table below [1]:
PART 2 –Employer’s
Requirements
2-6-61
1 Introduction
1.1 Project Framework and Project Objective
The City of Hebron in the south eastern section of the West Bank/Palestine is currently
served by a combined sewer system which provides sewer services to some 82% of the city.
Currently, there is no wastewater treatment plant at the end of the sewer system and
therefore, most of the sewage intercepted by the sewers runs untreated along Wadi As-
Sameen until it reaches the green line and enters Israel at Shokeit. Here it is treated by the
Israelis.
This flow of untreated wastes for about 40km along the Wadi, causes damage to the eastern
aquifer and the communities which border the Wadi along the way. This was identified as a
serious issue as far back as the 1970s. In order to address this outstanding issue within the
Hebron Governorate, the Palestinian Authority has requested support from the donor
community for this project - the Hebron Governorate Regional Wastewater Management
Project, which would be financed by a consortium of multilateral and bilateral partners
including the l’agence française de développement (afd), the European Union and the World
Bank. As part of this project, the Design Build Contractor is to design and construct the
Hebron Regional Wastewater Treatment Plant (HRWWTP) to treat the flows identified for
the area and meet the effluent limit stipulated for in the contract.
The contractor will undertake all of the works required for fully functional units which meet
the Employers’ requirements, specifications and minimum technical requirements stipulated
in these documents within the contract.
2 Scope of Work
2.1 General
The work comprises, but is not limited to, the complete detailed design, preparation of
working drawings, manufacture, temporary erection at the manufacturers or his sub-
contractors works, supply, shipping, construction, commissioning, testing, training and
guarantee the Works during the Defects Notification Period of construction of the Hebron
Regional Wastewater Treatment Plant (HRWWTP) as described in the Employer’s
Requirements.
Contractor shall guarantee the quality and soundness of the Works, which shall be in
accordance with all demands that can be made to them. All machines and parts shall meet the
highest demands, which can be made to them by the latest technical standards in case of
choice of materials, constructions, finishing and good performance.
The EMPLOYER and the Project Manager will bear no responsibility whatsoever for the
completeness and accuracy of any information made available to Tenders.
Tenderers are expected to conduct their own research on all important matters related to the
Project and their Offer. Any negligence or failure on the part of the Tenderer to obtain
reliable information on the site or elsewhere concerning any matter affecting the Contract
Agreement shall not relief the selected Contractor from any of his obligations or liability
arising from the Contract Agreement.
The HRWWTP has to be able to receive, treat and discharge the wastewater with
composition and characteristics, including the expected variations, as indicated in the tables
below.
Table 1 shows the projected growth of connected population and of the daily wastewater
flow for the period 2015 up to 2027. The table shows two stages: stage 1, the presently
2-2-64 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
connected Hebron city with autonomous growth of loads and flows, and stage 2 in which
additional parts of Hebron and of surrounding villages will be connected.
Table 1 Projected growth of average (on yearly basis) loads and flows for two development
stages up to the year 2027.
Year 2015 2020 2025 2027
This project aims at principally designing for the stage 1 facilities, Hebron City 2027
(225,580 people equivalents or 15,250 m³/day on an average yearly basis) but must allow for
possible expansion of the plant in the future to meet
The total stage 2 capacity for 2027 (455,500 people equivalents or 43,500 m³/day).
Only the stage 1 HRWWTP is part of this contract. Nevertheless, the stage 1 design has to
allow for and demonstrate possible future expansion to the full stage 2 capacity by logical
spatial reservations.
The layout of facilities on site for this stage project has therefore taken into
consideration the long term plans for future construction at this location and proposed
stage 1 facilities have been suitably located so that future works may be constructed
without disruption of existing systems.
The main loads and flows to the HRWWTP consists of municipal wastewater. Industrial
wastewater is to be diverted and treated separately on-site (which is not part of this contract).
However there maybe circumstances where wastewater from the following sources may
unintentionally enter system:
- Stone cutting residual
- Olive mill wastewater – usually only in the months of October – December
- Wastes from tanneries.
It may be possible that these and other discharges inhibit the nitrification process. It is
therefore required to allow in the design for “early warning” monitoring equipment and
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-65
Civil works for the following main elements of the treatment plant will, under this contract,
be constructed for full capacity (final stage 2 capacity - 2027)
- Lifting station building and raising main
- Screening
- Grit chamber
- Head works and flow divider
- Any connecting pipe works that will eventually convey the total or combined water flows
in the ultimate situation
- Effluent discharge channels or pipes
- Main power cables
- Housing and buildings that accommodate mechanical thickening and of dewatering
equipment
- Reservations for future electrical cabinets and reservations in the SCADA system/blind
panel.
These items pertain to civil works and structures only. Mechanical and electrical equipment
that is not required for plant operation according to stage 1 capacity, are not to be purchased
and/or delivered and/or installed under this contract.
Furthermore the site has to be graded and prepared as to accommodate the total 2027
capacity.
The flows vary, resulting in an average day, peak dry weather flow and the peak wet weather
flows for the stage 1 final design year 2027 are presented in table 2.
The pollutant loads for process design shall be calculated by multiplying the average flow
15,250 m3/day by the design concentrations (as detailed in table3) with a 10% peak factor.
Temperatures of the wastewater may vary from 13 degrees in winter to 30 degrees in summer
period, which can be assumed as design temperatures. The HRWWTP has to function
effectively in this temperature range.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-67
The effluent of HRWWTP has to fulfil the following monthly average values:
pH 6 to 9
Adequate design of suspended solids removal is required to meet the effluent standards for
BOD5, COD and TSS. Removal of TN requires biological nitrification and denitrification.
Disinfection shall be needed to meet the required coli-count.
It is foreseen that in future more stringent effluent requirements will be applied, focusing at
nitrogen and phosphorus effluent standards even below 10 mg/l TN and 5 mg/l respectively.
In any case the process selection for BNR removal shall be based on biological treatment.
The process design should demonstrate that the present investments can be converted to
process stages that form part of a future HRWWTP fit for enhanced nutrient removal.
2-2-68 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The dewatered sludge that is produced in the HRWWTP will be trucked away and disposed
of in the Halmyra Landfill on a distance of about 36 km from the HRWWTP site. This
requires that all sludge is stabilized and dewatered to a dry solid content of at least 20%
before it leaves the site of HRWWTP.
The digested sludge shall be considered stable if in accordance with the following:
- Volatile solids reduction of the sludge in the digesters shall not be less than 38%
- In case of aerobic digestion the oxygen requirements of the digested solids in the sludge
shall be no more than 2.0 mg/hr per gram of volatile solids at 20ºC.
The difference in elevation between the high and low spots on the site is more than 40m as
shown on Figure 1. Significant land levelling and other measures will be required before the
site can be made suitable for plant construction. When developing the site design, the
contractor shall take into account 1 to 100 year flash flood. The contractor shall provide
detailed calculation and methods for allowing safe operational discharge
An access road is recently completed. A 1800 kVA power supply has been planned to be
adjacent to the access road. The detailed design and construction of the power line shall part
of this contract. In addition a water supply pipeline has been constructed and is also
adjacent to the access road. The contractor will include in his bid connecting this water
pipeline to the wastewater treatment plant facilities.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-69
Under this Design, Build and Install (DSI) contract, Bidders are requested to propose their
own solutions for the HRWWTP, provided that they meet the conditions set out in the
bidding document. Processes and technologies elaborated in the conceptual design are just
for reference and are not intended to prescribe any specific technologies, techniques and/or
equipment to be utilised by the contractor.
Chapter 5 of this document details the required compliance with the ESCHIA that is to be
followed.
The Employer reserves the right to reject the equipment or components found to be defect or
not conforming to the Contract requirements. The equipment or components shall be repaired
or replaced by the Contractor. The employer shall not afford any additional expenses thereof.
The Tender Drawings and Proposals shall be those submitted by the Tenderer with his
Tender, and shall comprise the following:
3.1.1 Drawings
Note: The above details need to include all the works described in the tender documents
Written proposals of the basis and principles of the design of the Works, with particular
regard to the treatment principles, hydraulics and structural design, and to the standards and
codes of practice.
Proven process technologies have to be applied with references in similar climate and
demographic conditions as Hebron. Requirements for contractors references are a minimum
capacity of 250.000 PE and contain secondary treatment of domestic or combined
domestic/industrial waste water.
For the treatment of sludge proven technologies have to be applied with references in similar
conditions as Hebron and on a scale with a minimum of 50% of the HRWWTP. References
have to be provided proving effectiveness of the proposed technologies.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-73
Tenderers shall prepare design documentation of sufficient detail, as a basis for stage 1
evaluation and for issuing the stage 2 offer and to allow a proper evaluation of the submitted
bid. The design documentation shall contain but is not limited to:
Design report containing:
a) Description of process design
b) Description of individual process elements
c) Process design calculations, including starting points used, demonstrating
appropriateness of the design for meeting the effluent standards12;
d) Calculations demonstrating the energy consumption of the treatment plant for the
following eight situations:
Load/flow stage 1 year 2020; temperatures of 13C and 30C; dry weather and rain
weather flow
Load/flow stage 1 year 2027; temperatures of 13C and 30C; dry weather and rain
weather flow
e) Hydraulic calculations
f) Connecting Sewer hydraulic and structural design
g) Schedule of plant and equipment cross-referenced to P&I diagram with details of
manufacturer, model, and power rating.
h) Operational conditions / requirements
The Contractor shall design in detail the construction of the civil, mechanical, electrical
installations and the control and monitoring system of the treatment plant in accordance with
the Employer’s Requirements. The installations shall be designed in such a way that they
operate automatically to the extent described in the Employer’s Requirements and with a
minimum of power and chemicals consumption. Preparation of detailed design drawings and
design calculations is part of Contractors’ obligations.
The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying any design parameters given in this
document and for securing all approvals of his designs required by the relevant Palestinian
authorities. The detailed design shall be undertaken using current best practice and shall
comply with the Employer's Requirements, current Palestinian design and construction
regulations and all Construction Standards currently in force in Palestine.
All Plant and Materials supplied shall be designed to meet the needs for satisfactory
operation under all possible working conditions like pressure, temperature, degree of
wetness, friction, load, vibration, intensity of current etc., including variations in the ambient
temperature.
The philosophy of the design shall be simplicity, energy efficiency, robustness and reliability
such that the equipment will give long trouble-free service with low maintenance costs.
Particular attention should be paid to ease of access to facilitate inspection, cleaning,
maintenance and repair in a safe environment to ensure satisfactory operation under all
service conditions.
12
Models to be used to demonstrate appropriate design are ASM2d or ASM3 for activated sludge, method vd
Emde for aeration requirements, Chen & Hashimoto for sludge digestion
2-3-74 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Wastewater characteristics
The influent may contain high concentrations of coarse material, fibres & cloths, grease, sand
and grit and other components. The treatment system must be sufficiently robust and flexible
to resist the impact of these components and must be able to remove them from the
wastewater.
Gravity flow
After initial pumping, the wastewater should flow through the entire HRWWTP under
gravity. If post treatment is applied, a lifting station may be used for this purpose.
Internal flows like return sludge and flows related to sludge treatment may be pumped.
By-passes
In case by-pass(es) are applied, these should function under gravity. All by-passes of relevant
objects should be closed pipes, except the by-pass of the grit chamber and screens.
Construction site
HRWWTP has to be constructed within the limits indicated in figure 1-1. The function of the
Wadi has to be kept intact under all circumstances and the contractor shall take necessary
actions are measures required to ensure this.
Energy consumption
The net energy consumption of the HRWWTP for wastewater and sludge treatment shall be
not more than 30 kWh per 55 kg Total Oxygen Demand (TOD) removed from the
wastewater.
TOD is measured as: BOD mass removed + 4,57 x NKjeldahl mass removed.
Seismology
The HRWWTP site is located in a, from seismic point of view, relative active site with a
Peak Ground Acceleration Factor of Z=0,075 to Z=0,3 on rocks. The project area has a PGA
factor of Z=0,15 according to the Uniform Building Code. Design and construction of the
HRWWTP has to mitigate any adverse effects that may be caused by earthquakes to this
extend.
3.2.1 General
All plant, equipment and materials to be incorporated in the Works shall be new brand and
recently manufactured, unused products of reputable, experienced manufacturers. The plant
and materials shall be of industrial grade, standard construction, of sturdy design and
manufacture. Materials, equipment and plant shall be designed for long life and shall be
suitable for continuous 24 hours per day operation in strong sewage environment.
With the design of the installation, the Contractor shall strive for uniformity of manufactures,
proportions and materials of therefore qualified parts, such to be judged by The Project
Manager. Similar items in the project shall be the products of the same manufacturer. All
equipment performing similar duties shall be of a single type and fully interchangeable in
order to limit the stock of spare parts required.
Due to the minimal number of local supplier agencies of unique and specific equipment and
plants for wastewater treatment plants in Palestine, the contractors are to include in their bid
all necessary site visits by the international supplier’ s representatives to be implemented at
the various stages of construction and commissioning, as deemed necessary by the
Contractor, the supplier or the Project Manager.
All systems and component(s) required to achieve the desired system operation and specified
output and for continuous safe, efficient and cost-effective system operation shall be
provided whether specified or not in this document.
3.2.2 Substitutions
Where brand names or manufacturers of the equipment are mentioned this information is
meant to describe a functional quality level. The Contractor is free to make another choice
under the explicit restriction that the quality of the equipment and the performances are at
least equivalent., subject to the Project Manager’s concurrence.
2-3-76 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The Contractor is specifically cautioned to the following minimum considerations that will
be reviewed by the Project Manager in case of any necessary substitutions:
- full conformity with architectural and engineering design criteria, design concepts and
performance requirements
- physical dimension requirements to satisfy the space limitations shown on the Drawings
- interchangeability of parts and components
- accessibility for preventive maintenance and possible removal and replacement
- compatibility with other materials, assemblies and components
- full compliance with all applicable test requirements
- full compliance with guarantee requirements.
The burden of submitting adequate information to the Project Manager to prove equality of
substituted materials, items of plant or assemblies of construction shall be the responsibility
of the Contractor. The acceptance of such shall not relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility under this Contract and the various guarantees provided therein.
3.2.3 Materials
Plant, equipment and Materials to be provided by the Contractor and incorporated in the
Works shall be new brand and recently manufactured, unused, and of the most recent or
current design and specification, and shall incorporate all recent improvements in design and
materials unless provided for otherwise in the Contract.
The Contractor shall include a copy of the technical specification extracted from the
manufacturer's technical literature for all offered Plant, equipment and Materials.
The Contractor shall provide supports, anchors, plinths, grouting, sealants and fixings
associated with the installation of Plant, Equipment and Materials associated with this
Contract and full compliance with the plant, equipment and materials manufacturers.
Gaskets, seals and lubricants required for pipes, fittings and appurtenances shall be supplied
with the specified pipes, fittings and appurtenances all from the same producer or/and
approved supplier by the producer.
Materials and components shall be stored in such a manner as to preserve their quality and
condition to the standards required by the Contract in full compliance with the suppliers
instruction.
Materials and components shall be handled in such a manner as to avoid any damage or
contamination, and in accordance with all applicable recommendations of the manufacturer.
Contact between dissimilar materials where galvanic reaction could occur shall not be
allowed.
Unless otherwise described in the Contract the use, installation, application or fixing of
materials and components shall be in accordance with all applicable recommendations of the
manufacturer. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall make use of any technical advisory
services offered by manufacturers.
The Contractor shall supply all Plant, Equipment and Materials, unless directed otherwise by
the Project Manager.
At the site boundary the noise level shall not be higher than 40 dB(A)
Hazardous warning notices indicating those ear defenders are to be worn shall be installed at
entrances to rooms/enclosures where the sound pressure level exceeds 80 dB(A).
As part of this Contract, all information and surveys on site, as far as necessary for the
detailed design and not included in the Tender Dossier, shall be obtained/performed by the
Contractor.
2-3-78 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The Contractor shall be responsible for confirming all necessary site levels and geotechnical
information appertaining to the Works. The Contractor shall undertake further investigations,
as he considers necessary for the design and construction of the Works.
Except where otherwise specified all levels shall be in metres above mean sea level with an
accuracy of three decimals. The data for all levels shall be based on benchmarks; these
benchmarks and the related data shall be made available to the Project Manager for his
information.
The Contractor shall execute during the period of construction of the Works necessary
benchmarks, which shall be checked periodically.
The Contractor shall be responsible for constructing the Works in accordance with the data
on levels. The Contractor shall establish data and information on levels, dimensions,
alignments and gradients during the execution of the Works.
The Contractor shall maintain a record of the levels of all the benchmarks and shall submit
one copy of the records to the Project Manager.
Design Life
Description
Years
Buried Pipework 50
Buildings 50
Design Life
Description
Years
Electrical Installations 20
Flowmeters 15
The general approach to the design of the odour control systems shall comprise of two stages,
as follows:
- Containment of the area in which the odours are formed – headworks, influent pumping
station and primary clarifier
- H2S and Odour removal from the contaminated air by means of biological washing or
filtration processes, if necessary two or three stage to achieve the required removal rate.
Hydrogen peroxide or sulfuric acid application will be not allowed due to security
reasons.
The required air pollution concentrations for design the odour control system are given in the
following table
Ventilation
Ventilation fold
: spaces accessible by human beings ventilation 12 times/hr
: spaces not accessible by human beings ventilation 5 times/hr
To be ventilated
: sumps for lifting pumps
: screens and screen sumps
: grit chambers, when covered
: classifier when covered
: distribution works / sumps, when covered
: overflow weir primary sedimentation tank, when covered
: containers for grit, screenings and sludge
: housing for thickeners and dewatering equipment
: sumps for return sludge
: sumps for terrain sewers
The operations of the process related to reception, treatment and discharge of wastewater and
sludge shall be automated, allowing continuous operations with only 8 hours per day
presence of operation staff.
13
D/T – Dilution to threshold ratio
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-81
The operations of the process related to reception, treatment and discharge of wastewater and
sludge shall be automated, allowing continuous operations with only 8 hours per day
presence of operation staff.
The Plant shall be designed for maximum operation stability, reliability and flexibility and
minimum energy consumption (maximum efficiency) considering:
- appliance of safety factors wherever necessary in order to cover variations in wastewater
flow and pollution loads.
- Provision shall be made for suitable steps, platforms and hand railing to allow safe and
easy access for the operation and maintenance of all items of plant according to European
and Palestinian Standards.
The plant shall be designed so that it shall be possible to manage operation with one of the
process units out of order, without any deterioration of the effluent quality.
The design has to accommodate uninterrupted flow of wastewater through the HRWWTP
even in case of malfunction of major plant components. By-pass of untreated wastewater
flows is not permitted.
By passes due to taking parts of installation out of operation is not allowed when malfunction
of major plant components fail the plant still has to meet 80% of maximum design load and
100% of hydraulic design load in case of malfunction of main plant components.
The contractor will in his bid demonstrate how the plant will operate at full flow and load
when one of the main components is out of service (e.g. one primary clarifier, one aeration
tank, one secondary clarifier, one digester etc.
The design shall incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all
those concerned in the operation and maintenance of the works.
To guarantee access to all mechanical and electrical parts of the whole Plant for cleaning,
maintenance and repair, the following points are important:
- Space between the process units (tanks, chambers, channels, pipe, machines, pumps,
aggregates etc.) shall be big enough to guarantee acceptable accessibility for the working
personnel to facilitate inspection, cleaning and repairs, dismantling and replacement
especially when working with lifting units.
- All covers such as gratings for channels or assembly orifices shall be constructed in such
way that they can be opened by one person only without danger.
- All tanks shall be provided with platforms and gangways with proper handrails.
- All tanks and chambers shall be designed in that way that easy emptying is possible,
either by providing a washout for each tank or a pump sump.
- Accessible means shall be provided for the easy lubrication of all bearings, mechanisms
and moving parts.
- Defining accurately explosion proof areas in accordance with the Standard for Fire
Protection in Wastewater Treatment and Collection Facilities -NFPA 820 – latest Edition
and appropriate measures to be taken.
A minimum of four duty and one standby submersible pumps will be installed in the pump
station for the stage 1 flows. Local Hand/Off/Auto control will be provided. The variable
speed pumps will be controlled by level controllers in the pump station. High level alarms
and low level cut-off will be provided. The pumps will operate in a lead/lag configuration
with manually rotated duty pumps.
The pumping station should be able to receive internal return flows (e.g. from sludge
treatment, wash water from screenings).
3.10.4 Screens
- Isolation of the screens is effected via manually actuated penstocks. Screenings shall be
washed and compressed as to reach a dry solids content of at least 60%. Screenings are
mechanically conveyed to containers (2 duty, 1 stand by);
- reject water from the screens has to be recycled to HRWWTP to a location up flow from
the screens;
- A sampling point has to be placed after the screens.
Grit should be removed before primary or secondary treatment. Grease may be removed
together with the grit, or skimmed and removed from the primary sedimentation
The grit system shall be designed such that:
- grit shall be removed prior to entering the biological treatment stages;
- the grit removal system shall be able to achieve a removal rate of at least 95%, at a grit
size greater than 0.25 mm and 65% of grit greater than 0.1 mm in size with a specific
gravity of 2,650 kg/m³. grease and scum shall be removed through an upper scraper that
skims the scum, grease and floatable matter from the surface of the passive zone towards
a scum pit.
- grit shall to be automatically conveyed to two (one working and one reserve) classifiers
and from there to containers (2 duty, 1 standby)
- The grit shall be washed via the classifiers and should not contain more that 2% organic
material;
The grit (and grease) removal chambers shall be fully enclosed to avoid odour nuisance.
Minimum detention time in the units shall be 6 min at storm water flow when two units are in
operation.
Pipework
- All interconnecting pipes will be equipped with valves and the pipes shall be from
SS316L.
- The maximum air velocities in the aeration pipes will be as follows:
14
If biological denitrification is used, the (return)flow to the denitrification basin should be low in oxygen.
2-3-86 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
- The pipe diameter and pipe configuration shall be design to avoid noise nuisances and
vibrations.
-
3.10.8 Aeration system
All kind of aeration systems are allowed, permitted the requirements for oxygen transfer
efficiency are met. The minimum oxygen transfer efficiency will be 4.0 kg O2/kWh
consumed.
All submitted calculations concerning required aeration capacity shall be based on the
following criteria.
If it is necessary to store biologically treated water, effluent, wash water or similar, than these
buffers are regarded as integrated parts of the effluent post treatment system.
- the selected materials have to be resistant to corrosion caused by any chemicals that may
be used in the treatment process.
- Post disinfection will be based on chlorine disinfection.
This disinfection will include a chlorine contact tank with a 30 minute retention time. The
chlorine contact tank will also have internal baffles that ensure proper plug flow for optimal
contact.
If chemicals are used in the water and/or sludge treatment process, the following conditions
apply
- Storage capacity of all chemicals shall be 14 days at minimum.
2-3-88 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
- The possible methods for dewatering are either belt filter press or centrifuge. The
contractor must consider minimum energy requirements while obtaining the minimum
Dry solid content.
- Sludge dewatering shall be provided to produce sludge with a minimum solids
concentration of 20%.
- the maximum allowable PE dosage is 15 g active PE/kg DS.
- Operation will be based on only 40 hours a week (5 consecutive days 8 hours)
- The TSS in the supernatant will be no more than 1,000 mg/l
The dewatered sludge will be transferred from the dewatering system to transport containers
with a capacity of 20 ton each. The system will be automated so that it is possible change
from one container to the next without onsite personnel. The distribution system will have
places for 4 containers, to provide sufficient capacity for at least a full day of sludge
production
Trucking facilities shall be provided to load trucks for removal and disposal of dewatered
sludge. This also shall include an automated truck scale for determining the weight of sludge
hauled. The scale has to be suitable to weigh loaded and unloaded trucks.
- If the use of anaerobic digestion is selected, the biogas is to be used for electricity
production in a CHG.
- The CHG is capable of dealing with all biogas that is actually produced in the process.
- The electrical efficiency of the CHG is at least 33%.
- The cogeneration shall include bio-gas treatment including but limited to H2S removal,
moisture removal particle removal and silicate removal.
- The cogeneration will include a complete cooling and heat transfer system. The excess
heat will allow for heating the sludge before entering the anaerobic digesters by specific
heat exchangers.
- The cogenerator will be fully synchronized with the electrical grid supply.
- The storage tank shall include all safety features such as safety (pressure/vacuum) relief
valves, , flame arrestors, flame traps etc. in compliance with EU Atex 95 and 137.
3.10.22 Flare
If the use of anaerobic digestion is selected, a flare is to be installed for the incineration of
biogas in case production exceeds consumption.
- A flare should be equipped with an internal flame.
- Capacity of the flare shall be sufficient to burn the full actual gas production.
For process and cleaning purposes process water is to be used including but not limited to
polymer dilution, foam dispersion etc.;
- Process water is to be produced through the filtration of effluent. Backwash will be sent to
the inlet of the plant
3.10.24 Hydrants
The distance between the process components/pumps and the local switch junction box shall
be no more than 15 m.
- The maximum length of the cables between service point and process components and
objects is not more than 20 metres.
A fully functional SCADA system suitable for automatic control, monitoring and data
logging is required. The control system programming shall be able to be amended on site in
the light of operating experience, or as new equipment is installed, and shall have the ability
to monitor fault conditions and to alert the operator of these fault conditions. A data
exchange with the central dispatcher and a remote operation and control of the HRWWTP
shall be assured.
The proposed SCADA an PLC software shall be a well-known commercial brand that is
already in use in similar facilities.
All data from HMI will be sent to Hebron representatives – complete and full HMI without
the possibility of intervention.
In particular the design of the control and data acquisition system shall provide for the
following:
The data acquisition system shall have provision in the database to record all the results of
sampling and testing undertaken by the HRWWTP Laboratory. The design of the Data
acquisition system shall provide two operating data storage units in order to guarantee
redundancy of the system.
An emergency power supply that provides sufficient capacity to allow running of the plant in
accordance with the specifications included herein.
It is envisaged that the Plant will be manned five days per week, one shift -eight hours- per
day. Full operation of partly manual operated component shall be ensured for 5 days a week
and 8 hours a day.
At a regular operation modulation modus a fully automatic operation shall be possible for a
period of at least 2 days.
3.10.27 Instrumentation
The plant is to be equipped with instrumentation required for logging and recording process
operations, for automated process control, for signalling and generating alarms et cetera. An
overview of the minimum required instrumentation for process control is set out in the table
below.
Table 1
DS content
NO3/NH4
sampler
Temp.
Level
Auto.
Flow
Pres.
Tur.
DO
EC
pH
Instrument
Inlet sewage X X X X X
Inlet PS X X X
2-3-92 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
DS content
NO3/NH4
sampler
Temp.
Level
Auto.
Flow
Pres.
Tur.
DO
EC
pH
Instrument
Primary sludge X X X
Reactors X X
Air supply X X X
Secondary X
clarifier
RAS PS X X X
Secondary X X
sludge
Chemicals X X
Tertiary X X X X
treatment
Combined X
sludge before
thickener
Combined X
sludge before
thickener
Digester X X X X
Recycle sludge X
Dewatering X X
Biogas X X X
Additionally all equipment will be equipped with instrumentation generating alarms when
crucial parameters of the equipments are superseded (eg temperature, flow, level).
The contractor will provide 1800 kVA from the site next to the entrance road (indicative
coordinates 31º29’01.8N; 35º07’09.0 E) and to the electrical building within the HRWWTP
as a main power source. In addition the contractor will provide standby generation by means
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-93
of generator sets. The standby generator capacity (without the biogas cogeneration) shall be
sufficient to fully operate the process without detrimental degradation for up to 15 days based
on full design load of the plant.
- A full electrical installation and cabling is to be provided for any electrical use on the site;
- Stand by generator sets complete with fuel storage sufficient for 5 days uninterrupted
functioning of the HRWWTP is to be provided for emergencies;
- Fuel storage is to be designed as to prevent any leakage of fuel to the environment;
- Fuel storage is to be secured against theft of fuel;
- The diesel generator sets will be fully synchronized with the electrical grid supply.
3.10.30 Protection
- In order to protect the plant against theft, vandalism, burglary and fire a security system
will be installed detecting movements, smoke and fire in the buildings and on the site;
- An automated system will alarm the authorities;
- The site will be fenced with a 3 metre high fence This should include a 80 cm concrete
base and wire mesh fence above that. ;
- The entrances to the site will be equipped with automated steel gate.
- All windows will have steel grates.
- The doors to the buildings will include doubled bolted steel doors.
3.10.31 Buildings
Two separate buildings may be considered or a single building with two storeys.
office 1 – manager 20
office 2 – operations 20
office 3 – operations 20
office 4 - documentation 20
laboratory 60
maintenance 100
dining room 50
toilets 30
general passages 30
Total 720
Maintenance and storage room have to allow for maintenance of pumps and other equipment,
have to allow for hoisting equipment, accessibility for trucks and heavy equipment.
Separate entrances are required for access to offices and meeting rooms and storage and
maintenance rooms.
Illumination
The following values will apply for illumination
B laboratory 700
F stock 200
G toilets 300
J orientation illumination 10
The Works shall be set out and tied to the Palestine Co-ordinate System. The Contractor shall
establish temporary benchmarks and survey stations at suitable locations on the Site of the
Works and during the progress of the Works shall periodically check the levels of the
benchmarks and the co-ordinates of the stations against the originally obtained points lines
and levels of reference. Temporary benchmarks and survey stations shall be located clear of
the construction Works.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager for his information drawings in duplicate
showing the locations and levels or co-ordinates as appropriate of each and every temporary
benchmark and survey station used for the setting out of the Works.
The Contractor shall before commencing execution of any given section of the Works submit
to the Project Manager for his information complete setting out details with supporting
calculations and drawings (including drawings showing the locations and co-ordinates of the
reference points used).
The Contractor shall identify setting out dimensions for all structures by relating them to
existing Works and by interpretation of the Drawings. The gradients of pipelines and the
levels of weirs, inverts of channels and other hydraulic structures shall be as shown on the
drawings for the information of the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall set out sections of the Works at such times as may enable Service
Authorities to carry out temporary or permanent alterations to their equipment or buried
services and share such information with the Project Manager.
2-3-96 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The Contractor shall employ well-qualified and experienced surveyors for the execution of
the survey work and setting out as described in the Contract, subject to the concurrence of the
Project Manager.
The survey instruments to be used by the Contractor shall be of the modern type and make,
and suitable for the work to be executed and shall be maintained in a first class condition.
For all survey, instruments used in the Works the Contractor shall submit recent calibration
certificates issued by competent authorities. Further calibration of the instruments shall be
carried out every six months.
All field-books, calculations, maps, etc. of the survey activities mentioned above shall be
handed over to the Project Manager immediately after the completion of the survey work.
The Contractors shall record the progress of the Work on electronic photos.
The Contractor shall provide, for State Quality Control Inspection, a schedule of the main
phases of the construction.
Unless otherwise specified, all material and workmanship shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the latest editions of the European standards. The ruling standards and
manuals shall be those that are valid thirty days before the first date set for the delivery of
Tenders. Other equivalent National Standards or internationally recognised standards may be
proposed to the Project Manager for review and comments. Palestine standards are referred
to where appropriate. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the standards and
translation if required.
The European standards have priority over the local standards, unless the local standards are
more stringent. Whenever the local standard does not cover a specific aspect of the
Employer’s Requirements – General Technical Specification, the European standard shall be
applied.
Throughout the General and Specific Technical Specifications, reference is made to ‘the
applicable standards’. This reference should be interpreted as explained above.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-97
The Contractor shall bring issues regarding the application of standards to the attention of the
Project Manager for resolution in accordance with the Contract.
The Contractor shall obtain and keep on Site at least one copy of each of the relevant
Standards, Codes and Manuals or approved National Standards which are referred to in the
Specification. In addition, the Contractor shall keep on Site a copy of any other Standard,
Code, Manual, or National Standard, which applies to materials supplied.
Copies of the standards shall be made available for reference at all times at the office of the
Project Manager. All standards shall be in English. If the standard is not in English the
contractor shall provide a certified a translation to English of any of the Standards or
Manuals the Contractor shall provide a typed copy of the translation within 7 days of
receiving a written request from the Project Manager.
All materials, plant and workmanship not fully specified herein or covered by Standards or
Manuals, shall be of such kind as is used in first class work.
The Contractor shall submit a final design report to the Project Manager for his review within
13 weeks of the Commencement Date. This report shall comprise the following elements:
1. Detailed description of the chosen treatment concept. The report shall as a minimum
elaborate on the following aspects:
design criteria
treatment principles and process assumptions
aeration
sludge handling (sludge thickening, sludge digestion, sludge dewatering, sludge
transport, sludge storage)
monitoring and process control principles
operational costs.
How the current design allows for implementing the future expansion.
2. Process Flow Diagram (PFD) and Process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs)
including control philosophy statement.
3. Final detailed process calculations
2-3-98 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
4. General site layouts with leading dimensions and setting out details showing the
arrangement of all buildings, plant, pipework, services, roads, fencing and drainage as
appropriate together with finished site levels.
5. General arrangement drawings of each structure including sections and elevations with
leading dimensions, hydraulic levels, finished surface levels, proposed materials,
location, foundations, arrangement of plant, plant size and weight, pipework, ducts,
dosing lines and accesses, fixing details, craneage and lifting equipment proposals.
6. Details of modifications to existing infrastructures.
7. Design criteria and methods covering the structural and geotechnical design of the
Works.
8. Mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, process control and automation design
descriptions.
9. For above ground pipework, layout drawing and installation details including valves,
meters and other ancillaries, painting and protection, and maintenance working space.
10. For underground pipework, plans and longitudinal sections including details of existing
ground levels, pipe diameter, material, rating/strength and profile, existing ground surface
and loading, pipe bedding details, location of known services, location of valves,
washouts, connections and access chambers as appropriate.
11. Hydraulic design calculations for pipelines, channels weirs and pumping stations for both
the liquid, air and the sludge lines.
12. Design of control and monitoring system.
13. Schedule of operation and exploitation costs.
14. Construction planning including provided staged site plans.
15. A synopsis of the QA/QC program – assumptions, main principles and benchmarks for
verification and acceptance.
16. A synopsis of the health and safety program – assumptions, main principles and
benchmarks for verification and acceptance.
17. A synopsis of the environment and social program – assumptions, main principles and
benchmarks for verification and acceptance.
Detailed design documents shall be prepared for a complete component (e.g. reactor,
clarifier, digester) of for complete infrastructure between process facilities (drainage, site
development, process piping, electrical cables etc.). These documents shall include detailed
working drawings, particular specifications and P&IDS. These shall be submitted a specific
activity at least 42 days prior to commencement of the activity for Project Manager/client
comments and approval. The contractor shall revise and modify the design documents in
accordance with the Project Manager's comments and instructions within 21 calendar days.
The following design documents shall be submitted to the Project Manager for his review at
least 42 days prior to the programmed activity commencement:
1. Pipelines:
hydraulic calculations, including determination of test pressures;
site plan and general arrangement drawings;
pipeline profiles;
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-99
drawings and schedules showing all pipe work, fittings, chamber and trench details
and thrust block arrangements;
reinforcement drawings and calculations for thrust blocks to pipe work;
drawings, calculations and method statements for all road, rail and river crossings and
connections to existing pipe work;
landscaping, land drainage, top-soiling and all ancillary works relating to
reinstatement works.
2. General arrangement and foundation drawings complete with dimensions, for all
buildings, tanks, plant and associated equipment.
3. Structural calculations and drawings including foundation design.
4. Reinforced concrete details, structural steelwork and masonry drawings.
5. Reinforcement drawings and calculations for in situ and precast concrete. Bending
schedules.
6. Fabrication drawings for any structural steelwork.
7. Architectural and building works drawings including masonry, cladding, roofing, etc, and
all specified fixtures and finishes both externally and internally.
8. Details of protective coating design.
9. Landscaping, land drainage, sub and top soiling and all ancillary works.
10. Detailed drawings and calculations of grating floors, hand railing, gutter covering and
hatches.
11. Detail drawings of doors, door- and window jambs and windows.
12. Building services layout drawings/routing diagrams and schedules including internal,
external and emergency lighting, small power, water distribution systems, foul drainage,
and lighting protection, earthing and bonding.
13. Manhole/access chamber schedules, schematic layout of each manhole and access
chamber providing details of pipe layout, diameters, flow direction, invert levels and
cover level.
14. Details of road construction, valve chambers, washouts, meter chambers, fencing,
manholes, access chambers, grit traps, property connections and associated connections
and outfall structures (if any).
15. Details of any pipeline, road, watercourse and railway crossings.
16. Mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, process control and automation detailed
specifications.
17. Lifting equipment specifications.
18. Layout of principal mechanical, electrical, instrumentation, process control and
automation plant including:
interconnecting pipework, channels and ducts;
ventilation and ducting;
supports of equipment and pipework;
cable duct and cable draw pits;
control building and kiosks;
transformer and generator locations;
motor control panel general arrangement drawings;
access routes into buildings and structures including provision for removal of plant,
emergency exists and craneage proposals.
2-3-100 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
19. Detailed process and instrumentation diagrams (P&IDs) and control philosophy
statement, architecture diagrams and data sheets for the Works together with the control
philosophy for each plant item.
20. Pump and fan calculations. Calculations of total pump head (static and dynamic) and
determination of the various pump types and pump sizes.
21. Heating calculations.
22. Consumer / equipment list.
23. Instrument list.
24. Valve list.
25. Functional Design Specification (FDS).
26. Hazardous Area Zonal Classification drawings.
27. MCC and control panel drawings including:
panel layout and facial;
single line diagrams;
schematic and wiring diagrams (switch gear, control, instrumentation, etc.);
instrumentation loop diagrams;
instrumentation and control block diagrams;
control cable connection and system interface diagrams;
panel engraving schedules;
automation network architecture.
28. Electrical calculations and drawings including:
fault level calculations throughout the site;
voltage transient calculations on large motor starting;
cable sizing calculations;
distribution line diagrams;
connected load and maximum demand calculations;
LV schematics;
cable schedules and cable layouts / routes drawing including calculations;
control philosophy block diagram including written description of control systems
and schedule of digital and analogue inputs and outputs submitted on A4 sheets with
a separate sheet/sheets for each drive/function;
fire, gas and security alarm system schematic diagrams and layouts.
29. PLC I/O lists.
30. Documents for the European Guidelines (for example, PED, ATEX-137, CE): for
example, Explosion Safety Document (ATEX137); Technical Construction Document
(CE); Construction documents for PED.
Construction and installation method statements shall be prepared for the principal elements
of the Works and shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review at least 28 days prior
to the programmed activity commencement.
Construction and installation method statements shall make due allowance for all
requirements and restrictions imposed by the Contract. Each method statement shall
comprise a step by step schedule of specific operations or activities with description, date,
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-101
times and duration of each step. The statements shall be supported by sketches, diagrams or
other supportive detail as necessary to enable a clear understanding of the method and
significance of each step of work or operation.
The construction and installation method statements shall include, but not be limited to:
1. the method of working for all major activities;
1. construction equipment to be used;
2. measures for controlling noise and vibration;
3. hours of working;
4. layouts of compounds storage facilities;
5. sources of Materials;
6. methods of movements and storage of bulk materials and spoil;
7. haulage routes;
8. site organisation;
9. measures of controlling dust;
10. temporary lighting details;
11. temporary works details;
12. details of all disposal sites;
13. maintaining and cleaning of Site roads and highways;
14. site safety procedures;
15. pedestrian, light vehicular and emergency access;
16. any proposed demolition methods.
For existing structures, which are to be retained and require refurbishment in order to meet
the required design life, the Contractor shall also submit details of his structural assessment
and his proposals for renovation works.
The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with printed copies of all technical
documents for review and comments. (in sufficient scale which allows for easy reading) and
one copy in DXF format on CD ROM or USB stick where applicable. On submission, the
Contractor shall clearly identify previously submitted inter-related technical documents and
also changes to previously reviewed technical documents.
All designs, drawings and documents submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager for
review and comments shall be checked by the Contractor before submission and shall be
signed by the construction manager and relevant professional engineer (e.g. electrical,
structural mechanical engineer etc.) of the Contractor’s staff in accordance with QA
procedures, to confirm that the check has been conducted. The Contractor shall likewise
check submissions from his sub-Contractors or from any other source before passing such
submissions to the Project Manager.
A drawing and document register shall be kept and updated continuously by the Contractor.
A copy of the register shall be submitted to the Project Manager every time a drawing or
document is issued.
2-3-102 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The Contractor shall submit 4 draft copies of the documents, as one package, to the Project
Manager for review and comments. The Project Manager’s review and comments period will
be 42 days. In case the Contractor chooses not to submit all required documents as one
package, the Project Manager’s review period will start upon receipt of the last document. If
the Project Manager gives notice to the Contractor that the submitted documents fail to
comply with the Contract, they shall be rectified and resubmitted in accordance with this
clause.
The Project Manager will return, before the end of the review period, one copy of the
submitted documents to the Contractor, containing his remarks and corrections. The
Contractor shall alter his design documents in accordance with the remarks and corrections
of the Project Manager.
The Contractor shall then submit 4 copies of the design documents, as one package, to the
Project Manager for review and comments. The Project Manager’s review and comments
period will be 21 days. In case the Contractor chooses not to submit all required documents
as one package, the Project Manager’s review and comments period will start upon receipt of
the last document. If the Project Manager gives notice to the Contractor that the submitted
documents fail to comply with the Contract, or that the submitted documents have not been
altered in accordance with the Project Manager’s remarks and corrections, they shall be
rectified and resubmitted in accordance with this clause.
The contractor has to provide a time schedule for submission of documents upon start of the
project, that needs review and comments from the Project Manager. The schedule will be
regularly updated.
Upon review and comments one copy of the submitted documents shall be returned to the
Contractor, duly stamped and signed by the Project Manager.
All drawings submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager for review and comments
shall be on ISO standard size sheets with a maximum size of A0. Every drawing shall have a
title box in the bottom right corner showing:
- employer’s name;
- title of scheme;
- title of Contract;
- contractor's name;
- title of work location;
- title of drawing;
- drawing number;
- date;
- author;
- scale;
- a separate revision box;
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-103
- signature of Contractor to the effect that the drawing, whether his own or from any other
source, has been checked by him before submission to the Project Manager. Also every
related Project Manager shall sign this in addition to the construction manager.
Sheet sizes shall be in accordance with international sizes unless otherwise agreed by the
Project Manager.
The drawings of all parts of the construction shall be clear and complete. The choice of scale
will depend on the kind of drawing and/or details to be presented.
All drawings shall be dimensioned and shall include a graphical scale to aid the use of
photographic reproductions. All clearances required for the installation, routine operation and
maintenance of items of Works shall be noted on the drawings.
The Contractor shall use the metric international system of units (SI units).
Designs and documents submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager for review shall
include:
- contents list;
- scope (description of the contents and purpose of the submission);
- conclusions and recommendations;
- references, specification requirements, codes, manuals and supporting documents used,
drawing numbers and titles of drawings which are based on the design;
- description of design approach;
- criteria, parameters and methods used;
- test procedures, analyses and results;
- calculations and schedules;
- qualitative description and comments on results;
- any other relevant information.
indicate the Codes of Practice or Standard(s) upon which the design is based. Any computer
programs used in the design shall be fully described, and details of inputs and printouts shall
be presented in a manner that can be readily understood. Program manuals and any
instructions to program users shall be made available to the Project Manager upon request.
Final works inspection reports shall be submitted to the Project Manager for review and
comments before dispatch of the Works from the manufacturer.
Manufacturer's instructions for plant and equipment installation and maintenance shall be
submitted alongside with the detailed installation drawings.
Draft Operation & Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted to the Project Manager for his
review and comments at least eight weeks prior to the commencement of Tests on
Completion. The document shall be in English and the specific instruction for the operation
and maintenance of the plant shall be translated to Arabic.
The following documentation will not be specifically required for review and comments but
be submitted to the Project Manager for review and comments. In case commented the
contractor shall take the comments during implementation:
1. all civil and structural calculations;
2. services routing diagrams;
All documents and drawings to be provided in accordance with this clause shall be in
English. All data and text that is presented on nameplates, displays, etc. shall be in the
English language.
Drawings shall show tolerances, clearances, loading, finishes, materials, ratings, etc. All
drawings shall be to scale and include a graphical scale to aid the use of photographic
reproductions. All dimensions shall be metric.
The Contractor shall prepare all construction drawings and detailed drawings, calculations,
etc., necessary for the execution of the Works. The Contractor shall submit, 42 days before
execution of the relevant part of the Works, 4copies of the documents to the Project Manager
for information purposes only.
If the Project Manager gives notice to the Contractor that the submitted documents fail to
comply with the Contract or the design documents, they shall be rectified and resubmitted in
accordance with this sub clause.
The drawings shall include those provided by the Contractor during the design, construction,
structure and manufacturing period together with drawings submitted by him with his tender
as appropriate. In addition, each item of the Facility, e.g. valves, motors, starters, cables, etc.
shall be shown on detailed general arrangement drawings clearly marking the position of the
component parts. All parts shall be numbered and the numbers given shall correspond to the
spare parts list, pamphlets and descriptive matter.
The Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager copies of the As-built Drawings as
detailed below:
- 4 full size, unbound, paper copy in English;
- 4 bound set of A3 paper reductions in English;
- 4 copies in electronic format on CD Rom as AutoCad files (latest release) in English.
Subject to the review and comments of the Project Manager, the Contractor may submit the
As-built drawings in an alternative electronic format provided that the Contractor provides to
the Project Manager free of charge the software required to read, edit, save and print the
drawings.
All As-built drawings submitted by the Contractor to the Project Manager shall be on ISO
standard size sheets with a maximum size of A0. Every drawing shall have a title box in the
bottom right corner detailing project and drawing details, as well as numbering according to
the quality system of the contractor. All layout and arrangement drawings submitted by the
Contractor shall be drawn to scale and dimensioned and shall include a graphical scale to aid
the use of photographic reproductions. The Contractor shall use the metric international
system of units (SI units).All drawings shall be signed by the relevant Project Manager
(structural, mechanical, electrical engineer etc.) and by the construction manager.
Comprehensive electrical circuit drawings shall be provided showing the relation of one
electrical item of equipment to another.
In addition to the foregoing, each item of electrical equipment shall be provided with
schematic drawing and a wiring drawing.
The schematic drawing shall show the connections in a schematic form enabling the
operation to be ascertained, while the wiring drawing shall show the individual components
approximately in their relative physical positions, with the electrical connection shown
exactly as wired, to enable a particular component or connection to be located on the actual
equipment.
Every connection shall be numbered and the number given for a particular connection shall
be the same on the schematic drawing, on the wiring drawing and as tagged on the actual
equipment itself.
2-3-106 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Where possible one print of each of the appropriate electrical equipment drawings and
diagrams shall be provided in a purpose made pocket of each cabinet.
Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be submitted) . Each manual shall include but not
be limited to the following:
1. Table of Contents.
2. An overview of the different suppliers/manufacturers of plant with their representatives
in the Palestine Territories, including addresses and telephone numbers.
3. A general description of the scope, purpose and manner of working of each section of the
Works. The Contractor shall also include a description of parts of the treatment process
not included in the Contract, i.e. the operational description shall cover the entire water
treatment works;
4. The as-built drawings and the final P&ID
5. Specific operation procedures for each component and for the entire plant. This shall
include operating times and sequences, chemical dosages, operating ranges of various
process parameters etc. Each procedure shall include a description of a step by step
instructions for pre-start, starting up, including start up following emergency shutdown,
normal operation and emergency shutting down of plant. Data on general setting of
controls associated with controlling design conditions, monitoring instruments and
switchgear, together with the details of initial settings of all adjustable items shall be
included. A schedule of alarms, how they are initiated and what action should be taken
6. Maintenance procedures for regular and preventative maintenance, including frequencies
of routine maintenance procedures, fault finding charts, trouble shooting, procedures for
disassembly, repair and re-assembly, and procedures for alignment, adjusting and
checking. Sectional arrangement drawings of major items of plant should also be
included, i.e. pumps, valves, etc., with dismantling instructions;
7. Manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions, including procedures for
the calibration of instruments, etc.;
8. Instrumentation, control and automation equipment operating instructions for normal
procedures in a step by step format including flow charts, control operations, requests for
display or printing of data, performance monitoring, response to alarms or failures,
changing of operation parameters, and manual data entry;
9. Safety instructions for the various areas including chemical storage, explosive areas,
areas where drowning may be a concern, chemical handling instructions, microbial
contamination prevention, etc.;
10. In addition to the above, the following schedules shall also be included:
A schedule of plant supplied including spares, tools and lubricants and their
recommended equivalents, which must be readily available. The schedule shall give
the manufacturers' name, address and appropriate Make/Model No./Cat No.,
description of unit and component parts identified on drawings and giving ordering
reference numbers and price lists.
A schedule of copies of all tests certificates. This shall include for both works and site
testing of motors, pumps, pressure vessels, electrical switchboards, transformers,
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-107
instrumentation, lifting equipment; for site tests of pipework, cabling and electrical
installations; earthing; lightning protection; and other items where appropriate. Pump
performance curves as tested and system curves shall also be provided.
A schedule of CE-certificates.
The maintenance scheme shall be to the review and comments of the Project Manager and
shall be provided complete at the time of the commissioning of the Facility. It shall have
sufficient space for expansion if required to include any further routine work.
The Operation & Maintenance manuals prepared by the Contractor and manuals relating to
plant by any sub-contractors shall be printed or duplicated and shall be bound into suitable
loose leaf hard cover binders of A4 size, using not more than 70 % of the binder capacity.
Each volume of the manuals shall be identified with the typed or printed title "OPERATION
AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL", the title of the project and the identity of the general
subject matter covered in the manual. Each manual volume shall contain a table of contents.
Not later than 8 weeks before start of the Tests on Completion, the Contractor shall submit
two draft copies of the documents, to the Project Manager for review. The Project Manager’s
review period will be 42 days. In case the Contractor chooses not to submit all the required
documents as one package, the Project Manager’s review period will start upon receipt of the
last document. If the Project Manager gives notice to the Contractor that the submitted
documents fail to comply with the Contract, they shall be rectified and resubmitted in
accordance with this sub-clause.
The Project Manager will return, before the end of the review period, one copy of the
submitted documents to the Contractor, containing his remarks and corrections. The
Contractor shall alter his documents in accordance with the remarks and corrections of the
Project Manager.
Following review and comments but prior to the issue of the Taking Over Certificate, the
Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager 3 copies of the Operation and Maintenance
Manuals. With the exception of manufacturers literature, 2 copies shall be in Arab and 1
2-3-108 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
copy shall be in English. In addition, an electronic copy of the text of the Operating and
Maintenance Manuals shall be provided in Arab and English. The format of the electronic
copy shall be agreed with the Project Manager.
All data and text that is presented on name plates, displays, etc. and on computers, all
equipment documentation, all drawings and schemes, all manuals for operation and
maintenance, etc. shall be in the English language.
Within 14 days of commencement, the Contractor shall submit to the Project Manager details
of the Contractor’s Representative and other key personnel including respective job
descriptions, addresses, 24 hour telephone numbers and facsimile transmission numbers. The
Project Manager shall be notified immediately of any changes to the details provided.
3.16.3 Programme
The Contractor is not allowed to start construction works until he has obtained the review
and comments of the Project Manager for the detailed design. Construction works shall be
executed in a sequence that has the review and comments of the Project Manager. The
Contractor shall submit a general programme for the execution of the Works with his Tender.
- a detailed works contract programme in the form of a Gantt chart which clearly details
individual functions, actions and tasks and shows the period for design, approvals,
procurement, fabrication, main construction, testing, commissioning and all other such
operations as may be applicable with key dates indicated;
- an associated Pert chart with all task linkages and the critical path clearly indicated;
- resource charts specifically related to but not limited to the activities shown on the
programme of work.
Photographic Records
- A photographic record shall be kept of the Construction work on the following basis:
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-109
- Prior to commencement of the Works, a joint photographic survey of the Site and the
surrounding area shall be carried out and agreed by the Project Manager and Contractor’s
Representative.
- The Contractor shall on the first working day of each calendar month, or on such later
date, as agreed with the Project Manager, undertake a further photographic survey of the
Site and progress of the Works.
- All photographic surveys shall be undertaken by a recognised professional photographer.
Unless otherwise agreed with the Project Manager each survey shall comprise no less
than 72 photographs.
- Two sets of photographs shall be provided to the Project Manager, together with the
digital format files. The photographs shall be high resolution, full colour and 150mm by
100mm minimum size. The photographs shall be suitably titled, dated and coded in
numerical order.
- A video film of the site shall be prepared and updated every quarter.
2-4-110 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The Contractor is liable, with respect to the Employer, for all damages to natural resources
caused by the execution of the works or the methods used for execution, unless it is
established that the execution or methods were necessary, according to the provisions of the
Contract.
The Contractor shall arrange and undertake regular safety briefings for all of his staff,
workmen and sub-Contractor’s staff. In addition, he shall ensure that regular safety liaison
meetings are held between the Contractor, Project Manager and Employer. The Contractor
shall carry out a safety audit of the Site at intervals not exceeding six months.
The Contractor shall ensure that all statutory safety obligations are met in respect of anyone
entering the Site.
- Environmental policy
- Organisation and management arrangements for implementing the ESHS plan;
- Construction health and safety plan
- all health and safety risks relating to the execution of the works;
- prevention and protection measures to control risks related to the execution of the
works;
- human and material resources involved;
- works requiring work permits; and
- emergency plans to be implemented in the case of an accident.
- Local recruitment
- recruitment procedures
- training provided
- location and management
- Traffic management
- Atmospheric emissions and dust
- Noise and vibrations suppression
- Dangerous products handling
- Effluents
- Waste storage, handling and disposal
- Worksite clearing, erosion prevention and rehabilitation
The Contractor shall not take possession of the Site before the Project Manager has approved
his ESHS Plan.
The Contractor implements prevention, protection and monitoring measures, as described in
the Health and Safety Plan and other elements of the ESHS plan. During the execution of the
works, the ESHS plan will be updated by the Contractor every two months and reissued to
the Project Manager.
Incident notification
- the Project Manager is informed within one hour of any incident involving serious bodily
injury
- the Project Manager is informed within 6 hours of any near-accident relating to the
execution of the works which, in slightly different conditions, could have led to bodily
injury.
The Contractor prepares a training programme for its workforce. Training sessions are two-
fold: introductory sessions for starting work at the Worksite, and technical training as
required in relation to the execution of the works.
Starting work sessions are organised for each employee and shall cover as a minimum: rules
of conduct, health and safety, emergency and evacuation procedures. Technical training
includes the skills needed for the tasks to be performed, safety and first aid procedures
related to the task.
At worksites where work is ongoing, the Contractor organises one health and safety meeting
per week with all the personnel assigned to the Worksite. At the meeting accidents and
incidents that occurred are discussed, feedback is provided and means of improvements are
assessed to establish corrective actions.
The Contractor organises daily meetings prior to the start of the daily work establishing the
health and safety risks associated with the day’s tasks and activities, and means of prevention
and protection to be implemented.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-4-113
Sanitary wastewater from the construction staff will be collected and disposed of in
accordance with local regulations and review and comments of Project Manager.
All other liquid discharges will be monitored, and treated if necessary, to prove that the
discharges are harmless before being discharged to the surface water, in accordance with the
local regulations and after review and comments of Project Manager.
The Contractor will use equipment and adopt construction and transport methods with
atmospheric emissions which are not in excess of the local emission standards.
On unpaved roads the Contractor takes action to abate dust emissions generated by vehicles
or mobile equipment, including application of water and speed reduction insensitive areas.
When bulk materials are exposed to the wind, the Contractor implements the necessary dust
abatement measures, including humidification or covering of the surface.
The Contractor uses equipment and adopts construction and transport methods so not to
generate noise levels in excess of values applicable. High noise generating works (e.g. pile
driving, blasting, rock clearing, drilling, percussion drilling) are only carried out during
normal working hours.
4.7.4 Waste
The Contractor is responsible for identifying, collecting, transporting and treating all waste
produced on the Worksites. The Contractor implements specific waste management practices
adapted to the level of danger for human health or the natural environment, identifying
hazardous, non-hazardous and inert wastes. The Contractor effectively implements any local
recycling or re-use options for its waste. Waste is stored separately prior to removal from the
Worksites, depending on the level of danger, phase (liquid, solid or gas). Waste is removed
from Worksites and transported to recycling, treatment and waste management facilities on a
regular basis. The collection and storage method and frequency of removal guarantee no
emissions to soil, water or air, regular cleaning and no overflow from containers, no
unpleasant odour or emissions which are dangerous for human health, no proliferation of
insects, rodents, dogs or other animals.
The facilities and equipment used by the Contractor are operated, tested and maintained
pursuant to the manufacturer’s recommendations, in accordance with international standards,
guidelines and industry codes for safe and healthy practice.
2-4-114 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The Contractor ensures that all personnel, visitors or third parties entering a Worksite are
equipped with Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) in accordance with international
standards, guidelines and industry codes for safe and healthy practice.
In the case dangerous substances are used, an assessment of risks and related prevention and
protection measures shall be included in the health and safety plan. Methods for storage,
application and disposal of dangerous substances must be in accordance with international
and local regulations and authorised by the Project Manager.
The Contractor organises medical check-ups for all employees prior to the initial
mobilisation to the Worksite to check aptitude for the work. Medical check-ups are carried
out pursuant to the recommendations of the International Labor Organization. Subsequent to
the check-up, a written medical certificate is issued declaring the aptitude of the worker for
the allocated tasks.
The Engineer can request additional medical examinations for the Contractor’s personnel if
considered necessary, all costs to be borne by the Contractor.
The Contractor ensures that at least one first aid officer is present at all times during working
hours, per shift for 10 to 50 workers present, and one extra first aid officer for each additional
100 workers allocated to the shift.
The Contractor equips each Worksite with an adequate number of first aid kits to ensure that
all workers can access these kits in approximately 5 minutes. Kits must be available at all
times.
The Contractor guarantees access to health care for all personnel in case of accident or illness
occurring during the execution of the works, i.e.:
a) Medical check-ups: initial (recruitment), annual and upon returning to work after sick
leave;
b) Screening, vaccinations and preventive healthcare;
c) General healthcare during the execution of the works;
d) Medical assistance in the event of an accident and assistance for emergency
evacuations.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-4-115
The Contractor establishes and provides the Engineer within one month of the start of works,
an agreement with a specialised company for the handling of personnel in the event of a
serious accident requiring an emergency medical evacuation.
The agreement includes a convention with a referring hospital where the member of
personnel evacuated in emergency conditions will be treated.
4.7.12 Hygiene
the Contractor provides personnel with drinking water at all Worksites. The quantity and
quality of this water complies with the standards of the World Health Organization at supply
points.
Sanitary areas (showers, sinks, urinals, toilets) are cleaned and disinfected by the
Contractor’s cleaning service at least once every 24 hours. Cleaning operations are
documented.
Recommendations and requirements set out in this report are considered integrated elements
in this ER, and as such binding to the contractor, unless overruled in other texts in this ER.
The Contractor will be acquainted with this report, possible project impacts, both in
construction and operational stage, and with the mitigating measures.
every 4 month in the Design, Supply, Install and Assembly phase and every 6 months in
the Operations and Maintenance stage.
- participate in and contribute to any activities to be developed by the Client related to
project communication with the residents nearby the construction area and with a wider
audience.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-5-117
5 Construction aspects
All the produced waste shall be removed and transported to a suitable location in accordance
with local regulations for the specific material. All costs involved in transportation and
disposal of waste shall be borne by the Contractor. The contractor shall provide a
construction waste management plan to be approved by the Project Manager.
5.3 Billboards
Billboards shall be placed at the entrance of the HRWWTP. The billboard for the Site shall
be in English (with an appropriate Arab translation on a second board) and include the
following:
- reference to, and logo of World Bank, AFD and EU;
- name of Employer;
- name of Contractor;
- name of Project Manager;
- name and date of project.
All billboards shall include a space reserved for the indication of the Donor‘s participation.
They shall be of a size, which is appropriate to the scale of the operation and visible to the
passing public.
The section of the billboard reserved for the Donors shall meet the following criteria:
- it shall take up at least 25 % of the total area of the billboard;
- it shall bear the standardised World Bank, AFD and EU emblem and the following text to
be presented as follows:
2-5-118 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
PROJECT CO-FINANCED BY
World Bank
AFD L’Agence française de développement
European Union
Billboards shall be constructed from durable material with a life of not less than two years
after the completion of the work. If, during the Contract, the billboards are damaged or in any
other way made illegible and unrepresentative, they shall be repaired or replaced by the
Contractor.
The Contractor shall mark all open trenches and other obstructions by appropriate signs,
fences, barricades, and lights for the safety of the public.
The Contractor shall instruct all persons engaged in the Construction of the Works not to
trespass on land adjacent to or in the vicinity of the Site.
The Contractor shall ensure that all the access routes, crossings and river frontages are
suitable for his use and allow for any temporary measures that may be required to bring them
up to the standard he requires. The Contractor is to restore the routes, crossings and frontages
to their original state upon completion of the Works.
Should the use of any access routes arranged by the Contractor be considered by the
Employer to be detrimental or contrary to any undertakings or statements given by the
Employer regarding environmental aspects of the Contract, the Project Manager may
withhold his consent to the use of the access route.
Prior to any construction work the Contractor shall prepare and agree with the Project
Manager a schedule recording the condition of all structures, land and surfaces (including the
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-5-119
depth and condition of any topsoil, if present) within the site working areas and access routes
and site compounds.
In dealing with water and wastewater arising from the Works, including water from cleaning,
testing or disinfection, the Contractor shall comply with the requirements of Palestinian
Standards.
The Contractor shall take all reasonable measures to ensure his activities do not cause
pollution of groundwater sources or surface watercourses.
The Contract shall comply with Palestinian Standards covering the discharge of wastewater
into watercourses.
The Contractor shall comply with the contents and recommendations of any national or local
regulations or codes of practice for noise and dust control on construction sites and shall that
the mitigation plan as described in the environmental and social impact assessment are fully
applied.
Before excavation commences the Contractor shall ascertain the accurate location of existing
services using safe methods of pipe location, cable detection or hand digging of trial holes as
appropriate. If any underground service is encountered unexpectedly the Contractor shall
notify the Project Manager of the service without delay. Notwithstanding any services
information supplied to the Contractor the responsibility to locate all services and prevent
any damage to existing services shall rest with the Contractor.
If the contractor causes damage to any utility, the contractor shall immediately repair the
damages on his own expenses, in accordance with the specific instruction of the utility and
under the supervision of the Project Manager.
2-5-120 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The Contractor shall be responsible for all works as may be required in the inter-relation with
existing utilities and services, such as the realignment, adjustment, disconnection, relaying
and reconnection, for all and any delay occasioned thereby and making payment to the
relevant statutory bodies for utility services.
The Contractor shall ensure that all utility service providers, including the Employer, whose
equipment already traverses the Site can gain access to that equipment to inspect, repair and
renew the same without restriction.
6 Tests on Completion
6.1 General
Tests on Completion for the Process Plant shall be undertaken in accordance with Clause 9 of
the Conditions of Contract and shall cover:
- Pre-Commissioning Tests;
- Commissioning Tests;
- Trial Operation;
- Tests on Completion.
Prior to the commencement of the Tests, the Contractor shall have completed the following:
- removed all debris and unwanted materials from the Site;
- ensured and proved to the Project Manager that the Works is safe to operate;
- have completed the demonstration and training for the operation of the Works.
- Written approval of from all the manufacturers that the equipment has been properly
installed.
Records, test certificates, log sheets, performance curves etc. relating to the Tests on
Completion shall be forwarded to the Project Manager in triplicate at the conclusion of each
test. The test records and certificates shall be supplied for all tests whether or not they have
been witnessed by the Project Manager. The information given on such test certificates shall
be sufficient to identify the materials or equipment to which the certificate refers and the
method of test (including connection diagrams as appropriate) and shall also bear the
Contract reference and title.
b. Wet test with water. In this stage the system is operated with water and the water is
recycled from the outlet to the inlet pumping station. This will enable to actually
operate the system with water for a period of 1 month thereby verifying that the
entire system is capable of operating. The contractor must prepare he necessary
piping to ensure this operation. During this period the following tests shall be
conducted:
i. Pump curve tests
ii. Instrumentation calibration, especially flow meters
iii. Blower tests
iv. Dosing equipment calibration
v. Leakage from pipes and tanks
vi. Controls and set point optimization
The pre-commissioning tests will be carried out when all civil, mechanical, electrical and
control components and functions are finished, tested dry, found in compliance with the
contract conditions and accepted by the Project Manager for the acceptance of sewage, water
or sludge. The remedy of any defects shall be done according to the decision of the Project
Manager before or during the Commissioning Tests.
The Contractor shall test each item of plant to ensure proper functioning. All related costs,
including water, energy, chemicals, etc. shall be borne by the Contractor. The Contractor is
deemed to have tested each item to his satisfaction before the pre-commissioning tests shall
commence.
The pre-commissioning services shall consist of all activities necessary to verify that all
installed plant and systems are operating in accordance with the manufacturers’ specification,
are correctly lubricated and ready to be put into operation.
The Project Manager's right to inspect, test and where necessary, reject the plant after the
plant’s arrival in Employer's country shall in no way be limited or waived by reason of the
plant having previously been inspected, tested, and passed by the Project Manager prior to
the plant’s shipment from the country of origin.
Should any inspected or tested plant fail to conform to the Technical Specifications, the
Project Manager may reject the plant, and the Contractor shall either replace the rejected
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-6-123
plant or make alterations necessary to meet Specification requirements free of cost to the
Employer.
Specific activities to be performed include but are not limited to examining and testing each
piece of plant to confirm that:
- manufacturer’s Quality certificates and Warranty certificates are available and eligible;
- all manuals, safety procedure and as-built drawings are available and correct;
- all lubrication requirements have been met;
- controls and instrumentation are functioning satisfactorily;
- equipment functions as stated by the manufacturer;
- maintenance records have been established;
- any modification made has not detrimentally affected its performance;
- safety devices are in place and are operational.
The Contractor shall prepare checklists for each item of plant and the Project Manager shall
witness the precommissioning activities.
The Contractor is to set the treatment works to work following satisfactory completion of the
functional tests. This is to take place following the successful testing of all plant and systems
within the works.
In preparation for commissioning the Contractor shall submit a detailed testing and
commissioning programme to the Project Manager for his review and comments.
The Tests on Completion shall only start after the Pre-Commissioning Tests have been
successfully executed.
The Commissioning Tests shall also demonstrate the hydraulic performance of the whole
sewage treatment stream and ancillary processes and shall demonstrate that;
- The plant can accommodate maximum flows without overflow from other than
designated overflows and without suppression of any hydraulic control device.
- The specified minimum freeboard can be maintained in all units and at all flows.
- Where flow is distributed to a number of units in distribution chambers there shall be
equal division of flows between all operational units within 2 % of the expected values.
Tests shall be carried out at maximum and design flows, and with units out of service.
- The readings from all flow meters measuring flow into and out from the sewage treatment
process stream shall be mutually consistent within 1,5 % of the expected values.
The contractor in his proposal shall prove that the above working requirements. Special
consideration must be taken when the initial flows are lower than the design flows. The
contractor shall provide all required components/accessories needed for this at no extra cost.
The Commissioning tests shall include all tests to demonstrate that the Works can be
operated safely and as specified, under all operating conditions.
If any defect is detected, the faulty equipment shall be rectified immediately at the
Contractor’s expense. If the fault cannot be rectified, the Contractor shall replace the
defective equipment, which also shall be proven to be free from defects.
Sewage Line: When the process is producing effluent of the required standard the Contractor
shall request that the Project Manager attends site to carry out sample tests on the raw
influent and final effluent from the HRWWTP. During a 14-day test period the Contractor
shall record flows being treated by the process.
The Contractor is to demonstrate that the process can meet the requirements of the Contract
to treat to the prescribed effluent quality standards. The Contractor shall sample raw sewage
influent and final effluent discharged from the final settling tanks and analyse on Suspended
Solids, BOD5(ATU), COD and Total Nitrogen by taking one 24 hour composite flow
weighted samples of the final effluent discharges each day during the Tests on Completion
period.
The Contractor is to demonstrate that the process meets the requirements set out for energy
chemicals and efficiency requirements of the Contract by combining removal efficiency
rates and actual and detailed energy consumption measurements.
The process shall be deemed to have passed the tests if the final effluent quality meets the
specified standards on all of the composite sample test results taken during the fourteen day
period, then the Sewage Line plant can be taken over.
This test meets the Performance Criteria set out in these Employers Requirement.
Sludge Line: The Contractor is to demonstrate that the process can meet the requirements of
the Contract to treat to the prescribed sludge dewatering requirements under the conditions
during the Test on Completion period. The Contractor shall take 3 spot samples each of un-
dewatered and dewatered waste activated sludge, every two hours each day during the Tests
on Completion.
The process shall be deemed to have passed the tests if the dry solid content in the cake and
chemical dosage is consistent with the specified target on all of the sample test results taken
during the fourteen day period, then the Sludge Line plant can be taken over.
This test meets the Performance Criteria set out in these employers Requirements.
Note: Sewage line and sludge line are interdependent, and have to be tested on Completion
with both lines in operation and after the sludge line has been fully commissioned.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-6-125
Biogas system (if applicable): The Contractor is to demonstrate that efficiency of the CHG-
set meets the contractual requirements during a three week measurement period, after
commissioning of the sludge line.
General: When the Contractor has demonstrated, in accordance with the above, that the
process is operating in accordance with the Contract any remaining process units are to be
commissioned in sequence. As part of the commissioning, the Contractor shall test all of the
Plant to demonstrate, to the satisfaction of the Project Manager, that all of the Plant operates
and performs in accordance with the Contract.
Independent and Special Tests: The Project Manager may take incoming and final effluent
samples to verify the Contractor’s results. The Contractor shall use an independent testing
laboratory for analysing sewage and final effluent samples. He may also carry out whatever
special tests he determines necessary to demonstrate the satisfactory performance of the
plant.
6.2.4 Reservations
The Performance Criteria Guarantees alone cover conditions, which the Contractor is able to
check and control regularly. The below mentioned reservations are valid.
- That inhibitors in the inlet cause less than 15 % of inhibition on the biological processes.
(Inhibition is measured according to EN ISO 8192, which defines the measurement of
inhibition for BOD due to toxic substances).
- That inhibitors in the inlet cause less than 15 % of inhibition on the nitrification processes
(Inhibition is measured according to EN/ISO 9509, which defines the measurement of
inhibition for nitrification due to toxic substances).
6.3 Approvals
All approvals for completed works required under Palestine Law are considered part of the
Tests on Completion and must be completed prior to issue of the relevant Taking Over
Certificate.
The Contractor shall be responsible for securing such approvals at his own cost.
2-7-126 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
7.1 General
A series of test will be conducted to demonstrate the HRWWTP proper functioning a various
stages of plant commissioning and taking over.
The following tests will be conducted by the Contractor:
First test – 28 day uninterrupted period after commissioning of the complete HRWWTP
(liquid and sludge lines)
Second test – 28 day uninterrupted period after one year of defects notification period
Third test – 28 days uninterrupted period upon completion of the 5 years operation and
maintenance period.
In any case the contractor will not be relieved of his responsibilities on the stage unless there
is full compliance.
Tests after Completion shall be undertaken on the during the Defects Notification Period on a
two weekly basis. They shall be carried out by the Contractor to determine the performance
of the Works and to demonstrate compliance, or otherwise, with Performance Criteria
provided by the Contractor.
If the Project Manager considers there has been a significant error in either the sampling
technique or the method of determination for any sample or analytical result, then it shall be
excluded from the Performance Test results.
7.5 Reporting
On completion of each of the 28-day test periods the Contractor will prepare a 28-day test
period report. The report will summarise the results of all the tests carried out in the stage,
the consumption of all guaranteed consumables during the stage and will include a schedule
of identified failures. This report will be produced and submitted to the Project Manager
within 14 days of the end of each 28-day test period.
Grit Classifying
Tests shall be conducted on the separated and cleaned grit to determine its cleanliness.
2-7-128 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Samples shall be taken from the discharge point of the grit classifier. Units shall be tested
individually and performance conditions applied to each. Dryness shall be determined by loss
of weight from dried samples.
type of Sample
Determinant frequency criterion for passing
Required
Final Effluent
Final effluent quality shall be tested for the following parameters:
Nkjeldahl
Total phosphorous
1. The electrical power consumed shall be recorded at the associated SCADA on a daily
basis throughout each 28-day test period. The daily power consumption shall be totalled
for the whole 28-day test period in kilowatt-hours.
2. BOD and NKj removed shall be calculated from the difference in BOD and NKj loads
between the inlet to the aeration lanes and the final effluent. Loads shall be calculated by
multiplying the daily flow to the secondary treatment plant with the difference in BOD
and NKj concentrations as obtained from the 24-hour composite sampling.
3. Total Oxygen Demand (TOD, in kg) is calculated as the sum of BOD removed (kg) and
4.57 x NKj removed (kg)
4. The specific power consumption for the HRWWTP shall be calculated in kilowatt-hours
per kilogram TOD removed on a daily basis by dividing the nett electrical power
consumed by the total TOD load removed.
frequen
Determinant type of Sample Required
cy
1. The electrical power consumed shall be recorded at the associated SCADA on a daily
basis throughout each 28-day test period. The daily power consumption shall be totalled
for the whole 28-day test period in kilowatt-hours.
2. Dry solids treated shall be calculated from cake solids concentration calculated as
described above multiplied by the total weight of sludge produced.
3. The specific power consumption for the sludge treatment process shall be calculated in
kilowatt-hours per kilogram dry solids treated on a daily basis by dividing the electrical
power consumed by the total dry solids.
1. The chemical consumption shall be recorded on a daily basis throughout each 28-day test
period. The daily consumption shall be totalled for the whole 28-day test period.
2. Dry solids treated shall be calculated from cake solids concentration calculated as
described above multiplied by the total weight of sludge produced.
3. The specific chemical consumption for each chemical for the sludge treatment process
shall be calculated in kg per kg dry solids treated on a daily basis by dividing the
chemical consumed by the total dry solids.
Test shall be conducted on the sludge to establish the dry solid concentration in the cake.
Sludge samples shall be taken from the discharge point of the equipment.
Thickened surplus sludge for Hourly Composite during the operation of Daily
digester the mechanical sludge thickener
Dewatered sludge (Cake dry Hourly Composite during the operation of Daily
solid Concentration) the mechanical dewatering station
S1 S - S 2 / 10 000
% solids capture 100
S S1 - S 2 / 10 000
where:
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-7-131
S is the % dry solids of the feed sludge multiplied by the density of the feed sludge;
S1 is the % dry solids of the dewatered sludge multiplied by the density of the dewatered
sludge;
S2 is the total suspended solids concentration of the filtrate (centrate) expressed in mg/l
(filtrate assumed to have a density of 1).
where:
S is the % dry solids of the feed sludge multiplied by the density of the feed sludge;
S1 is the % dry solids of the dewatered sludge multiplied by the density of the dewatered
sludge,
S2 is the total suspended solids concentration of the filtrate (centrate or decant) expressed in
mg/l (filtrate assumed to have a density of 1);
Q is the feed sludge flow rate expressed in m3/h and
Q3 is the wash water flow rate expressed in m3/h.
The Employer will at all times be entitled to take his own samples for verification and
validation purposes.
During the Defects Notification Period, the Contractor shall immediately inform the
Employer when a result indicates that the guaranteed values are not being met and shall take
immediate remedial action .
If, during the Defects Notification Period, the specific guaranteed consumptions values
controlled on weekly bases as stated above are higher than the ones guaranteed for more than
2 consecutive weeks and no unusual events or defective operation of the Plant have happened
to explain the overrun of the consumptions,, the Contractor’s Process Manager and the
2-7-132 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Employer’s Project Manager will meet on-site, in order to establish the causes that lead to the
Process and/or Running cost functional guarantees not being fulfilled.
If the Contractor subsequently fails to remedy the defects or to prove that the causes are
outside the Contractor’s responsibility, the Contractor shall be required to submit a project
proposal to reduce the consumptions of the plant to the values of the functional guarantees..
If the Defects or causes are found to be the Contractor’s responsibility, the Contractor shall
also be liable to reimburse the Employer for the direct additional costs incurred until the
defects or causes have been remedied.
In general, during the Defects Notification Period, all actions to be taken by the Contractor
and the Employer, respectively, shall be in accordance with the relevant provisions of the
General and Particular Conditions of Contract.
The Project Manager shall not issue the Performance Certificate until all such amendments
are complete and the amended versions of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals have
been approved by the Project Manager.
The FAT for the key equipment, key systems and key components shall be performed in the
factories of the Equipment, systems or component manufacturers.
No part of the Facility or foundations shall be covered up on the Site without the Contractor
carrying out any test and/or inspection required under the Contract. The Contractor shall give
a reasonable notice to the Project Manager whenever any such parts of the Facility or
foundations are ready or about to be ready for testing and/or inspection; such testing and/or
inspection and notice thereof shall be subject to the requirements of the Contract.
The Employer and the Project Manager or their designated representatives shall be entitled to
attend the FAT and/or inspection, provided that the Employer shall bear all costs and
expenses incurred in connection with such attendance including, but not limited to, all
travelling and board and lodging expenses.
Whenever the Contractor is ready to carry out any such test and/or inspection, the Contractor
shall give a reasonable advance notice of such test and/or inspection and of the place and
time thereof to the Project Manager. The Contractor shall obtain from any relevant third
Party or manufacturer any necessary permission or consent to enable the Employer and the
Project Manager or their designated representatives to attend the test and/or inspection.
The Contractor shall provide the Project Manager with a certified report of the results of any
such test and/or inspection.
If the Employer or Project Manager or their designated representatives fails to attend the test
and/or inspection, or if it is agreed between the Parties that such persons shall not do so, then
the Contractor may proceed with the test and/or inspection in the absence of such persons,
and may provide the Project Manager with a certified report of the results thereof.
The Project Manager may require the Contractor to carry out any test and/or inspection not
required by the Contract, provided that the Contractor’s reasonable costs and expenses
incurred in the carrying out of such test and/or inspection shall be added to the Contract
Price. Further, if such test and/or inspection impede the progress of work on the Facilities
and/or the Contractor’s performance of its other obligations under the Contract, due
allowance will be made in respect of the Time for Completion and the other obligations so
affected.
If any Plant or any part of the Facility fails to pass any test and/or inspection, the Contractor
shall either rectify or replace such Plant or part of the Facilities and shall repeat the test
and/or inspection upon giving a notice under GC Sub-Clause 23.7.
After completion of the commissioning of the Plant, the Contractor shall start-up the facility.
The Qualification of the Facility consists of the Installation Qualification and the Operational
Qualification. The Qualifications shall be performed in conformity with the Guidelines
specified in the Employers Requirements. The Qualification of the Facility shall start after
successful start-up of the facility.
2-7-134 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The Installation Qualification means to establish documented proof that the equipment,
systems and components adheres to the above mentioned codes, standards and descriptions,
is correctly installed and all components and documentation required are available.
The Operational Qualification means the collection and the evaluation of all the data required
in order to determine that the Facility, the systems and components always meets the
predicted values of limits with reproducible characteristics as described in the Employers
Requirements.
In respect to the qualification of the systems and components specified, it is the basis for the
determination and proof of the effectiveness, the reproducibility, the performance of the
systems and components, the interaction between systems and components within the
HRWWT and the interaction of the systems and components with the services.
The Installation and the Operational Qualification will be organised on site and will be
carried out by the Contractor and witnessed by the Employer.
The Qualification report will only be accepted if “a clear report of findings” can be
submitted.
The Installation Qualification and Operational Qualification documentation are part of the
Contract and shall be provided by the Contractor.
The SAT test shall be performed after installation assembly, commissioning and start-up and
successful qualification. The SAT test ensures:
- that the equipment systems and components installed and assembled in the Facility are traceable to the guidelines and
standards specified in the Employers Requirements;
- that the Facility is ready for Operation;
- that pursuant to PC 25.2, the Provisional Acceptance Certificate can be signed.
If any dispute or difference of opinion shall arise between the Parties in connection with or
arising out of the test and/or inspection of the Plant or part of the Facilities that cannot be
settled between the Parties within a reasonable period of time, it may be referred to the
Dispute Board for determination in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 6.1.
The Contractor shall afford the Employer and the Project Manager, at the Employer’s
expense, access at any reasonable time to any place where the main Plant equipment are
being manufactured or the Facility are being installed, in order to inspect the progress and the
manner of manufacture or installation, provided that the Project Manager shall give the
Contractor a reasonable prior notice.
The Contractor agrees that neither the execution of a test and/or inspection of Plant or any
part of the Facilities, nor the attendance by the Employer or the Project Manager, nor the
issue of any test certificate pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 23.4, shall release the Contractor from
any other responsibilities under the Contract.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-8-135
8 Miscellaneous Requirements
During the works supervision phase only (excluding design and Defect Notification Period),
the Contractor shall supply and keep in full working order the following equipment:
Photocopier / scanner
One number new plain paper copier with the following minimum features:
- fixed plate type;
- copy size A3 and A4;
- copy speed 10cpm;
- resolution 600dpi;
- document feed (30 sheet) scan once/copy many;
- paper storage capacity 500 sheets A4 (80gsm);
- bypass sheet feeder;
- copy ratio 50-200 %;
- automatic and manual exposure settings;
- power supply 230/240v, 50-60Hz.
computers
Three number new laptop computers with the following minimum features:
- Intel® Core™ i7-5500U processor
- Ports 1x USB 3.0 with power share; 1x USB 3.0; 2x USB 2.0; RJ45 Ethernet; HDMI™
v1.4a; Combination headphone/ microphone jack
- 17” flatpanel LCD screen
- 16 GB Dual Channel DDR3L-memory (1.600 MHz, 2 x 8 GB)
2-8-136 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
printers
One number Hewlett Packard Laser Jet A4 Network printer or similar with the following
minimum features:
- A4 paper size complete with sheet feeder;
- A3 paper size facility;
- Microsoft Windows compatible;
- power supply 230/240v, 50-60Hz;
- one set toner cartridge included;
- operating manual.
All software shall be legally licensed in the name of the Employer and appropriate evidence
must be produced to demonstrate the validity of the license. Software shall be supplied with
original manuals and installation disks/CDs.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-8-137
The Contractor shall maintain the complete configuration as described above in a good state
of repair and each part of it shall be replaced in the event of damage or failure.
8.1.2 Handover of office equipment acquired for the use of the Project Manager
The equipment acquired for the use of the Project Manager shall be handed over to the
Employer four weeks after the issue of the final Taking-Over Certificate, with an inventory
report on the quantities acquired and handed over and the condition of the items at handover.
Except when outstanding defects require equipment to be retained on site for a longer period.
In this case, the equipment shall be handed over on completion of these outstanding defects,
unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager.
Three No. exclusive mobile phones with subscription for speak and data plus 2 No. 2 way
radios suitable for use on and around the site. One line shall be suitable for connection to a
computer for e-mail access. Two telephone handsets also to be provided. The Contractor
shall obtain the radio licenses required to operate the radios.
The Contractor shall maintain the complete configuration as described above in a good state
of repair and each part of it shall be replaced in the event of damage or failure.
The Contractor shall pay for the project related costs (including all international project calls)
of the phones.
Resident Project Manager's Single Office: Minimum Floor area 16 m2 equipped for 1 No.
person
Fixtures and Fittings No. or
amount per
person
Computer workstation 1
Chairs with castors and adjustable backrest, padded seat and arm rests 2
Steel lockable 4 drawer filing cabinet with drawer inserts suitable for 2
2-8-138 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
A4 files
Lockable cupboard (nominal size 1.8m high, 0.9m wide and 0.5m 2
deep)
Power points 3
Coat hooks 2
Office for 3 Project Managers: Minimum Floor area 50 m2 – as above but equipped for
4 No. people
Electric kettle 1
Teapot 1
Coffee maker
Sink unit and cupboard with draining board supplied with hot and cold
potable water supply and wastewater disposal system
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-8-139
Wall cupboard 2
Refrigerator 1 (120l)
Electric Toaster 1
The toilet block shall be fitted with a mortise lock. A set of two keys shall be provided to the
Project Manager.
Fixtures and Fittings No./ details
Flushing WC 1
Power points 2
Power points 8
Coat hooks 12
Chairs with castors and adjustable backrest, padded seat and arm rests 4
Coffee table 1
Ancillary Facilities:
Fixtures and Fittings No./ details
An intruder alarm
Outside tap and boot cleaning facilities adjacent to the entrance door
Car Parking spaces (marked for the sole use of the Project Managers 5
staff)
The said office building shall have a sound floor, wooden walls and lockable doors and
shuttered windows. The offices shall be divided by full height partitioning. The partitioning
shall be reasonably sound proof.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-8-141
The Contractor shall furnish electricity for lighting and power and sufficient quantities of
coffee, tea and soft drinks that are needed daily for the Project Manager's office. The
Contractor shall arrange for the office to be cleaned daily and the Contractor shall provide
domestic consumables such as cleaning materials, soap, towels, napkins etc. The office, the
furniture, fixtures, electricity and water shall be provided complete, within two weeks after
the Commencement Date.
The Contractor shall equip the office with complete air conditioning and heating units with
all supports and electrical works and of rates capacity, in cubic metres per minute, equal to
the gross volume of the office measured in cubic metres.
The Contractor shall submit a plan of the layout of the office facilities to the Project Manager
for review and comments before the Commencement Date.
The furniture, fixtures and equipment in the office shall need prior review and comments by
the Project Manager before being installed. The standard of the furniture, fixtures and
equipment shall be of good quality and shall generally be in conformity to that, which is
provided for supervisory staff offices for similar contracts of this magnitude.
The material used and workmanship employed in the construction of the office shall be
according to the other requirements of the Contract documents.
In particular, the Contractor shall conform to the following general requirements for
construction:
- the area shall be levelled and the ground around the building grade to slope away, to
allow proper drainage;
- the roof of the office shall be of an appropriate construction. Ample fly-proof doors and
shuttered windows and, where required, cupboards, shelves and other fixtures are to be
provided;
- the sewage disposal system shall incorporate piped drainage to a septic tank with separate
soak-away;
- an adequate electrical installation shall be provided, including a distribution box, power
and lighting socket outlets, all necessary wiring, light fittings, etc., complete with
connection.
8.1.6 Maintenance
The Contractor shall maintain the office with furniture, fixtures and equipment, roads, paths,
etc., as from completion of the office until the end of the Defects Liability Period of the
Works, or such shorter time, as the Project Manager may direct. At the end of the Defects
Liability Period, the office with furniture, fixtures and equipment, services, etc., shall revert
to the Contractor.
2-8-142 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
General
During the works supervision phase only (excluding design and Defect Notification Period),
the Contractor shall supply, maintain, repair or replace survey and other instruments and
equipment as listed below. The instruments shall be for the use of the Project Manager and
his Staff. All instruments and equipment shall be fully adapted to the local conditions.
Items marked with * shall be kept in the Project Managers office. Other items shall be kept
by the Contractor but the Project Manager shall be provided with reasonable access.
Maintenance
The Contractor shall maintain the complete configuration as described above in a good state
of repair and each part of it shall be replaced in the event of damage or failure.
- 2 Respirators.
8.2.2 Handover of survey and/ or measuring equipment acquired for the use of the Project
Manager
The equipment acquired for the use of the Project Manager shall be handed over to the
Employer four weeks after the issue of the final Taking-Over Certificate, with an inventory
report on the quantities acquired and handed over and the condition of the items at handover.
Except when outstanding defects require equipment to be retained on site for a longer period.
In this case, the equipment shall be handed over on completion of these outstanding defects,
unless otherwise instructed by the Project Manager.
2-8-144 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
1 Introduction
This Part of the Specification sets out the technical standards of design and materials to be
supplied and work to be carried out by the Contractor. Mention of any specific material or
plant does not necessarily imply that such is included in the Works.
All Civil Works shall, unless otherwise specified, comply with the provisions of this Section.
The names of the manufacturers of materials proposed for incorporation in the Works, shall
be furnished by the Contractor when so requested by the Project Manager who shall have
power to reject any parts which in his opinion are unsatisfactory or not in compliance with
the Specification.
2-2-154 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
2 Standards
The Civil Works shall comply as a minimum with International Standards ISO, EN, BS,
ASTM or DIN, with the respective Codes of Practice and Standards generally used for waste
water treatment plant internationally, adapted to the local conditions, shall be used as an
alternative subject to written approval by the Project Manager.
Where no standards are specified in the present Section or any other Section of the Contract,
the above defined Standards or other international Standards shall apply.
Where specific Standards are mentioned, they may be exchanged by other International
Standards that rule on similar objects, works and/or activities.
Where there is conflict between this Technical Specification and the relevant Standard, the
Technical Specification shall take precedence.
Materials supplied and work performed shall comply with these standards and regulations as
a minimum. If manufacturers offer material to other standards, the standards shall be equal or
superior to those specified and full details of the difference shall be supplied to the Project
Manager if requested.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-155
3 Testing of Materials
3.1 Sampling and Testing of Soils and Fill Materials
Sampling and testing of soils and fill materials includes for trial pits, inspection of
excavations and sampling and testing of soils, aggregates and all materials used for backfill
and embankments.
4 Temporary Facilities
4.1 General
The Contractor shall supply a detail design specifying all temporary facilities that he intends
to organize on Site – stores, workshops, temporary and access roads, water, power and
sewerage supply services etc.- to the Project Manager.
5 Preparatory Works
5.1 General - Works included
Preparatory Works as specified hereunder shall include site clearance, the conservation of
structures and trees and the removal of all structures and . The materials so obtained shall be
reserved for further use, when considered suitable, and all rubbish and material unsuitable for
further use shall be removed from the site.
All surface areas for which stripping of top soil has not been ordered, but has been disturbed
by the Contractor’s operations shall be reinstated, at the Contractor’s expense, to the original
condition including providing and placing of top soil to a minimum thickness of 15 cm.
Topsoil shall be stockpiled on the site in stacks not more than 1.5 m high and shall not be
traversed by any plant. The stock-piles of topsoil shall be grassed and kept free of weeds by
treatment with a foliar acting herbicide..
2-6-158 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
6 Earthworks
6.1 General
The Contractor shall be responsible for all excavations and the disposal of excavated
materials as required for the construction of the works and referred to herein as earthworks.
No earthworks shall commence until the Contractor has affected all safety measures,
including the provision of barriers and traffic management measures.
The earthworks shall be executed in accordance with the applicable Palestinian standards,
norms and regulations, and if such do not exist the work shall be performed in accordance
with internationally recognized standards and norms.
Information as may be given in the contract in relation to the present condition and character
of the existing structures, roadways, embankments and the like and in relation to the
dimensions of various parts of the existing structures, the position, extent and particulars of
drains, pipes, cables and the like, is given without guarantee of accuracy and neither the
Employer nor the Project Manager will be liable for any discrepancy therein. The Contractor
shall follow GC Clause 9 regarding its responsibilities for a proper examination of the data
relating to the Facilities and the Site of HRWWTP.
The absence of such information shall not relieve the Contractor of this liability for the cost
of any repair work necessitated by damage caused by him to such mains and services in the
course of his work and for the cost of all losses arising from their disruption.
6.3 Excavation
6.3.1 General
Earth excavation shall consist of excavating, removing and disposing of satisfactorily any
material, regardless of the material encountered for all parts of the works.
The Contractor shall also remove unsuitable materials/soils or excess soils from the site and
dispose it in a proper manner and location. Unsuitable material shall e.g. include:
- Peat, timber and perishable material;
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-6-159
The Contractor shall make records of the position and extent in excavations of every type of
service and obstruction encountered during the construction of the works, and samples taken
and the results of tests on such samples.
The extent of excavations shall be kept to a minimum practicable for construction of the
works, and all over-excavation shall be filled with suitable material and adequately
compacted.
The earth excavation shall be organised taking into consideration the local conditions as can
be interpreted from the investigations made by the Contractor.
6.3.2 Antiquities
If during the excavation antiquities are encountered, notice will be given to the Project
Manager and work will cease until Project Managers approval for continuation.
6.3.3 Dewatering
The excavation works will include dewatering of the excavation if accumulation occurs
either from surface water or ground water.
Should the surface of excavations at foundation level become deteriorated through any cause
whatsoever, then the Contractor shall further excavate all materials that has become
unsuitable, and replace it- at his own expense- with suitable material and in adequate manner.
6.3.5 Tolerance
Unless otherwise specified no point of the surface of the completed earthwork shall be more
than +/- 50 mm from the designed surface. Within the above tolerances, the surface shall
have a smooth regular face .
Bed levels of drains shall not be higher, (tolerance 0), or more than 200 mm lower than the
correct level.
In the event of slips or falls occurring in the excavations, and where excavations are made in
excess of the specified dimensions, then any unsuitable material that has entered into the
excavation is to be removed from the excavation, and the additional backfilling that may be
required is to be carried out with selected excavated or imported material and adequately
compacted.
Foundations, except where limited by structures, which are to receive fill or structures shall
be scarified and loosened by means of a disc harrow or plough or similar quality methods to
a depth of no more than 200 mm unless such loosening is not needed.. Scarifying shall be
done approximately parallel to the centre line of the fill.
If any unsound material occurs in the bottom of any excavation, the Contractor shall remove
it and dispose it . Unless otherwise specified , the Contractor shall fill the voids so formed
with concrete grade C16/20 or with suitable granular material.
After removal of all unsuitable materials, the entire foundation area shall be graded, moisture
conditioned and thoroughly compacted to the required compaction degree.
The period between completion of preparation of foundation and the construction of the
overlaying works shall be kept as short as possible.
Fill materials shall be handled, placed, spread and compacted in such a manner as to avoid
segregation of the fill and to obtain a stable, homogeneous compacted structure.
When organising his work, the Contractor shall take due account of the climatic conditions,
which may be expected in the area. Should placed material by any cause become
unacceptable, the Contractor shall remove such material or shall process it until all
specifications are met. Such work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Employer.
Unless otherwise specified, the material used for backfill and fill shall be excavated material
of particle size not exceeding 75 mm.
Backfill against the permanent works shall be selected, and free from boulders, cobbles, rock
fragments and the like greater than 50 mm nominal size.
Imported fill materials shall comprise the following materials all in accordance with the
relevant norms:
- Sand in fraction 0-7 mm;
- Gravel in fraction 7-15 mm; and
- River boulders in fraction 8-15 mm.
Where fill will be used below structures and building floors, the material shall consist of
durable gravel, broken stone, crushed concrete or sand with a particle size not exceeding 10
mm. The grading of the material shall be such that there is no migration of fines into the fill.
Operations on earthwork shall be suspended at any time when satisfactory results cannot be
obtained because of rain, or other unsatisfactory field conditions. The Contractor shall drag,
blade, or slope the embankment to provide proper surface drainage.
The material in the layers shall be of the proper moisture content before compaction. Wetting
or drying of the material and manipulation when necessary to secure uniform moisture
content throughout the layer may be required.
The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions to protect exposed faces against
deterioration.
The Contractor shall compact the fill using suitable compacting methods and equipment.
Backfilling shall not impose uneven or excessive load on a structure.
2-6-162 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
All material used for filling shall be deposited and compacted as soon as practicable after
excavation in layers of thickness appropriate to the compaction plant used. Filling of areas
and embankments shall be built up evenly over the full width and shall be maintained at all
times with a sufficient inclination and a surface sufficiently even to enable surface water to
drain readily from them.
Where relevant hydraulic tests shall be conducted to verify the integrity of the structure
before backfilling.
Filling material for excavations and for making up levels within the perimeter of structures
shall be suitable material and shall contain no particular size in excess of 50 mm. The
compaction of fill material within the perimeter of structures shall be carried out with
equipment suited to the area being compacted..
Within the above tolerances the surface shall have a smooth regular face.
Soil compaction tests will be carried out according to the relevant standards.
Placing materials in soil dumps shall be such that it will not contaminate or otherwise render
less efficient usable lands or interfere with natural drainage or access. Where required drains
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-6-163
7 Pipeworks
7.1 General
The requirements covered by the present section are applicable for external, buried pipes
between treatment units, to/from pumping stations and to/from buildings and applies to e.g.
pipe systems for:
1. Wastewater;
2. Return, excess and floating sludge;
3. Treated wastewater for re-use;
4. Groundwater drainage (if required);
5. Aeration.
Pipes shall be ordered in the maximum lengths available to minimise the number of joints.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the supply of all materials in sufficient quantities and
shall immediately prior to placing any order, especially for imported goods, ascertain the
required quantities.
In the following is listed the pipe materials that are found appropriate and relevant for
installation in the proposed wastewater treatment plant depending on the media to be
transported.
Pipes shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to meet any of the testing
requirements. Pipe sections also may by rejected if found to contain cracks, damaged ends
and other defects due to faulty manufacture, handling, transporting or placing.
In dimensions from ø200 to ø400 mm, connections to the sewer pipe can only be performed
with single branch fittings produced on factory. In dimensions from ø500 saddles may be
used but only saddles using direct drilling in the concrete pipe.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-7-165
Generally, all buried pipes shall be jointed using steel spigot and steel socket which should
be covered with concrete.
All connections to PVC and PP pipes must be performed by using single 45 branch; no
saddle must be used.
Only pipes with ring stiffness larger than 8 kN/m² may be used. Reference is made to ISO
9969.
PVC and PP pipes cannot be installed outside, unless adequately protected, due to intense
sunlight.
PE pipes and fittings shall comply with the relevant provisions of CEN-standard EN12201
(water and wastewater) and EN1555 (gas).
Generally, all buried pipes shall be jointed using either butt or electro fusion welding
techniques. Internal weld beads shall be removed. Small diameter pipes (diameter<63 mm),
pipes within structures and pipes connecting to metal fittings shall be jointed using
mechanical jointing techniques, such as compression, flanged joints or push-fit joints. The
welder and fitter must have a certificate issued by the pipe manufacturer within the last year.
manufactured in accordance with ISO 10467.3 and shall have a minimum required strength
of 10 MPa.
Generally, all buried pipes shall be jointed using spigot and socket or flexible joints.
Generally, all buried pipes shall be jointed using spigot and socket.
Generally, all buried pipes shall be jointed using but welding or spigot and socket.
Pipes and fittings shall be stored raised from the ground and shall be carefully supported
cushioned and wedged. Pipes shall not rest directly on one another and shall not be stacked
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-7-167
more than four pipes high, or two pipes high in the case of pipes greater than DN 500.
Couplings and joints (and all components thereof) and other similar items shall be stored in
dry conditions, raised from the ground in sheds or covered areas.
Storage areas shall be carefully set out to facilitate unloading, loading and checking of
materials with different consignments stacked or stored separately with identifications marks
clearly visible.
If 10% or more of the pipes within a test length have failed, the Contractor shall test
hydraulically, to the site test pressure each pipe and joint before pipe lying. In this event, test
results shall be filed and issued with progress reports
Filing results will not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to excavate and permit the
inspection of the joints during the testing of the pipeline, if necessary.
7.7 Installation
7.7.1 General
Installation of pipelines includes supply, laying and jointing of pipes and fittings,
construction of beddings and foundations, manholes and other structures in the line, testing,
and commissioning.
All plant, operation and haulage required from source or store to bring the pipes, valves, etc.,
to their place of laying of fixing, including any unloading into temporary storage areas and
any subsequent reloading for haulage to the place of laying shall be included in the supply of
pipes and fittings.
During installation pipes are to be suitably anchored to prevent flotation while backfilling.
All pipes shall be laid accurately and handled in accordance with the Manufacturer's
instructions. The pipes shall be laid into the trench on the bedding material and joints made.
During installation careful checking and supervision shall ensure that the pipes are laid to the
correct line and grade, and sealed at each joint, fitting, branch and manhole. The level of the
grading and the pipe shall be checked with a laser.
2-7-168 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The minimum trench width shall follow requirements as stated in CEN- EN 1610, table 1. If
the trench dept exceeds more than 1.5 meters a trench box system shall be used.
Pipe trenches shall as far as practicable be kept free of surface or ground water.
No excavations with battered sides shall be made in roads, footpaths or within 10 m of any
existing or proposed building or other structure.
The material excavated from the trenches shall be handled with care, with asphalt, stone
blocks, rock and stone from road construction or broken out of the trench during excavation,
stock piled separately from the granular material of the natural ground.
On the trench bottom sand bedding shall be laid to a compacted thickness of 250 mm. The
bedding sand shall comply with CEN EN 1610. Pipe bedding to concrete pipes shall contain
no more than 0.3% sulphate. The bedding shall be compacted to 95% of the standard
maximum dry density. The level tolerance for the bedding shall be 10 mm.
For pipes over 400 mm, the height of the bedding shall be 5% of the diameter plus 250 mm.
The additional layer shall be shaped concentrically with the pipe along the bedding angle.
Where pipes are jointed, bell holes of ample dimensions shall be formed in the bedding to
ensure that each pipe is uniformly supported throughout the length of its barrel and to enable
the joint to be made. Pipes shall be laid on sufficient setting blocks only where a concrete bed
or cradle is used.
The bedding material shall be spread over the full width of the foundation and lightly hand
compacted to a level slightly higher than the level corresponding to the underside of the pipe
barrel to allow for settlement of the pipe to the correct level.
Further granular material shall be placed in the trench, special care being taken to fill under
the sides of the pipe to ensure full contact with the barrel of the pipe, but leaving the joint
exposed for a length of approximately 200 mm on each side of the joint collar, sleeve or
socket. The granular material shall then be compacted evenly on both sides of the pipe.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-7-169
Clay, or other equally suitable impermeable material barriers shall be constructed to limit the
uninterrupted length of granular bedding and backfill to a maximum of 500 m.
Flanged joints shall be properly aligned before any bolts are tightened. Gaskets for flanged
joints shall be of the inside-bolt-circle type. Jointing compounds shall not be used when
making flanged joints, except that to facilitate the making of vertical joints, gaskets may by
secured temporarily to one flange face by a minimum quantity of clear rubber solution. Bolt
threads shall be treated with graphite paste and the nuts shall be tightened evenly in
diametrically opposite pairs. Nuts shall be secured against loosening by vibration.
Rubber joint rings for water mains and drainage purposes shall be obtained from the pipe
manufacturer. Joint lubricants for sliding joints and used for jointing water pipes shall not
impart to water taste, colour, or any effect known to be injurious to health, and shall be
resistant to bacterial growth.
Unless specified otherwise joints having exposed mild steel components shall be cleaned and
all loose rust shall be removed. The internal lining in a gap, which has been left for the joint
to be made, shall be completed in accordance with the recommendations of supplier, unless
specified otherwise. The external protection shall comprise bitumen applied to a thickness of
not less than one millimetre on to the external surface of the joint, followed where
appropriate by a spiral wrap of heavy duty glass fibre tape bonded with hot bitumen.
For closing lengths, it may be necessary to cut pipes of various materials. Pipes shall be cut
by a method which provides a clean square profile without splitting or fracturing the pipe
wall, and which causes minimum damage to any protective coating. Where necessary, the cut
ends of pipes shall be formed to the tapers and chamfers suitable for the type of joint to be
used and any protective coatings shall be made good.
Where ductile pipes larger than 450 mm diameter are to be cut to form non-standard lengths,
the Contractor shall comply with the Manufacturer’s recommendations in respect of ovality
correction to the cut spigot end.
Where cut concrete pipes are used any exposes reinforcement shall be sealed with a suitable
epoxy resin.
Concrete thrust blocks shall be provided to pressure pipelines at reducers, tee junctions, caps,
etc, and curves or bends deflecting 11.25o or more, except where welded steel pipes or self
anchoring joints are used. The type and size of thrust blocks shall be in accordance with the
drawings.
Concrete for thrust blocks shall comply with all the relevant requirements of Section
"Concrete Works" and shall be placed carefully against undisturbed earth or rock with
suitable bearing capacity and shall in no case be less than 150 mm of cover to the pipe.
Concrete shall be grade C16/20. When casting thrust blocks no couplings or joints shall be
covered, and if required the pipe with fittings shall be firmly fixed to the block by a suitable
stainless steel strap belted to the block. Where timber shuttering has been used such timber
shall be removed before backfilling. The concrete shall be allowed to develop adequate
strength prior to any pressure being applied to the pipeline.
The trench above the so finished pipe surround shall be filled with fill complying with the
requirements of section "Earthworks" and shall be compacted flush with ground level
according to the requirements of the chapter "Backfilling and Filling". Trench supports shall
be gradually withdrawn in accordance with the progress of the fill subject at all times to the
provision that such withdrawal will not prejudice the safety of all works.
For pipes with flexible joints, compressible filler shall be cut and placed at each pipe joint
over the entire cross section of the concrete.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-7-171
Concrete shall be poured in a single operation and shall comply with the requirements of
Section "Concrete Works". Pipes shall be secured against lifting or moving during pouring of
concrete.
The Contractor shall provide and mount all for the pressure tests necessary equipment.
If pressure tests are made against closed valves the guidelines from the manufacturer of the
valves regarding the highest single side pressure against closed valve shall be complied with.
Hydraulic pressure tests shall be carried out by the use of potable water.
During pressure tests a minimum of 1.5 times maximum allowed operating pressure shall be
maintained.
The Contractor shall prior to pressure testing verify on the spot that the piping is fully
evacuated from air.
After successful and documented pressure test the piping shall be emptied and the pressure
test fluid shall be disposed of. If it is not possible to perform visual inspection of leaks of all
welded joints, the piping shall be tested according to the following guidelines:
- Piping is tested with a test pressure of minimum 1.5 times maximum allowed operating
pressure. The pressure shall be held for at least four hours.
- During the pressure hold period no water shall be allowed to be added, and
- All visible welding joints, flange joints and glands on valves and pumps shall be
inspected.
After the pressure tests have been finalised the Contractor shall elaborate and file a report.
The report shall as a minimum include:
- Pressure Test Procedure,
- Unambiguous references to piping or part of piping and shut-off,
- Specification of test pressure,
- The period of the pressure tests,
- Results and signature of acceptance, and
2-7-172 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
All manholes shall be constructed from reinforced concrete or precast concrete chambers.
Stone-work or brick-work shall not be used. Unless otherwise indicated they shall be
provided with a reinforced concrete cover slab and with a ductile iron cover and frame in a
square, rectangular or circular opening in areas with traffic. The clear opening shall be a
minimum of 600 mm diameter or square and the edges of the opening are to be chamfered.
Covers are to be suitable for the anticipated loading in road minimum 40 tonnes (class D400)
and in pavement minimum 12.5 tonnes (class B125) and are to comply with the provisions of
CEN-standard EN 124. They shall be set in mortar to be free from surface imperfections or
blemishes.
Joints shall be made with sealing rings of vulcanised rubber; no other sealing material must
be used.
Manholes on gravity sewers will have to be placed where change in slope, dimension and
direction occur. Maximum spacing of manholes is 60 meters. Min. Ø 1000 mm manholes
shall be placed where intersections are connected.
On gravity sewer pipes bends and reductions shall occur in manholes only.
All concrete shall be grade C30/37 and shall meet the requirements of section "Concrete
Work". The concrete shall be watertight and have a thickness of not less than 200 mm and
incorporate water stops.
Rung irons or step irons are to be provided. Their size and strength shall be suitable for
access to the manhole with a maximum vertical spacing between steps of 350 mm in a
vertical alignment.
Pipes passing through the concrete walls of a manhole shall be provided with ductile iron or
steel spool pieces with puddle flanges. A flexible joint shall be situated as close as
practicable to the outside face of any manhole or other structure.
Manhole inverts and benching in sewer pipes, drains and culverts shall be formed in concrete
grade C30/37 to the same gradient and diameter as the connected pipework and with a
smooth finish.
7.9 Tolerances
Pipes shall be laid accurately to the lines and levels shown in the design. The maximum
permitted deviation from the specified line and level for pipelines shall be:
- Up to 600 mm: 10 mm
- Greater than 600 mm: 15 mm.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-7-173
8 Concrete Works
8.1 Materials
8.1.1 General
Materials used in the works shall be new, good and of the qualities and kinds specified
herein. Delivery shall be made sufficiently in advance to enable further samples to be taken
and tested if required. Materials considered not suitable shall be immediately removed from
the works at the Contractor's cost.
All specified properties of the concrete-making materials shall be tested with a frequency to
ensure continuous compliance with the requirements, and whenever new materials are to be
used.
Materials shall be transported, handled and stored on the site or elsewhere in such a manner
as to prevent damage, deterioration, or contamination.
8.1.2 Cement
Cement shall be from an renown and suitable source and shall be low alkali cement and
sulphate-resistant or ordinary Portland cement complying with EN197.
In addition low alkali cement used in the works shall contain less than 0.6% alkali (expressed
as Na2O + 0.658 K2O).
Cement stored on site shall be protected from the weather and raised from the ground.
Cement shall not be used after 6 months from its manufacture date or after it has been held in
store for 3 months, unless it is tested and satisfies the relevant EN Standards. Each re-test
certificate shall be valid for a period of 6 months.
8.1.3 Water
Water for use in concrete, mortar mixing and curing shall be obtained from a suitable source
and shall be of a quality as not to affect the setting time, strength, durability of the concrete
or mortar, or the appearance of hardened concrete or mortar by discolouration or
efflorescence, nor the reinforcement at any age of the concrete or mortar.
Water shall be clean, potable, blended or unblended, with a pH between 5.0 and 9.0 and shall
be tested in accordance with EN 1008. The following limits shall not be exceeded:
- Total dissolved solids (TDS) not greater than 2000 ppm
- Suspended solids not greater than 2000 ppm
- Chlorides (Cl) not greater than 500 ppm
- Sulphates (SO4) not greater than 1000 ppm
- Alkali (HCO3/CO3) not greater than 1000 ppm.
Water shall be stored in suitable and clean containers which are protected from sun, wind,
dust, organic contamination or from contamination by any other source.
8.1.4 Aggregates
Materials used as aggregates shall be obtained from a source known to produce aggregates
satisfactory for concrete and shall be chemically inert, strong, hard, durable, of limited
porosity and free from adhering coatings, clay lumps, coal and coal residues and organic or
other impurities that may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or may impair the strength or
durability of the concrete. Aggregates shall be natural gravels or crushed stone complying
with EN 12620.
The aggregates used in the concrete mix shall not cause damage or weakening of the
concrete.
Aggregates shall be stored and handled only on suitable impervious free draining platforms
with concrete block walls separating different grades. Stock piles shall be built in 1.50 m
(maximum) layers and segregation of the aggregates shall be prevented. All aggregates
which have become segregated shall be removed. All aggregates stored on site shall be
covered with suitable sheeting until required for mixing. Aggregates which have become
contaminated whilst stored on site shall be removed.
Fine Aggregates
Sand for concrete shall comply with EN 12620. It shall not contain more than 3% voided
shells (as determined by direct visual separation).
The blending of crushed stone fines may be permitted provided that the blended product
meets all the requirements for fine aggregates. Materials finer than 75 micron size - ISO 3310
test - shall not exceed 5% by weight. If the materials finer than 75 microns - according to
ISO 3310 test - consist of the dust of fracture, essentially free of clay or shale, the limit can
be increased to 7% by weight.
Magnesium sulphate soundness weight loss shall not exceed 10% after five cycles (ASTM
C88).
When tested for organic impurities the colour shall be lighter than the reference standard
colour (ASTM C40).
When tested for potential alkali reactivity (ASTM C 227) the expansion shall be less than
0.05% at 3 months. Alternatively the potential alkali reactivity can be tested in accordance
with ASTM C 289 and the evaluation done in accordance with ASTM C 33, Appendix XI.
Coarse Aggregates
Coarse aggregates for concrete shall be hard and durable stone, produced by mechanical
crushing, e.g. by jaw, impact or cone crushers or other mechanical means.
The maximum permitted content of chlorides and sulphates by weight of dry aggregates are
0.03% (as acid soluble Cl-) and 0,4% (as acid soluble SO4) respectively.
Coarse aggregate for use in all classes of concrete shall be provided for batching as single
sized aggregates of 40 mm, 20 mm and 10 mm nominal size proportioned in such ratio as to
give a uniform gradation.
Flakiness index and elongation index shall not exceed 25% (EN 12620).
Coarse aggregate shall not contain more than 5% soft fragments (ASTM C 235).
Magnesium sulphate soundness weight loss shall not exceed 10% after five cycles (ASTM
C88).
When tested for potential alkali reactivity (ASTM C 227) the expansion shall be less than
0.05% at 3 months. Alternatively the potential alkali reactivity can be tested in accordance
with ASTM C 289 and the evaluation done in accordance with ASTM C 33, Appendix XI.
8.1.5 Admixtures
Admixtures shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, shall be
dispensed by suitable equipment, which provides a visible means of checking each dose, and
shall comply with the relevant EN standards.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-8-177
The proposed dosages, the manufacturer's technical information and the results of trial mixes
shall be filed.
When more than one admixture is to be used in a concrete, the compatibility of the various
admixtures shall have been ascertained by standard tests and certified by the manufacturer(s).
The maximum total acid soluble sulphate content of the concrete mix from whatever source
expressed as % SO4 by weight of cement shall be 4.0.
8.1.7 Reinforcement
Reinforcement bars shall have strength equal to high yield steel bars and shall be profiled.
The Contractor shall file copies of the manufacturer's certificates of tests for the steel
reinforcement to be supplied.
All reinforcement shall be clean and free from pit corrosion, loose rust, mill scale, paint, oil,
grease, adhering earth, or any other material that may impair the bond between the concrete
and the reinforcement or that which may cause corrosion of the reinforcement or may be
detrimental to the quality of the concrete.
8.1.10 Spacers
Spacers shall be made of concrete of same grade as the structure, for which they are to be
used.
2-8-178 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
8.2 Requirements/Workmanship
8.2.1 Formwork
Design and Construction
Formwork for concrete shall be rigidly constructed of either steel or blue wood and shall be
true to the shape and dimensions. Formwork shall be constructed of material or lined with
materials as may be necessary to achieve the finishes specified in this section. The formwork
design shall be filed.
All material brought on the site as forms, struts or braces shall be new materials.
Faces in contact with concrete shall be free from adhering grout, projecting nails, splits, or
other defects. Joints shall be sufficiently tight to prevent the leakage of cement grout and to
avoid the formation of fins or other blemishes. Faulty joints shall be caulked. 20 mm by 20
mm chamfers shall be formed on the external corners of concrete members, unless otherwise
specified. Internal corners shall similarly be provided with 20 mm fillets.
Formworks for exposed surfaces shall be laid out in a regular and uniform pattern with the
long dimension of panels vertical and all joints aligned.
If openings of the formwork for the escape of water used for washing out are made, they
shall be formed so that they can be conveniently closed before placing the concrete.
Connections shall be constructed to permit easy removal of the formwork and shall be strong
enough to retain the correct shape during consolidation of the concrete.
Metal ties or anchors within the form shall be so constructed as to permit their removal to a
depth of at least 50 mm from the face without injury to the concrete. All fittings for metal ties
shall be of such design that upon their removal the cavities which are left will be of the
smallest possible size. Spreader cones or ties shall not exceed 25 mm diameter. The cavities
shall be filled with cement mortar and the surface left sound, smooth, even and uniform in
colour.
Formwork shall be true to line and braced and strutted to prevent deformation under the
weight and pressure of the unset concrete, constructional loads, wind, and other forces.
Beams spanning more than 3 metres shall have an upward camber of 1½ mm per m of span.
Concrete shall normally not be placed in lifts deeper than 3 m. For lifts higher than 3 m
openings for placing the concrete shall be provided in order to avoid segregation of the
concrete.
A suitable mould oil or other material shall be applied to faces of formwork to prevent
adherence of the concrete. Such coatings shall be insoluble in water, non-staining, and non-
injurious to the concrete. Liquids that retard the setting of concrete shall not be used. Mould
oil, retarding liquid, and similar coatings shall be kept from contact with the reinforcement or
previously cast concrete.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-8-179
Before any concrete is placed, forms shall be properly cleaned by washing out with water
and/or air under pressure to remove sawdust, shavings, metal and other foreign matter. All
water shall then be drained and mopped out from the formwork.
Construction Tolerances
The tolerances within which concrete work shall be constructed are as summarized below:
Holes:
- Placement: ± 10 mm
- Sizes: ± 3 mm.
Cast-in items:
- Placement: ± 10 mm
- Distance between interconnected items: ± 2 mm.
The Contractor is responsible for keeping the deviations of the finished concrete structure
within the limits given, and any rectification of work not constructed within the tolerances set
out shall be entirely at the expense of the Contractor.
Removal of Formwork
Formwork shall be removed by gradual easing without jarring. Before removal of the
formwork the concrete shall be examined and removal shall proceed only in the presence of a
competent supervisor and only if the concrete has attained sufficient strength to support its
own weight and any load likely to be imposed upon it.
The following striking time given in maturity days are the absolute minimum that will be
permitted:
- Soffits 10 days
- Sides 4 days.
Loads shall not be placed on concrete before the following periods after casting:
- Columns, walls, beams, slabs, etc. 14 days
- Foundations 10 days.
2-8-180 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The Contractor shall record the date upon which the concrete is placed in each part of the
work, and the date on which the formwork is removed from there. The assessment of the
period elapsing between placing the concrete and removing the formwork and consequences
arising there from shall be entirely the Contractor's responsibility.
Surface Finishes
Standard rough form finish shall be the concrete surface having the texture imparted by the
form facing material used, with defective areas repaired and patched as specified, and all fins
and other projections exceeding 5 mm in the height rubbed down with hard blocks. This type
should be used for the clarifier, the floor of the clarifier will be finished with screed
according to paragraph 1.9.4.
Standard smooth finish shall be the cast concrete surface as obtained with a smooth form
facing material, with defective areas repaired and patched and all fins and other projections
on the surface completely removed and smoothed.
Related unformed surfaces as top of walls, horizontal offsets to be striked off smooth and
finished with a texture matching the adjacent formed surfaces. Apply float finish or trowel
finish to provide smooth uniform surfaces.
After placing slabs, plane the surface to a tolerance not exceeding 6 mm in 3 m, when tested
with a 3 m straight-edge. After levelling, roughen the surface before the final set with stiff
brushes, brooms or rakes.
Provide a smooth finish to monolithic slab surfaces which are not intended to be finished
with flooring materials or which are to be run over by a sludge scraper.
After placing the slabs, the surface has to be levelled and trowelled smooth in one operation
with the casting. The tolerance on the surface plane should not exceed 6 mm in 3 m, when
tested with a 3 m straight-edge. This type should be used for the biological reactor, anaerobic
reactor and aerobic reactor.
Power Floating shall be undertaken by steel floating the concrete to an even finish with no
ridges or steps. When the concrete has taken a primary set it shall be power trowelled to a
uniform smooth polished surface free from trowel marks or other blemishes. Once power
floating is completed the surface finish must be adequately protected from construction
traffic.
The tolerance on the surface plane should not exceed 5 mm in 3 m, when tested with a 3 m
straight-edge.
8.3 Reinforcement
General
The Contractor shall ensure that all reinforcement is checked by a competent person.
Storage of Reinforcement
Reinforcement shall be stored on properly constructed racks at least 150 mm above ground
level. The storage, cutting and bending of steel reinforcement shall be carried out under cover
on a suitable, free draining concrete platform. The method of storing shall be such as to
prevent contamination or damage by weather or accident. Steel shall be protected from
humidity when stored.
Handling of Reinforcement
Sheets of mesh fabric shall be flat unless specified as bent and any tendency to curve or twist
shall be corrected by the Contractor before fixing. Mesh fabric shall not be supplied in rolls.
Reinforcement shall be bent when cold by hand or by using a suitable hand or power
operated bending machine. When bending, the reinforcement should be subjected to a
constant even load and not an impact load.
2-8-182 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Bars incorrectly bent shall be used only if the means used for straightening and re-bending be
such as not to damage the steel. No reinforcement shall be bent when in position in the
works.
Fixing Reinforcement
Bars in contact shall be firmly secured to each other with suitable binding wire or proprietary
clips. Binding wire shall be 16-18 gauge soft iron wire free from rust or other contaminants.
The reinforcement shall be fixed accurately in position so that the reinforcement is in the
correct position in relation to the formwork to give the specified concrete cover. The
reinforcement shall be securely fixed in position so that it will not be displaced during the
passage of the Contractor's traffic, the placing and compaction of the concrete or any related
operations.
The correct cover shall be maintained by the use of concrete spacers. Concrete spacing
blocks shall be machine pressed, or, if manufactured on site, shall be made from a mix of one
part cement and two parts of sand. Site manufactured blocks shall be well compacted and
water cured for a minimum of 7 days after casting and shall have a 10 minute absorption of
less than 3.2% by weight. Concrete spacers shall be comparable in strength, durability and
appearance to the surrounding concrete. Any wire cast into the spacer blocks shall be
positioned well away from the exposed surface and shall be galvanized. Spacers fixed to
parallel reinforcement bars shall not be located in a line across a section. Timber, stone or
metal spacers shall not be used.
The top reinforcement in slabs shall be rigidly supported by mild steel chairs from the bottom
reinforcement. Chair spacing shall be at maximum 1.50 m centres in both directions.
Starter bars to walls must be securely fixed to the reinforcement in the parent concrete and
accurately located to maintain the specified cover. Reinforcement embedded in hardened
concrete shall not be bent.
Reinforcement cages assembled before fixing shall be protected against the weather and shall
be stored and transported carefully so that no distortion or contamination may occur.
8.4 Concrete
8.4.1 Grades of Concrete
Grades of concrete with 25 mm maximum nominal aggregate size shall be as follows:
The concrete shall be capable of being transported and readily compacted by internal
vibrators into a dense impermeable mass without segregation, bleeding or plastic cracking.
Subsequently, the concrete shall be durable and free from crazing, thermal cracks and drying
shrinkage cracks.
The slump shall be kept to the minimum compatible with adequate and suitable placing and
compacting requirements, but in no case shall the concrete be placed at a slump of more than
160 mm or less than 40 mm.
Concrete mixes shall have the cement content necessary to meet the specified water-cement
ratio, the workability and the compressive strength requirements.
Concrete mixes shall have the lowest possible sand content to meet the workability and water
tightness requirements.
Concrete mixes shall be made with a target air-content equal to 6%. The air-content in any
mix may not be less than 4% or above 8%.
In-situ concrete shall be dense and well-compacted to a minimum of 98% of the density of
the relevant test cylinders.
materials to be used in the various mixes together with the mix design and the proposed
weights of materials to be incorporated in the mixes.
Trial Mixes
The Contractor shall perform a trial mix on site for the various classes of concrete specified,
using the proposed plant, equipment and batching and mixing methods and file test results.
No structural concrete shall be placed in the works until the relevant mix meets requirements.
Before any grade of concrete is placed in the works three trial mixes of the grade shall be
made to the submitted mix proportions and from each mix six cylinders shall be prepared and
cured, three for testing at 7 days and three at 28 days by a laboratory.
The mix proportions shall be accepted for use in the works only if the 28 days cylinder
strengths exceed the characteristic strength compliance requirements by at least 4 N/mm2.
Where the maximum free water/cement ratio is specified preliminary tests shall be made to
establish the relationship between free water/cement ratio and the slump. A maximum
allowable slump value shall be established which includes an appropriate tolerance for
variability of manufacture, sampling and testing.
The preliminary tests shall be repeated and revised and maximum slump values established
whenever necessary due to a change in materials or batching.
When the mix has been established, no variations shall be made in the proportions, the
original source of the cement and aggregates or in the type, size and grading of the latter.
The test cylinders shall be cured. Two cylinders will be crushed at 7 days and used for early
assessment of the concrete as a guide only.
The test cylinders shall be delivered to, and tested by, a laboratory. Certified copies of the
test results shall be filed.
Compliance with the characteristic strength will be assumed only if the conditions given
below are met:
- The average strength determined from any group of four consecutive test results exceeds
the specified characteristic strength by 3 N/mm2
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-8-185
- The strength determined from any test result is not less than the specified characteristic
strength minus 3 N/mm2.
The cost of any given mix, poured between the taking of two consecutive samples shall be
represented by the former sample.
Tests covering all specified properties of all materials to be used in the mixes shall be carried
out at a frequency necessary to prove continuous compliance for each property.
The cost of taking and testing concrete samples and materials required to ensure compliance
with this specification shall be borne wholly by the Contractor.
Should the concrete supplied not comply with the characteristic strength requirements, the
Contractor will take remedial action or replace the concrete
Records
The Contractor shall keep a complete record of the work of concreting showing the time and
the date of placing the concrete in each portion of the work. The record shall be available for
inspection at any time by the Project Manager
The following information for testing shall be recorded for each cylinder:
- Class of mix
- Site mixed or ready-mix and supplier
- Slump
- Time of mixing and concreting
- Location in structure of concrete
- Cylinder identification marks
- Temperature of concrete.
All cylinders shall be clearly marked prior to leaving site and no cylinder shall leave the site
unless documentation complying with the above has been filed and documented .
The weighing and water-dispensing mechanisms shall be maintained in good order. Their
accuracy shall be maintained within the tolerances and checked against accurate weights.
The weights of cement and each size of aggregate as indicated by the mechanisms employed
shall be within a tolerance of ±2% of the respective weights per batch. The weights of the
fine and coarse aggregates shall be adjusted to allow for the free water contained in them.
The water to be added to the mix shall be reduced by the quantity of free water contained in
2-8-186 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
the fine and coarse aggregates, which shall be determined by the Contractor immediately
before mixing begins.
Mixers which have been out of use more than 30 minutes shall be thoroughly cleaned before
any fresh concrete is mixed in that machine. Mixing plant shall be thoroughly cleaned before
changing from one type of mix to another or before changing from one manufacturer of
cement to another.
Controls shall be provided to ensure that no additional water can be added during mixing.
The entire batch shall be discharged before the mixer is recharged. In no case shall the
mixing time be less than 1½ minutes.
The formwork or area of deposition shall be cleaned as specified. Constructional plant and
materials required, or which may be required, during the concreting work and for curing shall
be on site and fully prepared before concreting commences. All accessories shall be installed
and formwork for holes, chases, etc. shall be provided as specified.
Concrete shall be transported, placed and spread by suitable means and in such a way as to
prevent segregation.
Concrete with a temperature above 32C or below 5C or with a slump less than 40 mm or
more than 160 mm shall be rejected. Concrete not placed within 60 minutes of the
commencement of mixing or before starting its initial set shall be rejected.
Concrete shall be transported and compacted into a dense impermeable mass without
segregation or bleeding or cracking to ensure that when hard, it is durable, un-cracked and
un-crazed.
Concrete shall be deposited in horizontal layers to compacted depth not exceeding 300 mm.
Concrete shall be deposited as near as possible to its final position to avoid rehandling.
Concrete shall not be dropped into place from a height exceeding 3 metres. When trunks or
chutes are used they shall be kept clean and used in such a way as to avoid segregation.
Concrete shall be deposited continuously. No concrete shall be placed against concrete which
has hardened sufficiently to cause seams, planes of weakness or cold joints.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-8-187
If for unforeseen reasons it is necessary to stop concreting before completion of the pour then
construction joints as specified shall be formed and further concreting shall be suspended for
at least twenty four hours.
The Contractor shall provide openings, mortises, chases, sleeves, etc. and fix bolts, anchors,
etc. in concrete as work proceeds and support embedded items against displacement. Items
cast shall have all voids filled with readily removable material to prevent concrete ingress.
The Contractor shall clean and wet then fill tie holes solid with patching mortar.
Honeycombed and other defective concrete shall be cut back to sound concrete, with
perpendicular or slightly under cut edges and shall be prepared in an adequate manner.
With reference to the specifications and other technical requirements stated in this Section,
the Project Manager will reject any concrete which has been inadequately mixed or in which
the ingredients have segregated or which is no longer capable of being effectively placed or
compacted. The Project Manager will document his findings and promptly share them with
the Contractor, who will be expected to take remedial action in accordance with this
Contract.
All receptacles used for the transport and deposition of the concrete shall be kept clean and
thoroughly washed out after stopping work and at the end of each shift.
Compaction
Concrete must be carefully and thoroughly compacted during placing to ensure that it
completely surrounds the reinforcement, fills the formwork and excludes voids.
All concrete shall be compacted by using internal vibrators that shall be used by operators
experienced in their use. Concrete is to be vibrated for the minimum time necessary for
thorough consolidation, and the Contractor shall ensure that excessive vibration, leading to
segregation, is avoided. Care must be taken to ensure that the vibrator does not touch the
reinforcement or formwork.
Internal vibrators shall be of the immersion type with a frequency of not less than three
thousand vibrations per minute and sufficient amplitude to consolidate the concrete
effectively. The Contractor shall provide at least fifty percent duplication of all vibration
equipment as stand by during any period of concreting.
Vibrators shall not be employed to move the concrete within the formwork.
Curing
Freshly deposited concrete shall be protected from premature drying and excessively hot or
cold temperatures and shall be maintained with minimal moisture loss at a relatively constant
temperature for the proper hydration of the cement and hardening of the concrete.
2-8-188 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The materials and methods of curing shall reported to the Project Manager and suitable for
the work. Concrete surfaces not in contact with forms, shall be cured before any risk for
plastic shrinkage cracking or drying out of the concrete surface may occur by one of the
following materials or methods:
(a): Polythene membrane shall be laid direct on to the concrete in unbroken sheets with
substantial close fitted lap joints. Sheets shall be weighted with timbers to prevent dry winds
blowing under the membrane
(b): Spray applied curing membrane and curing compounds which shall be of suitable
manufacture and type and be of the maximum retentively type. Curing compounds used shall
have reflective properties; they shall be applied in accordance with the recommendations of
the manufacturer and are to be used with extreme caution on any surfaces against which
additional concrete or other finishing materials are to be bonded and shall not adversely
affect the concrete.
Application of curing water shall not be able to affect the finished fresh concrete surface by
dilution of the top layer.
Curing shall be continued for a period of at least 7 days when method (a) above are used.
Rapid drying at the end of the curing period shall be prevented.
Exposed horizontal surfaces of slabs in hot windy weather may require additional protection
between the initial compaction and final finishing stages to ensure that the concrete is not
exposed for more than twenty (20) minutes after placing.
Formwork exposed to direct sunlight during the curing period shall be shaded.
Steel forms heated by the sun and all wood forms in contact with the concrete during the
curing period shall be kept wet. If forms are to be removed during the curing period, one of
the above curing materials or methods shall be employed immediately. Such curing shall
continue for the remainder of the curing period.
Joints
Construction joints shall be formed in either horizontal or vertical planes and located in the
work to suit working stresses. They shall be so located and the quantity of concrete placed at
any one time shall be so limited in size and shape as to minimize shrinkage and temperature
effects. All reinforcing steel shall be continued across construction joins. The surface of the
concrete at all joints shall be straight and shall be thoroughly cleaned with water and air
under pressure, to expose aggregate. The cleaned surfaces shall be well wetted before
casting. Suitable water stops shall be provided in joints subject to water pressure, except in
horizontal joints in walls.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-8-189
Concrete shall be carefully compacted around the water stops so as to leave no cavities.
The test shall be carried out before any backfilling and coating/sealing has taken place.
In the event of any water-retaining structures fail to pass the prescribed test, the Contactor
rectifies the structure defects and re-tests the structure. This shall be repeated until the test
passes.
Horizontal construction joints in walls with a height not exceeding 5 metres is not allowed.
Structures for process tanks (end walls), primary- and secondary clarification and sludge
digester shall be made circular.
All pipes below the bottom slabs - except for drain pipes if any - shall be cast-in and
reinforced together with the slab.
All WWTP units shall be surrounded with backfilling leaving one meter of walls above
ground level if not any special mention below.
Precast concrete unit (rings) for manholes shall be provided in a concrete quality as stated for
liquid-retaining structures.
2-8-190 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Design of pipe connections to structural items shall take earthquake loads into consideration.
8.5.3 Concrete
Concrete Strength
The concrete strength requirements for the structures are given below:
Concrete mix - C 35/45
- Characteristic strength: fck = 35 N/mm2 , cylinder strength
- Cement Low alkali and high sulphate resistant cement
- Exposure Class Freeze-thaw attack and chemical attack
- Max. free water/cement ratio .45
- Nominal maximum size of aggregates 25 mm
Concrete C 35/45 shall be used for Liquid-retaining structures and Chambers with
characteristics as follows.
- Other RC structures
- Roads
- Surface drainage units- Kerbs.
8.6 Joints
8.6.1 General
In order to incorporate the effects from thermal action, shrinkage and creep the Contractor
shall make construction joints or contraction joints in accordance with this specification. The
Contractor shall make his design calculations in accordance with the intended location of
joints.
The surface of the concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned. The surface layer shall be
completely removed with a steel brush to expose the aggregates.
The hardened concrete shall be watered continuously 1 hour prior to casting the adjacent
concrete. When casting the hardened concrete surface shall be saturated but free from water
on the surface.
The width of the water stops shall be according to the manufacturer’s specifications.
All water stops shall be made continuous and shall be welded at all connections. Overlap is
not allowed. All joints in water stops shall be made by the manufacturer of the water stop.
If a joint ends at another part of the structure e.g. the connection between a wall and a bottom
slab, the water stop should also be placed at least 30 cm inside the adjacent part of the
structure.
Rubber PVC
8.7.2 Standards
General
Seismic loads: All structures and buildings shall be designed to withstand earthquake loads
accordance with Palestinian Regulations.
Liquid-retaining Structures
Liquid-retaining structures shall be designed in accordance with "BS 8007: Code of practice
for design of concrete structures for retaining aqueous liquids".
8.8.3 Uplift
Based upon the outcome of the Contractor's own geotechnical investigations it might be
necessary to secure the structures against uplift.
The Contractor has the full responsibility for the security against uplift and is therefore also
responsible for any assumption of the ground water level made by him in the calculations.
If the Contractor finds any risk of a ground water level above the bottom of the individual
structures (even if it comes from the surface), the structures have to be secured in the
following way:
- The structures in which the water levels can drop suddenly (even if the operators make a
mistake), should be secured against uplift by their own weights together with the
surrounding soil
- The structures in which the water level can drop by some extra ordinary initiatives only,
should be secured by the construction of a permanent ground water drainage system so the
operators easily can lower the ground water level when needed.
Walls
- The thickness of walls should at least be made with a thickness equal to the height of the
wall divided by 20 and must under no circumstances be less than 250 mm.
- All walls shall be reinforced in both sides and in both directions.
- Walls shall be considered as fixed to the bottom slab. Hinged or sliding walls are
therefore not allowed.
- Partition walls in liquid-retaining structures shall be designed for unilateral water
pressure.
Bottom Slabs
The minimum thickness of bottom slabs under walls should be equal to the thickness of the
wall plus 50 mm. The thickness of the bottom slab beside the walls can be reduced with 100
mm per every meter. The thickness of slabs must under no circumstances be less than 250
mm.
Reinforcement
The amount of reinforcement placed in the structures should be in accordance with the
structural design calculations. Further to this the amount of reinforcement (in percent) placed
for reduction of crack widths less than the bars diameter (in millimetres) divided by 25 is
under no circumstances allowed. The percentage should be taken of the full cross sectional
area of the concrete.
Special account shall be taken for the provision of reducing crack width due to temperature,
creep and shrinkage in the concrete. These provisions must fulfil the requirements given in
BS 8007 (1987): "Code of Practice for Design of Concrete Structures for Retaining Aqueous
Liquids", with a maximum allowed crack width of wmax = 0,20 mm.
Cover on reinforcement
Minimum cover on reinforcement:
- Liquid-retaining structures, retaining walls etc.: Min. 50 mm
- Other concrete structures: Min. 35 mm.
8.9 Loads
8.9.1 Characteristic Values
Dead load:
- Concrete: 24 kN/m2
- Water: 10 kN/m2
- Soil: According to laboratory tests performed by
the Contractor.
Imposed load:
- Imposed load on buildings: According to EN standards
- Traffic load on ground level along tanks 10 kN/m2 (characteristic)
- Temperature: T1 not less than 200C, (BS 8007:1987 A.3);
T2 not less than 200C, (BS 8007:1987 A.3).
Seismic loads:
The project site is located in a zone of seismic activity and all structures shall be designed to
withstand earthquake loads. Design includes also pipe connection to structures.
Other loads:
- Loads from equipment
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-8-195
In this state, the effects from thermal action, shrinkage and creep should be taken into
account in accordance with the temperature loads stated above.
In the serviceability limit state the maximum allowed crack width is: See above.
The safety factor against uplift should meet the following requirements when calculated:
The safety factor to be at least 1.05 when the weight of the concrete together with the weight
of soil on bottom slabs (calculated vertical upwards from the edges of the slabs - without any
friction in the soil) only is taken into consideration.
The safety factor to be at least 1.2 when allowing friction in the soil to be taken into account.
Even though the crack widths normally are calculated in the serviceability limit state only,
the maximum allowed crack width in the state of testing structures for water tightness is 0.20
mm. In this state the structures should be assumed filled with water to a level of 70% of the
height of the normal working level only. Pressure from surrounding soil or ground water
must not be taken into account.
8.11 Calculations
The Contractor has the full responsibility for the structural design calculations.
All action forces should be calculated based upon the theory of elasticity wherever possible.
An approximate assumption of the load distribution is allowed if realistic only. Loads which
support the structures should be stipulated with low values.
The lining should be placed 0,30 m below the minimum water level till the top of the
construction. The lining should be connected to the form work according to the guidelines of
the manufacturer. In the edges is not allowed the weld the lining.
9 Building Works
9.1 General
9.1.1 Scope
This sub-section covers the requirements for the construction of buildings and includes all
building works, except earth and concrete works. The work required under this sub-section
shall include all labour, materials, equipment, remedy of deficiencies, site clearance and all
other appurtenant works required to complete all building works specified herein.
strength of more than 7.5 N/mm². Bricks and blocks shall be hard, sound, square and clean
with sharp, well defined arises.
Strength test certificates performed on the basis of appropriate DIN standards shall be filed.
(d) Sand
Sand shall be clean and sharp course grit, fresh water river or pit sand conforming in all
respects to DIN 1053 and DIN 18550 and shall be re-washed on site if the silt, loam or clay
content exceeds the limits prescribed in DIN 4226.
(e) Cement
Cement shall be sulphate resisting Portland cement as specified in DIN 1164 and DIN EN
197.
(f) Water
For the mixing of mortar and plaster the Contractor shall provide tap water
Mortar shall be mixed in a mechanically operated mortar mixer for at least three minutes
after all ingredients are in the drum. The mixing by hand will only be permitted when the
quality of hand mixing is comparable to mechanical mixing.
Mortar shall be used within 2 hours after discharge from the mixer at normal temperatures.
No mortar shall be used after the initial set has taken place. Reconstitution of mortar will not
be permitted.
9.2.3 Workmanship
All masonry shall be laid plumb and true to lines and built to the thickness and bond
required. Masonry shall be carried up in a uniform manner. No one portion shall be in raise
more than one meter above adjacent portions.
Face work shall be kept clean during construction and until completion of the Works.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-9-199
Under hot and dry weather conditions, bricks and blocks shall be stacked on a hard standing
level so as to prevent the absorption of water. Suitable shading shall be provided to prevent
high temperatures within the brick and block stacks. Clay brickwork and block work shall be
kept wet to the minimum extent required to prevent mortar drying out prematurely.
All bricks shall be wetted before being laid. Clay bricks shall not be used until completely
cold from the kiln. Freshly laid brickwork/block work shall be protected during interruption
through rain and at the completion of each day’s work.
Face work shall be kept clean during construction and until practical completion. Scaffold
boards shall be kept clear of the building at night and during heavy rain. Rubbing to remove
stains will not be permitted.
Facing bricks of varying colour shall be distributed evenly throughout the work so that no
patches appear. Different deliveries which vary in colour shall be mixed to avoid horizontal
stripes.
Brickwork and block work abutting concrete columns, walls and beams shall be tied with
stainless steel ties in accordance with the relevant references and as directed by the design.
Additional ties shall be supplied at openings. Walls which are to be fair face shall have
selected bricks and blocks with perfect arises and flat surface structures and with faces in
line.
Where directed, concrete blocks shall be reinforced and concrete blocks lintel type shall be
built in above wall openings.
Control joints shall be installed at the intersection with structural concrete and elsewhere
where joints are useful. Joints not detailed otherwise shall be racked out to a depth of 2 cm
for the full height of the wall and be caulked. Joints are to be examined to locate cracks,
holes or other defects and all such defects shall be remedied with mortar and pointed.
2-9-200 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
9.2.7 Brickwork
Solid brick walls shall be laid in common bond with all joints filled solidly with mortar and
backs fully purged to form solid masonry structure. Joints of walls to receive plaster shall be
lightly raked to provide a bond for plaster. Control joints in brick walls shall be carried
through the plaster. The joint shall not be plastered.
9.2.9 Cleaning
Masonry work to be exposed shall be thoroughly cleaned. Mortar smears and droppings on
concrete block walls shall be dry before removal with a trowel. Masonry work may be
cleaned using a mild acid solution.
Bituminous sheet damp-proof courses shall be laid on a level bed of cement mortar with a
minimum lap of 75 mm at angles and joints and neatly pointed in matching mortar on
exposed edges. Horizontal and sloping damp-proof coursing over door openings shall be in
single pieces of material of a length to extend 225 mm at both sides beyond the width of the
frame.
9.3 Plastering
9.3.1 Materials
Sand
Sand shall be clean and sharp course grit, fresh water river or pit sand conforming in all
respects to DIN 1053 and DIN 18550 and shall be re-washed on site if the silt, loam or clay
content exceeds the limits prescribed in DIN 4226.
Cement
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-9-201
Cement shall be sulphate resisting Portland cement as specified in DIN 1164 and DIN EN
197.
Water
For the mixing of mortar and plaster the Contractor shall provide tap water
Plaster shall be mixed in a mechanically operated plaster mixer for at least long enough to
make a thorough, complete intimate mix of the materials. The mixing of plaster by hand shall
not be permitted, unless otherwise directed.
The mixer, bunker, gauge boxes and all tools shall be kept clean, and care shall be taken to
ensure that fresh plaster is not contaminated with set plaster.
9.3.3 Workmanship
Plaster shall be of 2 or 3 coats. If plaster is to be applied to smooth surfaces, a dash coat shall
be applied as a bonding surface. The dash coat shall be of mush consistency, composed of 1
part Portland cement and 15 parts of sand.
The plaster coats shall be applied according to the thickness given below, whereby additional
thickness which will be required due to unevenness in the masonry surface is not included:
Thickness of 6 mm 9 mm
intermediate coat:
Thickness of finish 10 mm 4 mm 6 mm
coat:
Total thickness: 25 mm 0 mm 25 mm
9.3.5 Plastering
The dash coat shall be applied with a whisk broom or fibre brush and be kept moist for 48
hours before the first coat is applied to the dash coat.
Before the first coat hardens, the surface shall be scratched to provide bond for the
intermediate coat. This coat shall be kept moist for not less than 24 hours and be allowed to
set for not less than 14 days before application of the intermediate coat.
The surface of the intermediate coat shall be brought to a true and even surface, then
roughened with a wood float before setting to provide a bond for the finish coat.
The finish coat shall be applied while the intermediate coat is moist and if the intermediate
coat dries out it shall be wetted evenly. The finish coat shall be first floated to a true and even
surface and then trowelled to a smooth and even finish.
9.3.8 Tolerances
All surfaces shall be true to line, level, plumb and all junctions, angles and arises truly scare.
On two or three coat work, the plaster surface shall not show any deviation greater than
specified in DIN 18202 for accuracy class B.
9.4 Screeds
9.4.1 General
Workmanship and construction shall generally conform to DIN standards 18353 and 18560
or equivalent standards.
Materials used for mortar shall be measured in gauge boxes. All concrete surfaces shall be
adequately prepared and keyed to receive screeds. The screeds to be carried out have to be
placed within buildings and shall be dense aggregate cement screeds.
The preparation of base concrete shall include the removal of laitance from the concrete
surface to receive screed and the removal of all loose concrete, dust and dirt by thorough
washing with water.
The screed mix shall be prepared in accordance to DIN 18550 and shall be thoroughly and
efficiently be mixed dry by mechanical means until a uniform distribution is obtained prior to
adding the water. The water content shall be kept as low as it is necessary to allow for
sufficient workability for laying and compacting. Where only small quantities are required,
mixing might be carried out by hand on clean watertight surface.
The screed mix shall be placed between forms, rigidly fixed on a firm foundation and set true
to level within +/- 3 mm, and shall be fully compacted by means of a screed board providing
laitance is not brought to the surface. The screed wearing course shall be tamped with a wood
float and trowelled with a steel trowel to produce a smooth finish.
The screed mix shall be placed between the forms (and or other bays) worked around the
penetrations, duct covers, manhole covers, gutters, balustrade standards, pipes, etc., and shall
be fully compacted by means of a screed board, or other suitable compacting equipment,
providing laitance is not brought to the surface.
Where screeds thinner than 30 mm are required, a pre-packed high performance mortar
suitable for ‘drinking water’ contact shall be used, in accordance with the instructions of the
manufacturer.
9.4.3 Joints
All edge joints of floor screeds shall be simple butt joints without filler. Screeds laid over
construction joints in concrete shall be separated by 10 mm impregnated oakum strips or the
like.
9.4.4 Tolerances
The finished surface of base course screeds, when laid, shall not depart more than specified
in DIN 18202 for accuracy class B.
Floor screeds, when laid, shall be free of all defects and any work which shows signs of bond
failure, hollow patches, crazing, cracking or any other defects will not be accepted and shall
be removed and replaced with acceptable work by the Contractor.
9.5 Flooring
9.5.1 General
The floorings shall be such as to provide a cover surface that can well be walked on and must
not give any rise to any unreasonable inconvenience.
2-9-204 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
9.5.2 Materials
Concrete paving slabs shall be 50 mm thick, hydraulically pressed pre-cast concrete slabs in
accordance with DIN 18500.
Terrazzo shall be in accordance with DIN EN 13748. The marble chippings shall be of a
suitable quality in irregular pieces with no flaky pieces.
PVC flooring material shall comply with the requirements of DIN EN 649 and DIN 650 and
shall be temperature resistant, waterproof, abrasion resistant, flameproof, pigment or colour
proof to light, evenly coloured throughout, resistant to chemicals, fats, acids and alkaline,
odourless, easily laid and flexible, non-porous and slip proof.
All adhesives shall have suitable properties to ensure a firm and durable bond. They must not
adversely affect either the flooring nor the underlay or the base and shall be odourless once
applied.
All fillers and levelling compounds shall have a firm and durable bond to the base, provide a
good bonding surface for the adhesive and be of suitable property so as to give an adequate
support to the covering. They must have no adverse effect on base, adhesive, underlay, or
covering.
The Contractor shall furnish the Project Manager with the written instructions for the care
and the maintenance of the flooring.
Any filler or levelling compound shall be applied so that it will bond firmly and durably to
the base, will not crack and will adequately withstand pressure. Any screeds such as
magnesia and anhydride screed to which the filler or levelling compound will not sufficiently
bond, shall receive a priming coat.
The courses shall be laid towards the main window wall, in halls and corridors, however, in
longitudinal direction, unless otherwise specified.
Deviations in colour which are not of minor importance and not due to the flooring pattern
shall not be allowed if marring the overall appearance of the flooring.
Courses with pattern repeats shall be laid so as to suit these. Where courses run towards
doors, recesses and the like, they shall be laid so to cover also the floor areas such door
openings, recesses etc. Strips of slabs may be used as coverings of such floor areas.
Plastic flooring shall not be welded unless otherwise specified or expressly required in the
flooring material manufacturer’s processing instructions.
Baseboards of the same material as the flooring material with a minimum height of 6 cm
have to be installed at all side walls.
Pre-cast Concrete Slabs: All pre-cast concrete slabs shall be laid in bays not exceeding 10 m
in length, the bays being separated by an expansion joint 10 mm wide.
9.6 Tiling
9.6.1 General
Tiles on wall are required in all buildings where water is used and/or where profound
cleaning is required up to a minimum level of 2 m at least from the floor (eg mechanical
thickening, mechanical dewatering, laboratory, sludge storage). Intensively used rooms
require tiling up to the ceiling (eg. sludge storage, pumping stations, bath rooms, showers.
Tiling shall comprise all required labour, equipment and the supply of the appurtenant
materials and structural components including off-loading and storage at the site.
Workmanship and construction for tiles to floors and walls shall generally be in accordance
with DIN 18352. Only standardized materials and structural components shall be used.
All tiles and flags for which there are several grades available shall be of the best standard
commercial grade.
Before starting the work, the Contractor shall ascertain the Employer’s selection of patterns
and colours and the Contractor shall furnish the Project Manager with duplicate samples of
the patterns and colours of the materials selected by the Employer.
2-9-206 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Tiling shall be free of any defects and any work that shows signs of bond failures, hollow
patches, misalignment, cracking or any other defect. Defective work will not be accepted and
shall be removed and replaced by acceptable work.
9.6.2 Materials
In general, tiles and flags shall meet the quality requirements of DIN EN 14411 DIN 18158,
DIN 12912, DIN EN 12004 and other relevant regulations. Where tiles and flags are not
standardized, the quality features shall satisfy the standard commercial requirements (top
surface, parallelism of edges, colour, water absorption). All floor and wall tiles shall be from
the same batch.
Glazed ceramic tiles for walls shall be in the colour selected by the Employer, true to shape,
flat, free from flaws, cracks and crazing, uniform in colour, keyed on the back and shall
comply with DIN 18515. The ties shall be of a suitable type, size, colour and acid resistance.
Ceramic floor tiles shall be oil and acid resistant, true to shape, flat, free from flaws, cracks
and crazing, uniform in colour and of a non slippery type, make and colour. Dimensions and
tolerances shall comply with DIN 18158, DIN 18157 and similar relevant regulations.
Cement based adhesives shall comply with the requirements of DIN 18156 and used strictly
in accordance to the manufacturer’s printed instruction. Mortar materials and adhesives shall
not alter the top surface of the tiles.
9.6.5 Placing
In interior finishing works all tiles, flags or mosaic shall only be set and laid before the fixing
of windows and door frames and trims, and after stop rails, plumbing installations and the
application of plaster.
All tiles, flags and mosaic shall be set or laid plumb, in true alignment and horizontal or at
the slope specified, without any projections, with regard to any specified reference or level
lines. In wall coverings, projections shall be allowed only to the extent imposed by the
particular type of tile or flag specified.
trowel technique and trowelled over the area to receive tiles in 4 mm thickness. Tiles shall be
pressed in as recommended by the manufacturer.
Thick tiles shall be generally bedded in cement-sand mortar, at least 10 mm thick. Any
surplus mortar which adheres to the face of the tile shall be wiped off with a damp cloth
before it sets hard.
The external angles and side and top edges shall be formed with rounded edge tiles. At
intersections, returned rounded edge tiles shall be used.
9.7 Roofing
9.7.1 General
The specification for waterproofing and insulation of flat concrete roofs shall be designed
and laid according to the norms valid in Palestine or equivalent and taking into account the
relevant manufacturer’s instructions). Work shall follow the general principles given below.
The waterproofing and insulation of concrete roofs shall consist of at least 2 coats of
polymer-bitumen / rubber membranes.
The work shall consist of supplying, laying and finishing complete insulation and roof
coverings and shall include the provision of all necessary skirting, copings, flashings etc. On
completion, all roofs shall be left sound and watertight and in neat and clean condition. All
roof finishes shall be carefully worked or fitted around pipes and openings.
Roofing systems shall be in general the “inverted roof“ or “protected membrane roof system“
where the waterproof membrane is laid directly onto the structural slab and the insulating
layer is then laid on the membrane and protected by a layer of files.
The top surface of the roof slab shall be finished by cement plastering of minimum thickness
20 mm. A 50 mm x 50 mm mortar or wooden fillet shall be fixed in the corner between the
horizontal slab and the vertical parapet before the water proofing membrane is formed, fillets
shall also be fixed in the corners of gutters.
The finished roof slab surface must be clean, dry, smooth and free of roughness or dips. The
plastered surface of roof slab must be allowed to dry before the sheets are applied. Drying
time is dependent on the weather and may take anything from 8 days to 3 weeks.
Depending on the different construction types, the sheets can be fully bonded to the substrate
by torch, spot bonded or loose laid. Torch-bonding is carried out with a suitable gas torch
burner connected to a propane gas cylinder.
2-9-208 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The sheets are overlapped longitudinally by 100 mm, while the head laps of the membranes
shall not be less than 150 mm. The bonding is carried out by torch application in such a way
that a continuous bead of melted bitumen comes out from the overlap. So as not to remove
the protective top layer, the use of trowel is to be avoided.
However the membranes must not be overheated and a further sign of correct application is
that an excessively large bead of melted compound does not come out from the overlap.
The waterproofing membranes and coatings shall be brought up the inside of the roof parapet
to a height of at least 150 mm. The top sheet must be protected by mineral coating or suitable
painting.
Expanded polystyrene slabs or other foam insulation 40 mm thick at least shall be stuck
down to the roof with a coat of the waterproofing compound.
Each slab of insulation shall be bounded by a key interlocking with adjacent slabs, to ensure
the continuity of the insulation.
Flashings shall be formed out of 0.8 mm aluminium with natural mill finish. Accessories
such as hooks, nails, screws and clamps shall be of the same material and alloy.
Screeds shall be prepared of cement, sand and water in accordance to the requirements
stipulated for screeds.
Rainwater outlets shall drain from the top interface between the waterproof membranes.
Rainwater guttering for flat roofs shall have vertical pipes of diameter, such that a minimum
cross-sectional area of 100 mm2 is provided for each square metre of roof area.
9.7.4 Workmanship
Workmanship shall be carried out in accordance with DIN 18338. The roof surfaces shall be
uniform, compact and free from debris.
Waterproof membranes shall be 1.5 mm thick self adhesive rubber bitumen applied strictly in
accordance to the manufacturer’s instructions. The membrane shall be continuous and take
up abutments and pipes to above the insulation layer. Exposed membrane shall be solar
protected. The waterproof membrane shall be dressed and bonded into rainwater outlets and
under flashings.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-9-209
The insulation board shall be not less than 50 mm thick closed cell extruded polystyrene
loose laid in a single layer with tight staggered butt joints in accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. The board shall be trimmed to fit any fillets used under the
waterproof membrane.
Flashings shall be sheet aluminium neatly cut to the width and length required. The
aluminium shall be carefully bent using a slightly rounded former so as to avoid surface
cracking. Where surface fixing is required, the sheet shall be pre-drilled and fixed with
screws that are not oxidizable to proprietary fixings or hardwood grounds let into the surface
of the base concrete or brick work.
Lightweight screeds shall be laid in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and to
falls not less than 1:40 with a thickness of 100 mm. The screed shall be laid in two courses
and in bays not exceeding 15 m², laid alternatively and finished with a mortar topping of 1:4
cement/sand mortar. Immediately after laying, the screed shall be protected from wind and
sunlight and cured for 7 days.
9.8.2 Materials
Timber shall be of best quality, sound, in good condition, reasonably free from shakes and
free from loose dead knots, insect attack, decay, twisting and warping. Timber shall be
properly seasoned to suit the purpose for which it is intended. Only knots with characteristics
similar to those detailed in DIN 4074 will be allowed. Where timber is prescribed as
“selected“ it shall be free from knots.
Softwood shall be either redwood, specially selected from the best unsorted and joinery
quality or Douglas fir of selected merchantable quality or better.
Hardwood shall be selected and of best quality; it shall be particularly checked for infestation
by pinhole borers. Selected hardwood shall comply with DIN 4074, grade IA.
All plywood, chipboard or materials incorporating chipboard shall not be used in the works.
9.8.3 Samples
Timber, or carpentry and joinery units of which the material on delivery to the site does not
conform to the standard of samples will be rejected
2-9-210 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
9.8.4 Ironmongery
The Contractor shall provide all necessary ironmongery including matching screws, bolts,
plugs and other fixings. The use of nails for ironmongery fixing will not be permitted.
9.8.5 Fabrication
The carpenter shall perform all necessary mortising, tenoning, grooving, matching, housing,
rebating and all other works for correct jointing. He shall also provide all metal plates,
screws and other fixings that may be specified or necessary for the proper execution of the
works and he shall carry out all works necessary for the proper construction of all framings,
linings etc. and for their support and fixing in the works.
No nails shall be used to assemble or fix hardwood, major supports or ironmongery. Screws
used in exposed locations and/or for hardwood shall be brass and complete with brass
surrounds.
Hardwood doors shall be constructed out of teak or similar hardwood, with 100x38 mm
stiles, 125x38 mm top rails and 225x38 mm middle and bottom rails. Where required, the
doors shall be glazed with 6 mm wire polished plate glass, fixed with hardwood glazing
beads.
Frames, architrave’s and extension pieces shall be manufactured from red or whitewood
timber and shall include the use of finger-jointed material. If exposed in the laboratory, the
frames must be in hardwood.
In brick openings, frames shall be fitted with fixing lugs in adequate number, and bedded in
mortar.
In concrete openings, frames shall be plugged to the walls using zinc-coated screws.
To avoid corrosion of Aluminium alloy frames, screws and other metal fixing in contact with
them shall be of Aluminium, zinc or cadmium plated. In no circumstances shall copper
fixings be used.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-9-211
Frames shall be carefully pointed in 1: 3 cement mortar and, after raking out the gap, shall be
pointed with mastic.
Where members are formed from sheet materials they shall be fabricated conforming to DIN
EN 485.
The main elements of the Aluminium solid section outer frame shall be at minimum
tolerance not less than 2.0 mm thick. The thickness of all other structural elements of the
sections shall be at minimum tolerance not less than 1.2 mm except for weather-stripping
retaining flanges and glazing beads which may be thinner.
All Aluminium alloy parts shall be finished satin matt and anodised in accordance with DIN
4113.
Weather-stripping shall:
- be made from materials known to be compatible with Aluminium;
- not shrink or warp or adhere to sliding surfaces or closing surfaces;
- not promote corrosion when in contact with the Aluminium alloy used; and,
- be resistant to deterioration by weathering.
Joints in frames shall be made neatly and accurately either by welding or by mechanical
means (e.g. cleaning and screwing) and may have flush, stepped or lapped surfaces. Welded
joints shall be cleaned off smooth on the surfaces which are exposed when the window or
door is in the closed position or where they come into contact with glazing.
Hinges and pivots shall be either of suitable corrosion-resistant materials or, if not
compatible with Aluminium, shall be separated from the Aluminium by materials which are
compatible with it. Hardware, including fixings, shall be of suitable corrosion resistant
materials. Materials or finishes which are not compatible with Aluminium shall not be used
unless they are satisfactorily separated from the Aluminium by materials which are
compatible with it.
Glazing beds, gaskets, glass adaptors and glazing compound shall be of materials compatible
with aluminium and finishes thereon.
Windows and doors shall be such that glazing and reglazing on site is possible without the
need to remove the outer frames from the structure of the building.
2-9-212 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
9.9.3 Louvers
The use of louvers is not permitted in principal, due to the fact that Hebron is subject to sand
storms. Where louvers are proposed, Contractor has to demonstrate that both alternatives are
not functional and that the use of louvers is appropriate in this case.
All hardware shall have the required screws, bolts and fastenings necessary for proper
installation, wrapped in paper and packed in the same package as the hardware. Each
package shall be legibly labelled, indicating that portion of the work for which it is intended.
All hardware shall be of the best grade, entirely free from imperfections in manufacture and
finish.
Quantities, weight and sizes specified herein are the minimum that will be acceptable.
Finish of all hardware shall be dull stainless steel unless otherwise noted.
Friction catch: heavy duty - two parts with rubber grips concealed installation
Cabinet and drawer pulls: stainless steel, 10 cm grip with concealed bolt fastenings.
Installation: Unless otherwise indicated, all hardware installation and hanging shall be done
at the site.
The Contractor shall provide one (1) painted wood key case in each structure, size 25 x 50
cm with door and lock. Supply plywood back inside with hooks for spare keys. All keys shall
be clearly labelled with metal or hardboard tags size approximately 50 x 20 securely fixed to
the keys and handed over to the Project Manager
Upon completion of the hardware installation, all items shall be inspected for proper
operation. All work shall be protected and any damage or incorrectness shall be repaired.
Hardware shall not be fitted until the latest time in the Contract.
9.11 Glazing
9.11.1 General
The Contractor shall supply the glass required in those items of plant, furnishings and
figments included in the Contract. Glass shall be of quality in accordance to DIN 1249 or
equivalent. Sheets shall be selected quality glazing and of weight. Labels showing the glass
manufacturer’s name, type of glass thickness and quality will be required on each piece of
glass and shall remain on the glass until it has been set and inspected.
9.11.2 Materials
Clear float glass shall be 6 mm thick. Obscured glass shall be rough cast, untainted and of 6
mm nominal thickness. Wired glass shall be transparent with a polished surface, 6 mm thick,
selected and cut parallel to the reinforcement.
Putty for glazing to timber frames shall be in accordance to DIN 18540, and to metal frames,
it shall be of renown manufacture.
Glass shall be delivered to the site in suitable containers allowing to protect the glass from
weather and breakage.
9.11.4 Installation
Clear glass shall be used except where ordered otherwise. The glass shall be cut and installed
without any visible lines or waves running horizontally.
Glazing in wood shall have rebates and beds primed and painted. The glass shall be firmly
seated into the previously bedded and back-bedded rebate with glazing compound and
secured in place with wood beds, attached with not less than 25 mm finish nails or flat
headed screws, countersunk and set approximately at 15 cm centers. Nails and screws used in
beds shall be corrosion resistant.
9.11.5 Cleaning up
All glass shall be cleaned at the completion of construction and any broken glass replaced.
The glazing shall be maintained in a clean condition until the date of handing over the works.
- "Specifications for cast iron soil pipe and fittings (ISO R-13), spigot and socket"; the pipe
shall be coal tar pitch coated.
Gutters shall have half round or rectangular profiles in asbestos cement, PVC, or galvanized
iron. The width or diameter of gutters shall be 150 mm.
Pipe shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the building by the Contractor
and shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. Care shall be taken not to
weaken structural portions of the building. Exposed piping shall be run parallel with the lines
of the building, unless otherwise indicated. Branch pipes from service lines may be taken
from top, bottom, or side of the main, using such crossover fittings as may be required by
structural or installation conditions. Pipes, valves and fittings shall be kept in a sufficient
distance from other work and other pipes to permit not less than 25 mm between pipes and
other work. No water pipe shall be buried in floors or cast in concrete walls, unless
specifically indicated. Changes in pipe sizes shall be made with fittings. Use of bushings will
not be permitted. Change in direction shall be made with fittings.
Allowance shall be made throughout for expansion and contraction of pipe. Sufficient
flexibility shall be provided on all branch run outs from mains to provide for expansion and
contraction of piping. Flexibility shall be provided by installing one or more turns in the line
so that the piping will spring enough to allow for expansion without straining.
Joints in steel piping may be screwed or flanged. Installation of pipe and fittings shall be
made in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Mitring of joints for elbows
and notching of straight runs of pipe for test will not be permitted. Threaded joints shall have
ISO/R7 pipe threads with graphite or inert filler and oil, with a suitable graphite compound,
or with polyethylene tape applied to the male threads only. Unions shall be provided where
required for disconnection.
Valves
Valves shall be provided for piping to equipment and fixtures. No valve shall be installed on
any line with its stem below the horizontal. All valves shall be gate valves, unless otherwise
specified or indicated.
Unions
2-9-216 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Unions shall be installed in easily accessible locations. Gaskets for flanged unions shall be of
the best quality fibre, plastic or leather. Unions shall not be concealed in walls, ceilings, or
partitions.
Hose taps
Hose taps shall be brass with 13 mm inlet threads, hexagon shoulder, and 20 mm hose
connection, unless otherwise indicated. Hose taps installed on exterior walls of buildings
shall have an integral wall flange which shall be securely anchored to the wall to prevent any
strain on the supply pipe when attaching or disconnecting hose. Anchors shall use brass or
bronze bolts or screws with expansion shields in the concrete or masonry wall.
Pipe sleeves
Pipe passing through concrete or masonry walls or concrete floors shall be provided with
pipe sleeves fitted into place at the time of construction. Sleeves shall be steel pipe. Each
sleeve shall extend through its respective wall, floor or roof, and shall be cut flush, except
sleeves in toilet room floors shall extend 25 mm above the finished floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, sleeves shall be of such size as to provide a minimum of 6 mm all around
clearance between bare pipe and sleeves. The annular space between pipe and sleeve shall be
packed and caulked watertight.
Fixture support
Wall-hung fixtures shall be fastened to the wall by 9.5 mm through bolts where appearance
of the bolts is not objectionable. Exposed bolt heads in finished areas shall be hexagonal and
painted. Exposed nuts shall be chromium-plated hexagonal cap nuts. Washers shall be
painted or chromium-plated to match bolt heads or nuts.
For solid masonry and where through bolting is objectionable, fixtures shall be fastened with
9.5 mm machine bolt expansion shields or 9. 5 mm stud-type expansion bolts.
If inspection or test shows defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced or
repaired as necessary and inspection and tests repeated. Repairs to piping shall be made with
new materials. No caulking of screwed joints or holes will be acceptable.
Disinfection
After pressure tests have been made, the entire water system shall be thoroughly flushed with
water until all dirt and mud have been removed before introducing chlorinating material. The
chlorinating material shall be either chlorine solution or hypo chlorite. The chlorinating
material shall provide a dosage of not less than 50 parts per million and shall be introduced
into the system in an evenly spread and suitable manner. The treated water shall be retained
in the pipe long enough to destroy all non-spore forming bacteria. The retention time shall be
at least 24 hours and shall produce not less than 10 ppm of chlorine at the extreme end of the
system at the end of the retention period. All valves in the system being sterilized shall be
opened and closed several times during the contact period. The system shall then be flushed
with clean water until the residual chlorine is reduced to less than 1.0 ppm. During the
flushing period all valves and taps shall be opened and closed several times.
The Contractor will take samples of water in properly sterilized containers for bacterial
examination. Disinfection shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of pollution for at
least 2 full days. The system will not be accepted until satisfactory bacteriological results
have been obtained.
Fire protection
Portable fire extinguishers shall be installed in all buildings at strategic positions (stair cases,
corridors) in a manner that traffic will not be obstructed. As a further condition, extinguishers
shall be located at easily visible and accessible locations regarding the event of a fire.
Rooms and areas where voltages above 1,000 V are to be present, housing relays, control and
computer units shall be equipped with portable carbon dioxide extinguishers in addition.
Also suitable masks to prevent any injury to personnel shall be supplied.
2-9-218 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
All extinguishers shall be designed for service over a period of 20 years taking the conditions
at the site into account.
After completion of the installation, random tests of 20% of the portable extinguishers
supplied shall be performed. The necessary refills shall be provided by the Contractor.
9.13 Painting
9.13.1 General
This Specification covers the general requirements and standards of workmanship and the
painting and protective coatings required to be carried out by the Contractor of the works.
Appropriate standards
Where no explicit instruction is given standards in the Specification or by the manufacturer
concerning any particular aspect of the workmanship, materials or procedures in connection
with anti-corrosion protective systems in the works for iron and steel structures, the relevant
recommendations of the following standard or code of practice shall apply:
DIN EN 13507 Thermal spraying - Pre-treatment of surfaces
DIN EN ISO 2063 Thermal spraying - Metallic and other inorganic coatings
DIN EN ISO 8044 Corrosion of metal
DIN EN ISO 1461 Hot-dip galvanized coatings on iron and steel articles
DIN 50928 Protective coating of iron and steel structures against corrosion
DIN 18364 Surface protection of steel structures
Local conditions
All coatings shall be suitable for the long term protection of the plant under operational
conditions at the site of installation. The Contractor's attention is specifically drawn to the
extremes of temperature and humidity recorded in the region and he shall take into account
possible abrasions, restricted ventilation, and the various potentially corrosive environments
within the works buildings and structures.
The Contractor is advised that internal civil works finishes, furnishings and decorative colour
schemes in the main operational areas should be of a pleasing appearance, co-ordinated and
designed to produce a comfortable working environment. Accordingly, the Contractor shall
allow for consultation with the Project Manager regarding the final colour scheme and
decoration of the works.
Precautions etc.
All surface fittings, ironmongery, etc., except hinges shall be removed before painting and
refixed on completion. They shall be entirely free of any droppings, paint smears and
blemishes. Labels, pump and other machinery name plates, data plates, markings, etc., shall
not be over painted but carefully preserved by removal and replacement or by masking.
The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the toxicity, inflammability and the explosive
dangers related to the storage and application of the systems and shall take all precautions
necessary to protect his operatives, the public and other site personnel.
Work succession
No one site coat may proceed in any section of the works until the entire section is complete
and the Project Manager has had notice of completion in order that he may inspect the work
and authorize the application of subsequent coats. Each successive coat shall preferably be of
different colour or shade to facilitate inspection.
The coating thickness for painting on concrete or plaster surfaces shall be in accordance with
the manufacturer’s instructions or proposals.
Wet film thickness gauges shall be provided to and used by each painter to check the rate of
paint application.
The thickness of the built-up dry film after each paint coat applied to steel or other magnetic
surfaces shall be measured systematically with a dry film thickness gauge.
2-9-220 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The Contractor shall adopt holiday detection on concrete, steel and iron surfaces and shall
use a suitable method of detecting pinholes in the coating system after trials on test plates.
The sweep voltage on high voltage DC equipment shall not exceed half the voltage required
to spark through the complete paint system specified.
The following instruments, with the manufacturer’s operating instructions, shall be provided,
maintained and used by the Contractor's inspector. In addition, under the Contract a separate
set shall be provided and maintained for the Project Manager’s sole use for the duration of
the Contract:
- adhesion tester, cover 0 to 280 kg/ cm2;
- 1 DC high voltage holiday detector, 20 kV, with rechargeable batteries;
- 1 paint inspection gauge, 0 to 500 microns;
- 4 "wet-check" moisture meters with suitable concrete and timber scales;
- 1 dry film thickness gauge, 0 to 500 microns;
- 4 wet film gauges, up to 500 microns;
- 1 steel temperature gauge, up to 50° C;
- 1 air humidity gauge;
- 1 air Thermometer (maximum and minimum);
- surface profile gauge, up to 150 microns.
Daily checks shall be carried out and recorded on site in accordance with the provisions of
DIN 55634.
Colour coding
Pipework, tanks and ducting shall be colour coded by totally painting with the appropriate
code colour as specified.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-9-221
The definition RAL-notation of the colours mentioned above shall be subject to Project
Manager’s approval after the commencement of the works.
The colour coding for other minor pipelines, etc., will be notified to the Contractor prior to
the commencement of erection.
All pipes and tanks shall also bear painted labels to indicate the contents. Lettering shall be in
both Arabic and English. Labels on pipework shall incorporate arrows showing the direction
of flow within the pipework.
Black lettering shall be used on organ, yellow and green and white lettering shall be used on
red and blue. Sufficient labels shall be used to ensure adequate identification throughout the
length of the pipe runs. These shall be located at least adjacent to each flange or
disconnecting joint, where pipework passes through walls, floors, crosses doorways and other
access ways and at intervals in long runs of pipework.
Stopping for woodwork, hardboard and plywood shall be proprietary spirit-based wood filler,
tinted to match the woodwork.
Parts to be subjected to manufacturer’s shop testing shall not be stopped or surface treated
prior to satisfactory completion of the testing. Thereafter the specified treatment shall be
applied.
All paint shall be "new" and "fresh" and obtained from reknown manufacturer(s).
As far as is practicable, materials, forming any one protective and/or decorative system used
in the permanent works, shall be obtained from one manufacturer.
Bitumen coating
Bitumen coatings shall be to DIN 18195, 18336 and DIN 18299. Suitable grades shall be
selected where the coating will be in contact with potable water.
Identification
All paint shall be supplied in sealed containers bearing the following information in addition
to any statutory requirements:
- Manufacturer’s name, initials or trade mark;
- Whether priming, undercoat or finishing coat;
- Whether for interior or external use;
- The colour reference number;
- The method of application (e.g. brush);
- The batch number and date of manufacture of re-test
- The shelf life of the contents.
Containers for materials other than paints shall bear as much of the above information as
appropriate.
Paint preparation
Paint shall be supplied from the Contractor's paint store to the painters ready for application.
Any addition of thinners shall be made in the store under supervision and up to the limit
detailed on the appropriate manufacturer’s paint data sheet for the particular method and
conditions of applications concerned.
Waste
The Contractor shall provide onsite suitable moveable receptacles into which are to be placed
all the liquid, slops, washings, etc. All solid refuse or inflammable residues shall be removed
from site or carefully burned. No refuse shall be deposited on any soil or disposed down any
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-9-223
permanent sanitary fittings, sinks or drains. The Contractor shall immediately clean up any
unauthorized deposition and remove from the site any employee found to be responsible.
Spray application
The equipment to be used for spray application shall be in strict accordance with the paint
manufacturer’s instructions for each coating material. Any runs shall be immediately brushed
out.
Brush application
The shape and quality of the brushes shall be suitable for the work to be carried out.
Extension handles to brushes shall not be permitted.
Metal coatings
All steelwork (except roof structures) where ever installed and if not specified otherwise
shall be galvanized (in hot bath or zinc spraying).
Metal coatings required for protective purposes on any item of metalwork shall be applied
after fabrication of the items is completed, including all punching, welding, drilling,
grinding, screw tapping and cutting, and after the removal of surface defects. Tapped holes
shall be blanked off before the metal coating is applied.
Prefabrication primers
Unless otherwise specified, prefabrication primers for steelwork shall comply with the
relevant DIN standards and contain corrosion-inhibiting pigments, adhere firmly to the
substrate and form suitable bases for the succeeding coats in the protective paint system.
The surface finish of blast cleaned steel shall be in accordance with the relevant DIN
standard and to a visual standard in accordance with SIS 05 59 00 at the time of painting. The
blast profile shall be within the limits 50 - 75 microns.
Abrasives shall be restricted to reusable iron or steel (grit and shot) or copper slag. The type
and grades of abrasive shall be selected in accordance with the appropriate DIN standard.
Within four hours of completion of surface preparation, and before surface re-rusting occurs,
a coating of primer shall be applied to avoid deterioration of the prepared base metal. No
contamination shall be permitted to occur between blast cleaning and primer coating.
Uncoated surfaces
The only surfaces of iron or steelwork or non-corrosion resistant materials which are to be
left unprotected by paint or metal coating are:
The internal surfaces of boxes or hollow sections which are of dimensions too small to
permit access for painting either at the fabrication stage or for maintenance during the
operation life of the steelwork and which are to be hermetically sealed by welding.
Those surfaces of built-in iron or steel members which are to have concrete cast against
them;
- Machine bright parts and bearing surfaces which shall be thoroughly cleaned, polished
and protected from corrosion by painting with one coat of a mixture of white lead and
tallow or other similar high quality material before despatch. The Contractor shall provide
solvent for removing the treatment;
- Parts which are specified to include corrosion allowances instead of protective coatings.
- Stainless steel parts
- Surfaces of iron or steel members which are to have concrete cast against them shall be
clean and free of deleterious matter and loose rust at the time of concreting. The paint
protection system, to be applied to the permanently exposed faces of these members
before the members are built in, shall be continued for 50 mm as marginal strip along the
contact surface. No paint containing Aluminium in metallic form shall be allowed to come
into direct contact with the concrete.
The specified paint system shall then be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s
instructions to bring the damaged area up to the same state of protection as the surrounding
paintwork, with each coat of new paint overlapping the corresponding existing coat of paint
by at last 50 mm.
Where epoxy coatings are damaged, suitable repair supplied by the manufacturer of the
original coating shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
Fastenings
Bolts, nuts and washers and other demountable fastenings of all galvanized parts and also
Aluminium alloy parts shall be in stainless steel to the appropriate DIN standard and shall
remain unpainted. P.T.F.E. washers shall be fitted beneath bolt-head and washer when
fastening galvanized and aluminium alloy parts.
Fastenings, except high tensile, of all ferrous parts shall be steel prepared and galvanized to
or sheradized to the relevant DIN standards, primed and painted in accordance with location.
Electro-galvanizing, nickel, cadmium or any other plating process, except chromium plating,
will not be acceptable, and shall not be offered.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-9-225
After installation and after all bolts have been tightened, the area of the connection shall be
cleaned to remove all dirt, dust, oil or other contaminant. Particular care shall be taken to
ensure that all traces of oil and grease are removed from bolts, nuts and washers.
Bolts, nuts and washers and any exposed at bolted connections shall also be primed as
specified, particular care being taken to ensure that any crevices are fully sealed. The
remaining coats of the paint system shall then be applied.
Following painting and where the bolted connections are in an area to be backfilled (pipe
trench flanges, etc.) the bolts, nuts and washers and the entire joint assembly shall be
carefully packed with a purpose made water proof protective paste (non solvent) and finally
wrapped with a protective paste impregnated tape to completely encase the assembly. Pipe
joint protection shall continue along the length of the barrel for a distance of 200 mm.
Minimum thickness and adhesion tests for painting systems for concrete and plaster
The total dry film thickness of any used paint system shall have a minimum value of tests for
0.75 mm. In order to restore the coating integrity and plaster thickness whenever the paint
inspection gauge is used or wherever the coating has been otherwise damaged, the surface
shall be abraded for 50 mm around such damage and the area touched in with not less than
two thick applications.
Adhesion tests will be carried out on the cured coating using the test equipment supplied
under the Contract in accordance with the best practice. The resulting test specimen shall
show no indication of poor adhesion to the substratum, residual laitance or intercoat adhesion
weakness.
Efflorescence present on the surface of internal plaster, brickwork and concrete shall be
removed by scraping and brushing before any surface paint is applied. When fluorescence
has been removed surfaces shall be left for at least three days before priming. Painting shall
be deferred where further salt deposits form on the surface during this period.
Plaster surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned down, smoothed as necessary, and all cracks
shall be filled with stopping for plaster. All fittings shall be carried out before paint is applied
to the surface.
Brickwork, block work and concrete surfaces shall be cleaned of all contaminating matter
before being primed. Large holes which would cause a break in the paint film shall be filled
with mortar, the surface being rubbed down to match the surrounding areas.
Hardwoods and soft woods for which a clear finish is specified shall be rubbed down with
abrasive paper to give a smooth surface which shall be free from contaminating substances,
scratches and other imperfections.
Prior to coating all nail and screw holes, etc., shall first be stopped. Surfaces which are to be
painted shall be rubbed down to remove all contaminating substances and imperfections
which would be visible in the finished paint film. The surfaces of knots and resinous streaks
shall then be painted with two coasts of knotting, the first being allowed to dry before the
second is applied.
Where surfaces are suspected of being infected with mould they shall be thoroughly treated
with a fungicide.
instruction
Concrete Exposed to 1 coat with a plastic 3 coats with an oil resistant synthetic
oil modified hydraulic resin based paint
mortar
10 Metalwork
10.1 Scope
This section sets out the general requirements for the metalwork required in the works.
10.1.1 General
All steelwork in areas prone to high corrosion risk shall be Stainless Steel 316L. This
pertains as a minimum for all steel structures, equipment and appurtenances in the water line
up to the final clarifier as well as structures, equipment and appurtenances in the sludge line.
All other steelwork (except roof structures) where ever installed shall be galvanized (in hot
bath or zinc spraying). Welding on galvanized steelwork has to be avoided and assembling
has to be done by bolts and nuts.
The permissible design stresses for materials, bolts, rivets, etc., are given in DIN 18800.
Rolled structural steel sections shall be mild steel, conforming to DIN EN 10025. The
dimensions, tolerances and properties of the structural sections shall conform to DIN 18201
up to 18203 and to DIN 18800. Where the use of prefabricated proprietary designs is
proposed, the standards to which they are manufactures shall be no less rigorous than
specified herein.
For structural steel work assemblies, steel bolts, nuts and washers shall be high strength
friction grip bolts conforming to DIN 14399 or black bolts including nuts and washers
conforming to DIN 7989 and DIN 7990.
All welding consumables (electrodes, wire, filler rods, flux, shielding gas and the like) shall
comply with the requirements of the appropriate DIN standard and with the requirements of
the appropriate welding procedure.
Erection
All erection processes shall be carried out in accordance to DIN 18800.
information at the same time as the detail drawings. All connections shall be welded in such
a manner as to make the finished connections neat and smooth in appearance, and suitable for
painting. All slag shall be removed, and any sharp projections shall be ground smooth. All
welding carried out during fabrication in the factory and erection on the site shall be carried
out in accordance with the requirements of DIN 18800 and as shown on the detail drawings.
Before welding is commenced either in the fabrication shop or on site, weld procedure tests
shall be carried out.
All welders employed either in the fabrication shop or on site shall pass qualification tests
relevant to the weld procedures in use in accordance with the appropriate DIN standard.
Welders shall have satisfactory evidence of having been engaged in welding for at least 9
months in the preceding period. If the work of any welders employed on the Contract is
unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall carry out such further welder qualification tests as are
necessary to demonstrate that the welders are proficient.
When not otherwise specified, welds shall be subject to non-destructive testing by processes
which may include but not necessarily be limited to radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic
particle, or dye penetration methods, depending on the type of weld and its position in the
structure. About 50 % of all welding shall be tested.
If any work shows defects or fails to comply with the requirements of the drawings or the
specification for any reason, it shall be repaired or rejected, even though it may have been
carried out by qualified welders.
The welding procedure for cupro-nickel linings shall avoid porosity in the weld and any
uncontrolled dilution of the weld by iron picked up from the steel.
Special precautions shall be taken to avoid lamellar tearing when welding thick plates and
low hydrogen content electrodes shall be used. Class 1 welds shall be fully radiographed
except where otherwise specified.
In bad weather, additional measures are needed in the course of welding consequently, in
case of rainy weather, provision shall be made to keep the places of welding dry. In weather
with temperatures below 5 C, a strip of 100 mm should be preheated to 50 C, on both sides
of the welded joint in case of both seams and tack welds.
Splash, burning-in, uneven arc, oversized root edges at corner joints, unsatisfactory seam or
any crack are impermissible in the course of welding. Surfaces should be free from any
marks of impact, indentation and deformation.
10.3 Flooring
10.3.1 General
Flooring shall be fabricated from chequer plate or open mesh panels.
2-10-230 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
All steelworks for chequer plates, frames or open mesh flooring shall be constructed in mild
steel and shall be hot–dip galvanized after manufacture, except where otherwise specified.
For all prefabricated metalwork, as chequer plates, frames, open mesh and the like, the
Contractor shall file fabrication drawings.
Flooring and supports thereto shall be designed and manufactured to resist a uniform applied
live loading of 7.5 KN/m² unless otherwise specified or stipulated in the applicable DIN
standards.
Flooring panels shall generally be removable by one man and the maximum weight of each
panel shall not exceed 25 kg. Removable sections of flooring shall be provided with holes for
lifting keys, keys to suit for each location, and be arranged to permit removal without
disturbance to support brackets, spindles, pipework, etc. Intermediate support members shall
be provided as required and attached to the supporting structure.
Flooring shall be detailed and fabricated so that no cutting is required on site. Supporting
steelwork shall comply with the requirements of clauses for structural steelwork. Bolt holes
in brackets and mountings shall be slotted to allow for adjustment of line and level. Mild
steel continuous kerbing shall be provided for seating the flooring in concrete. Kerbing and
other supporting structures for building into concrete shall have lugs welded on a maximum
spacing of 600 mm. Flooring shall be secured to the kerbing or supports by stainless steel
flush screws.
The width of any access walkway shall be not less than 750 mm.
Floor plating
Floor plating over openings in concrete or brickwork shall be set flush in mild steel framed
kerbing provided with adequate integral lugs for building in.
Open mesh flooring panels shall be fabricated from mild steel load bearing bars of flat
section backed with round, square, or twisted bars perpendicular to and welded to each load
bearing bar. Panels shall be trimmed across the ends of load bearing bars by flats of the same
cross section welded to each load bearing bar. Cut-outs for plant items shall be trimmed with
curved or straight edge trimming as appropriate. Panels shall be fixed to the kerbing or
supporting steelwork with adequate flush stainless steel screws or clips so that movement is
prevented.
Internal access covers shall generally be designed and fabricated as specified for flooring. In
situations which warrant special measures to prevent pollution of filtered water the covers
shall be air tight.
If not anywhere otherwise required, external access covers over such as raw water or sludge
channels shall be steel open mesh.
Manhole covers shall be of a class appropriate to their location according to the respective
Standard in the Palestine Territories
Where covers and frames are supplied from manufacturers to standards other than those
specified, the alternatives shall be designed and tested for loadings equal to or greater than
the covers specified, and the clear openings of the frames of the alternatives shall be equal to
or greater than the covers specified.
Permissible differences
For metalwork at floor level joints differences between flooring sections and between steel
flooring and adjacent concrete shall be:
- difference in level at joints: 3 mm
- joint gap: 3 mm
Hand railing
Handrails shall be stainless steel 316 or reinforced carbon. If steel is used, protective
measures have to be taken to prevent high temperatures in summer. Standards shall be fitted
with high quality bases.
Hand railing shall be provided along every edge of all metalwork and concrete walkways,
stairs or accessible open areas where the drop beyond the edge exceeds 700 mm. Hand
railing shall consist of standards at regular intervals not exceeding 1.5 m, and two rails. The
upper rail shall be 1.0 m above the adjacent finished floor level, and 900 mm above the
nosing line on stairways. The lowest rail shall be midway between floor and upper rail. The
hand railing fixing and anchorages shall be designed to withstand a continuous horizontal
load at the top rail of 750 N/m.
Unless otherwise required in the particular specification standards for hand railing inside
buildings, all rails shall be fabricated from 32 mm bore galvanized medium weight steel tube.
Hand railing shall be flush jointed. Hand railing terminating against a wall shall either have a
suitable wall fixing flange, or shall terminate at a standard with a gap between the standard
and the wall not exceeding 100 mm. Where the shape of the concrete structure does not
incorporate an up stand at the edge of walkways, toe plates 5 mm thick and 100 mm high
2-10-232 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
shall be fixed to handrail standards. The bottom edge of such toe plates shall be 10 mm above
the surface of the concrete walkway.
The handrail standards for stairways and for landings and walkways of width less than 1.2 m
shall have palm fittings for bolting to the side of the structure. Elsewhere the standards shall
be designed for fixing 100 mm inside the edge of concrete structures, or at the supporting
edge girder of steel flooring, or have palm fittings. Horizontal mounting palms shall be
drilled for not less than three bolts with two bolts on a line parallel to and on the walkway
side of the line of the hand railing. Vertical mounting palms shall be drilled for not less than
two bolts the line through the bolts being vertical.
Where required ladders, stairways or other openings shall be guarded on three sides by hand
railing conforming to the requirements stated above. Access to the ladders or openings shall
be guarded by two removable galvanized hanging chains secured to eyes at top and middle
levels.
Stairs shall have an inclination of approximately 30°. They shall be complete with handrails,
min. 100 cm vertical height.
All ladders are to have a minimum width of 750 mm where practicable. Vertical ladders shall
be installed alternating left hand/right hand side to horizontal platforms placed approximately
every 6 m of vertical height. Vertical ladders of more than 3 m height shall be provided with
safety hoops at intervals not exceeding 900 mm, with the lowest hoop 2.0 m above the ladder
foot. Load assumptions for ordinary platforms shall be:
- for platforms used by personnel and for support of light equipment with single weights of
less than 50 kg 2.5 kN /m²
- for all other platforms 7.5 kN /m²
- unless otherwise specified or stipulated in the applicable standards.
10.4.2 Ladders
With exception of internal access ladders to water tanks, reservoirs and wet sumps, laddering
shall be in steel (fully hot-dip galvanized). Ladders for internal access shall be in stainless
steel 316L. Generally all ladders shall be in accordance with DIN EN 14396.
The stringers shall be sized to suit the height of the ladder and the interval of the stringer
supports. Stringer shall be radiused over the top and drilled to receive the rungs which shall
be welded to the stringers on each side of each stringer. The bottom ends of the stringers
shall not be designed for floor fixing, but shall terminate at wall fixing supports at least 150
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-10-233
mm above the floor. All edges of stringers shall be ground smooth to remove burrs and sharp
edges.
Where the installation of hoops is not possible or inappropriate, anchorage points shall be
provided for attaching safety harnesses.
The width of the treads shall be between 250 mm and 300 mm. The width of the stairways
shall not be less than 750 mm.
The stringer shall be mounted by means of angle brackets with slotted holes for adjustment
of line and level.
10.6 Miscellaneous
Dissimilar metals
The use of dissimilar metals in contact, liable to lead to galvanic action, shall be avoided.
The contractor will provide isolation between metals if these need to be connected.
Mild steel surfaces to be in contact with Aluminium or Aluminium alloy shall be deemed to
satisfy this requirement if they are galvanized. For fixing aluminium to steel structures, bolts,
nuts, washers and screws shall be cadmium plated.
Opening tools
Lifting keys and devices for unfastening screws shall be galvanized mild steel and supplied at
the rate of one set for each five similar covers, with a minimum of two sets of each particular
type.
Step irons
Step irons for buildings into pre-cast concrete and step irons and handholds for building into
the wall of in-situ concrete manholes and chambers shall be of round pattern. All step irons
shall be cast iron with rubber coating as corrosion protection. Step irons shall only be used
where ladders would not be an appropriate alternative.
2-10-234 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Surface boxes
Surface boxes for key operation of valves shall be cast grey iron or ductile iron and shall
comply with the relevant requirements of DIN 405. The lid shall be chained to the frame.
Protection
The metal work shall be protected in accordance with the general specification for "Painting
and Protective Coating".
Installation
Where metalwork is to be founded on and fastened to concrete, the Contractor shall use one
of the following methods as subsequently detailed:
Method Description
1. Bolting or screwing the metalwork to plates or angle sections with anchors set into
the concrete structure or set into pockets left in the concrete structure.
2. Setting the metalwork into pockets or recesses formed in the concrete structure.
3. Bolting the metalwork to bolts set into the concrete structure or set in pockets or
holes in the concrete structure.
4. Bolting the metalwork to self-anchoring epoxy resin fixed bolts placed in drilled
holes.
Cement-mortar of 1 part of cement to 3 parts of sand shall be used for bedding access covers
and the like and for filling around metalwork or bolts set into pockets or holes smaller than
100 mm². For larger holes, concrete of the same grade as the structure shall be used instead
of mortar. The installation methods permitted for each type of metalwork are specified in the
table below:
During installation, each item of metalwork shall be temporarily braced as necessary to resist
all forces which are likely to be applied to it during installation, fixing and building in. Any
bolted connections required as part of the installation operation shall be fitted and tightened
before fixing bolts are tightened or pockets are grouted. The nuts of grouted or resin fixed
bolts shall not be tightened until the grout has fully cured.
Small or lightly loaded items may be fixed using screws and plugs set in drilled holes.
2-11-236 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
11 Site Works
11.1 General
11.1.1 Scope
Site works, as specified hereunder, comprise roads and pavements as well as fencing of
operation compounds and the like.
The site works to be carried out include the supply of all materials, all works required,
disposal of surplus materials and cleaning of the site after the works are completed.
The Contractor may carry out the works or provide materials in accordance to local or other
international standards (ISO, BS, ASTM and others), provided their requirements are
superior or equivalent to the quality described by the standards cited in the Specifications.
Design of Roads
If not otherwise specified in the Contract, roads and pavements shall be laid out to plans
prepared by the Contractor.
Pavement design for roads and hardstand shall be in accordance with the Local Authority
Road Regulations. The design shall be based on a design life of 50 years and traffic volumes
envisaged for operation of the works, unless otherwise specified.
The Contractor shall make his own assessment of the traffic and the sub-grade CBR at the
site and accordingly design the thickness of the road base and surfacing. Carriageway
construction and surfacing to hardstands shall be resistant to diesel and other chemical
spillage.
Design of Footpaths
Hardstands, footpaths and associated drainage shall be laid out to plans prepared by the
Contractor.
Footpaths shall be provided around all buildings and external process tank perimeters.
For frequently used accesses (this applies to all external doors to buildings and to main
access points to external tanks), footpaths shall be by means of minimum 900 wide pathways
formed from either hydraulically pressed pre-cast concrete slabs or interlocking bricks or
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-11-237
blocks. Steps can be provided where appropriate. For the balance of building and process
tank perimeters footpaths shall be by means of minimum 600 mm wide pathways.
Footpaths in verges shall be edged with concrete edging, laid flush with the surfacing.
Footpaths shall be located in such positions as to eliminate the hazard of snow slides from
adjacent roofs or other positive alternative methods shall be taken.
All materials shall be new and shall comply with standard quality and dimension provision.
Bituminous mixes must be blended so as to be suitable for the purpose of application. Special
consideration shall be given to climatic conditions, volume and type of traffic.
The reinstatement of the paved surface shall be done by the Contractor and shall include the
re-excavation of the top surface, base and sub-base, the backfilling of base and sub-base with
graded aggregate and the reinstatement of the surface according to surface conditions met
before.
The formation and sub-grade shall be graded and compacted to the levels, falls, cambers and
densities as required by RSTO 01. The sub-grade shall be so compacted that the dry density
of the upper 15 cm of the ground or fill is not less than 95 % of the maximum dry density
determined by tests in accordance with DIN 18127.
2-11-238 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Where existing ground conditions are such that direct compaction of the sub-grade according
to the specification is impossible unsuitable material shall be removed and replaced with
suitable granular sub-base.
Where the sub-grade is in natural ground, the compaction shall, whenever possible, be
carried out at or near to the natural moisture content of the ground.
The formation shall be kept free of standing water at all times and drains shall be provided so
that it will drain quickly and effectively during rain.
Any irregularities or depressions that develop during compaction of the sub-grade or any area
which becomes muddy, broken-up or loosened due to weather conditions shall be corrected
by loosening the surface of these places and adding, removing or replacing these materials
and re-compacting so that the surface is smooth and uniform.
The materials for the sub-base and road base shall be laid in layers, each not exceeding 15 cm
or being less than 7.5 cm. The total compacted thickness of sub-base and road base shall
nowhere be less than the specified nominal thickness. If not otherwise directed, the sub-base
and base in roads shall have each a thickness of 20 cm, in footpaths a thickness of 15 cm.
The sub-base and road base materials shall be deposited in such a manner that there is no
segregation and the materials require the minimum of blading or spreading. Each layer of
material shall be compacted immediately after spreading in accordance with ZTVE-StB 07.
If any of the sub-grade material is worked into the sub-base material during spreading,
blading or compaction, all the sub-base material in the affected area shall be replaced by
fresh sub-base material at the Contractor’s expense.
On completion of compaction and before commencing the next operation, the surface of the
granular sub-base and road base shall comply with a surface tolerance of +/- 1 cm.
The Contractor shall be responsible for taking all necessary steps to prevent damage to the
previously completed layer or layers by excessive wetting or drying out due to weather
conditions or by traffic or any other cause.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-11-239
In any case, the completed surface of the road base shall be sealed with suitable emulsion
(MC70) at a rate of 1.5-2.0 kg/m² immediately when it has been completed and checked for
compliance with the specified tolerances.
Before laying commences in any area, a tack coat of bitumen road emulsion shall be applied
to the whole area of the preceding course and any other surfaces with which the coat will be
in contact. After cleaning, the top of the base should be sprayed with suitable emulsion
(MC70) at a rate of 1.5-2.0 kg/m²; the surface of the bituminous coat should be treated with
asphalt tack coat (RC250) at a rate of 0.5 kg/m². The emulsion shall be allowed to break
completely before the subsequent bituminous layer is laid on it.
Coated macadam material shall be delivered to site in clean vehicles and shall be protected to
minimize loss of heat in transit and against contamination by dust or other deleterious matter.
The rate of delivery to the site shall be regulated so as to enable the material to be laid with
the minimum of delay and so that the paver can operate continuously.
The coated thickness of individual layers shall be not less than the minimum compacted
thickness specified or shown on the drawings. If not otherwise directed, the bituminous
wearing course shall have a thickness of 10 cm, the asphalt course 5.0 cm.
In case of bituminous roads to be reconstructed, the Contractor has to reinstate all asphalt
courses according to their original thickness.
Concrete for roads and Pavements shall be of class C 30/37. Concrete courses shall be never
less than 100 mm thick.
Transport and placing of the concrete shall be co-ordinated so that the concrete can be
completely placed before setting.
Expansion joints shall be executed at the required intervals and shall enable expansion to the
concrete slabs and be fixed. The expansion joints shall be 20 mm wide. The strength of the
2-11-240 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
concrete and the properties of the concrete surface shall not be influenced by the execution of
joints.
The concrete shall be protected against harmful influences until correct setting, i.e. against
drying out, especially due to sun and wind, against washing out due to rain, against heat or
quick cooling. The concrete surfaces shall be cured and kept moist for 7 days.
11.2.6 Kerbs
Pre-cast concrete kerbs shall comply with DIN 482 and DIN EN 1343 and be laid true to line
and level. Kerbs found to be more than 1 cm out of line or level at either end shall be lifted
and re-laid.
11.2.7 Footpaths
Footpaths shall be surfaced with coated macadam, concrete, pre-cast concrete slabs or natural
stones. The base for footpaths shall be formed from flexible surfacing, laid and compacted to
a minimum thickness of 100 mm using a roller of at least 2 tons mass or similar quality
equipment allowing for equivalent compaction.
Where footpaths receive coated macadam surfaces, the construction shall be as follows:
(1) pre-cast concrete edging in accordance with DIN 482 shall be bedded and backed with in-
situ concrete C16/20;
(2) the base shall be constructed as specified above and shall then be sealed;
(3) the surfacing shall consist of a single course of coated macadam and be compacted to
minimum thickness of 25 mm.
Pre-cast concrete slabs shall be bedded on a layer of sand, approximately 50 mm thick, and
tamped into place.
Natural stones shall be sound, durable, hard and free from undesirable weathering and shall
be of such properties that they will not disintegrate from the action of weather in handling
and placing. The density of stones shall be not less than 2.2 t/m³ (solid volume without
voids). The dimensions of stones shall range between 150 and 200 mm. The stones will be
rough hammered dressed so that they fit reasonably close together. They shall be laid to a
true and even surface on a layer of sand, approximately 100 mm thick and tamped into
place.´
Concrete footpaths shall be surfaced with concrete C 25/30, at least 10 cm thick with mortar
topping, constructed on a prepared bed as specified above. Concrete footpaths shall be
constructed in accordance to the Specification for Concrete Works.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-11-241
The Contractor shall make his own arrangements to dispose off all surplus backfill and
unsuitable excavated material from any part of the Work. The material shall be disposed off-
site and shall become the property of the Contractor who will be entirely responsible for its
removal from the site and its ultimate disposal.
The Contractor shall clean the site and the surrounding ground immediately and leave the
construction sites clean and tidy to the satisfaction of the Employer.
The Contractor shall also refer to the ESHIA Section of these Employer’s Requirements
regarding the disposal of surplus materials.
Glazed vitrified clay pipes and fittings shall conform to DIN EN 295 or equivalent and be
used for diameters up to 300 mm.
Manholes, inspection chambers and gullies shall comply with DIN 4034 or DIN 4052 or
equivalent and be constructed in details shown in the standards. Cast iron covers or gully
gratings shall comply with DIN 19584 or DIN 4052.
Earthworks for piped drainage systems shall be carried out in accordance to the Specification
of Earth Works, applying minimum cover and trench width.
Open channels adjacent to buildings, basins or other structures and channels with
longitudinal slopes steeper than 1:100 shall be constructed with pre-cast concrete or stone
work, depending on soil conditions. Channel sections which are subject to scouring shall be
protected with stone pitching.
Pre-cast concrete channels shall be manufactured of pre-cast concrete class C30/37. All
backfilling shall be with selected material suitable for high quality backfilling. If the soil is
unsuitable for laying of channels, the Contractor shall place a bedding layer of granular
material or concrete C16/20 under the channel.
2-11-242 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
All road crossings of channels shall be constructed such that vehicular traffic is not exposed
to danger. The Contractor shall provide for the installation of pipes and culverts or grating
over the channel.
11.4 Fencing
11.4.1 General
The works comprise the supply and erection of fences and gates both around the perimeter of
the site and internal fencing. Internal fencing shall be of the standard type and fencing around
the perimeter of the site shall be of the security type. Security fences shall be anti-intruder
type.
All items of material for fencing shall be standard products of specialized manufacturers.
Posts and struts shall be either reinforced concrete or galvanized steel sections. Timber posts
shall not be used.
All wire shall be galvanized wire with plastic coating. The length of the sides of the chain
link mesh shall be 50 mm. All chain link fencing shall be barbed along the top edge.
The work pertaining to fencing shall consist of providing all necessary materials and
construction of the fencing including all requisite materials, unloading and storing on site as
well as intermediate handling as required. All earth and concrete work shall be included in
the offer.
All posts and struts shall be anchored in rigid concrete C 16/20 foundations of sufficient
depth. In the vicinity of gates, structures and fence openings, adequate provisions to fix the
fences shall be provided. The distance of the bottom of the wire mesh to the levelled ground
surface shall not exceed 2.5 m.
The posts shall be galvanized inside and outside and plastic coated and closed at the top with
cast zinc alloy caps. End, intermediate, corner and straining posts shall be 1.5 m long, gate
posts 1.5 m long. The distance between the posts shall be 2.5-3.0 m. The posts are to be set in
sufficient C 16/20 concrete foundations.
Corner and end posts shall either be supported by struts as for intermediate straining posts or
by a horizontal bracing. Sufficient straining wires, winding ratchets, joining clamps and other
fittings required shall be provided for all end, corner and gate posts.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-11-243
Three rows of straining wires are to be installed for 1.0 m high fences.
11.4.4 Gates
The tops of the gate frames shall be levelled with the tops of adjacent fencing. Gates in
fencing with barbed wire on extension arms shall also carry wire mounted on extension arms
as specified.
All gates shall be of welded steel construction, galvanized and painted and covered with
plastic coated chain link mesh and surmounted with galvanized plastic coated barbed wire to
match the fencing. Sliding gates shall be provided with roller support tracks.
The gates shall be complete with all fittings such as drop bolts, back catches, locking bars,
lock plates and locks including three keys per lock.
Installation
Fences shall be installed in accordance with the fence manufacturer’s drawings and written
installation instruction, except as modified herein. Each line of fencing shall be erected so
that it is plumb, taut, true to line and grade, and complete in all details. The outside face of
the fabric shall be on the property line where the fence runs along the property boundary.
Posts shall be suitably braced during concreting to ensure that they remain in the correct line
and level during placing of concrete and the concrete shall be cured for 3 days before any
further work is done at the post.
Topsoil shall be evenly spread and trimmed over embankments and filled excavation to the
slopes and levels as shown on drawings. The depth after spreading and trimming shall be 250
mm measured perpendicular to the surface. All clods and lumps shall be broken up and any
rubbish, large stones, roots and weeds shall be removed.
2-11-244 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Where the upper layer of natural soil is poor in organic matter, it shall be improved to a
minimum depth of 25 cm by adding either clay or sand or silt to create a loamy soil texture
consisting of 40 % Sand (size > 0.05 mm), 30 % silt (size 0.05-0.002 mm) and 30 % clay
(size < 0.002 mm).
A shallow ripping will be required before adding clay or sand or silt which should be under
mixed properly by using a disk harrow. If it should be necessary for topographical reasons,
levelling shall be carried out before mixing clay, sand or silt.
11.5.2 Grassing
Where the topsoil shall be sown with grass seed, the top 75 mm of the previously laid topsoil
shall be brought to a fine tilt suitable for seeding, and sowing shall be carried out as soon as
practicable after completion of topsoiling having due regard to the season and the weather
conditions.
After the seed has been sown uniformly, they shall be raked and lightly rolled into the
surface. The young grass shall be kept free from weeds and any bare patches shall be re-
seeded until an even close turf is established. The grass shall be watered, mown and rolled as
required and maintained in good condition until the expiry of the period of maintenance.
The Contractor shall replace, at his own cost, any damaged area where the grass has dried up
or has not adhered to the slope surface, which contains undesirable plants or which has an
irregular or unattractive appearance.
Dressing of topsoil shall only be carried out after watering and raining. The surface of the
soil shall be kept wet until fertilizers have dissolved.
- Removing and storing of boundary stones, bench marks, etc., protection of surveying
points and designation by means of boards, survey and protection of all secondary survey
points, profiles, etc.
- Difficulties to be overcome where excavation may have to be carried out in layers or by
hand.
- Removal of any groynes, buried pipes, wattle-work, fascines and the like that might
interfere with excavation profiles.
- Difficulties resulting from the Specifications relating to fills, compaction tests,
eliminating unsuitable material from fills, and, if necessary, mixing of different soil
materials.
- Transport of excavated material to fill or deposit, placing and spreading in layers
according to conditions and Drawings, and careful compaction if required.
- Difficulties in transport due to existing ground conditions.
- Grading of intermediate and top fill surfaces and slopes to lines and levels required.
- Sorting of excavated material which, if necessary, is to be used for special purposes.
- Any expenditure for providing, maintaining and later removal of drive-ways, maintaining
existing ways and roads; providing, placing, maintaining and later removal of conveying
and dumping equipment that might be required.
2-11-246 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
1 STANDARDS
1.1 General
The Mechanical Works shall comply as a minimum with International Standards ISO, EN or
DIN Standards* named as I.S., with the respective Codes of Practice and Standards generally
used for water supply and waste water facilities in foreign countries, adapted to the local
conditions, shall be used as an alternative subject to written approval by the Project Manager.
For example:
EN: European Standard
DIN: German Industrial Standard
VDE: Standards of the German Electrical engineers’ Society
DWA: Standards of the German Association for the Water, Wastewater and Waste
DVGW: Standards of the German Society for Gas & Water Technology
UVV: German Regulation for Accident Prevention
GUV: Standards of German Judicial Ministry Accident Prevention Society
IEC: International Electrical Commission
ISO: International Organization for Standardization
SI: International System of Units
Contractor shall use machinery and equipment that is supplied with documents indicating
compliance with the EC Machinery Directive. In evidence of this, the CE-marking, or so-
called IIA declaration, is to be presented. Relating documents, such as declarations of
conformity and user information are to be included.
All the equipment and materials provided by the Contractor shall be new, modern, of good
quality, faultless, with long service span and low maintenance.
operation without delay, once he has been informed. If the Contractor fails to recover
operation within 14 days, the Employer reserves the right to dispose by himself. The
expenses shall be compensated by the Contractor with no rejection.
The Employer reserves the right to reject the equipment or components found to be defect or
not conforming to the Contract requirements. The equipment or components shall be repaired
or replaced by the Contractor. The employer shall not afford any additional expenses thereof.
1.4 Materials
All materials incorporated in the Facility shall be the most suitable for the duty concerns and
shall be new and first class commercial quality, free from imperfection and selected for long
life and minimum maintenance.
The use of dissimilar materials in contact is to be avoided, but where unavoidable these
materials shall be selected so that the natural potential difference between the materials does
not exceed 250 millivolts. Electro-plating or other treatment of contacting surfaces shall be
employed as necessary to reduce the potential difference to the desired limit.
All materials and material finishes shall be selected for long life under the climatic conditions
at site. Materials used in ventilated or air-conditioned areas shall be selected to allow for the
conditions expected in case of failure of the ventilation or air-conditioning.
1.5 Finish
All covers, flanges and joints shall be properly faced, bored, fitted, fixed, hollowed, mounted
or chamfered as the case may be, according to the best approved practice and all working
parts of the Facility and other apparatus shall similarly be well and accurately fitted, finished,
fixed and adjusted.
1.6 Patent
The Contractor shall be responsible for all the patent charges and certificate fees on the
equipment and process specified in the Contract and shall protect the Employer from any
damage. All appeals caused by certificate fees, document and patent infringement, or other
law arbitration, lawsuit and expenses caused by the application of equipment and process
shall have nothing to do with the Employer. The payable expenses specified in the Contract
shall be regarded as having included any patent fees, certificate fees and other expenses of
the like.
Welding work on steel structures subjected to static and/or dynamic loads shall be carried out
by welders holding a valid welding certificate according to DIN EN 287-1. On request, the
certificates shall be submitted to the Employer. The valuation for welding seam execution
shall be based on DIN EN ISO 5817, Categories B and C (category B for inside analysis;
category C for outside analysis, for gas lines only category B will be accepted).
The Employers reserve the right to order at the Contractor’s expense the X-ray examination
of up to a maximum of 10 % of all executed welding seams. In case more than 10 % of the
examined welds fail the test, the Employer will order the X-ray examination of a further 30
% of all executed welding seams at the expense of the Contractor. If, again more than 10 %
of the welds fail the tests, the Employer shall order the X-ray inspection of all welds. The
Contractor shall bear all costs involved. The X-ray examination shall be conducted according
to DIN EN 444, DIN EN 462 and DIN EN 1435. Test classification according to DIN EN
ISO 5817.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-251
2 CORROSION PROTECTION
2.1 General
The scope of work comprises the delivery and application of a complete and durable
corrosion protection system. The expected life span is 60 months as a minimum. The
contractor is to deliver an application plan with guarantee from the pains supplier in writing.
This work also includes all required scaffolding and all ancillary means required for the
execution of the Facility. Prior to the corrosion protection works, the installed hardware, non-
ferrous and stainless steel components shall be protected against possible damages.
DIN EN ISO 14919 Thermal spraying - Wires, rods and cords for flame and arc spraying -
Classification; Technical supply conditions (ISO 14919:2001)
DIN EN 13507 Thermal spraying - Pre-treatment of surfaces of metallic parts and
components for thermal spraying
Each base surface shall be checked with regard to the suitability of the follow-up coating and
– if necessary – shall be pre-treated accordingly. The paint supplier’s instructions for the
application of the coatings shall be strictly adhered to.
2.3 Shotblasting
The shotblasting of steel surfaces shall be carried out according to DIN EN ISO 12944-4, de-
rusting grade Sa 2 1/2. Immediately after completion of the shotblasting, the treated surfaces
shall be properly cleaned and the prime coat applied. The Contractor’s production scheduling
should be such that only the absolute necessary shotblasting work has to be executed on site.
2.5 Galvanizing
Preferably hot galvanizing should be employed wherever materials need to be galvanized. If
in certain cases this is not possible the zinc shall be applied by coating.
Surface preparation and superimposed undercoating and coating have to fulfil the
corresponding requirements acc. to DIN EN ISO 12944-5.
If plant and component parts have to be hot dip galvanized or otherwise protected against
corrosion, the technical specifications will give the necessary information.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-253
2.9 Calculation
All costs in connection with the above specified corrosion protection have to be included in
the quoted prices. The top coat has to be applied after assembly of structures on site.
2-3-254 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
3 Steelwork
3.2 Ladders
- The material shall be mild steel and hot-dip galvanized offsite after manufacture
- The stringers shall be
flat section < 65 mm x 13 mm spaced 380 mm apart, flanged and drilled for wall
fixing at both ends
radiuses over the top < 600 mm apart. Ladders > 3.000 mm long have additional
intermediate stays at not more than 2.500 mm center to center
- Rungs shall be 25 mm diameter solid at 300 mm centre to centre shouldered at each end
and securely riveted into countersunk holes. Rungs shall be not less than 225 mm from the
wall
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-255
3.3 Stairways
Design : detailed, fabricated and erected in accordance with the DIN EN
standards
: carry load 500 kg per square meter
: treads shall be open mesh fixed to the stringers, not directly to
concrete
: steel hot-dipped galvanized off site after manufacture and comprises
stringers
supporting stair treads and shall be supplied complete with handrails
and
stanchions
Mounting flanges
Design : horizontal flanges drilled for not less than three bolts with two bolts
on a line parallel to and on the walkway side of the line of the hand
railing and vertical flanges drilled for not less than two bolts the lines
through the bolts being vertical
: stanchions be set at not more than 1500 mm centers
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-4-257
4 SPARE PARTS
4.1 General
The Contractor shall provide a detailed schedule in duplicate of all the spare parts to be
supplied. During commissioning all spare parts shall be checked against the schedule and
against the recommended maintenance programme. Any shortfall in the provision shall be
provided by the Contractor.
All spare parts supplied shall be new, and strictly interchangeable with the parts for which
they are intended to be replacements, and shall be treated and packed for long storage under
the climatic conditions prevailing at the Site. Each spare part shall be clearly marked or
labelled on the outside of its packing with its description and purpose, and when more than
one spare is packed in a single case or other container, a general description of its contents
shall be shown on the outside of such case or container and a detailed list enclosed.
All cases, containers and other packages shall be parked and numbered in a suitable manner
for the purposes of identification.
All cases, containers or other packages are liable to be opened for such examination as
maybe required and packing shall be designed to facilitate opening and thereafter repacking.
Actuators
One set of manufacturer’s complete overhaul kit for each type and size.
Screw Pumps
As for agitators; set of replacement lining.
2-4-258 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Centrifugal Pumps
- one replacement impeller and each type of bearing or bush
- sufficient seals, sealing rings, packing etc. and replacement parts for annual or shorten
service periods for each unit over 2 years.
Electric Motors
One set of bearings and one set of brushes and brush gear (as applicable) for each type and
size
One set means the number of parts installed in each machine and equipment. The Project
Manager will determine the amount to be deducted from the Contract Price in respect of the
Contractor’s failure to deliver all spare parts defined by this clause.
At this time, he shall also deliver two complete sets of labelled keys to the Project Manager
(substantial rings and brass engraved tags) for all the Facility and instrument panel locks
supplied, and any other operating tools necessary to enable the works’ staff to control the
process.
The Contractor shall also supply with the keys one glass fronted timber wall mounted key
hook cabinets with brass hooks and matching engraved and mounted brass labels. The
cabinet shall be mounted in an approved location.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-5-259
The materials must be suitable for all operation conditions. The characters of strength,
ductility and durability shall be taken into consideration when choosing metal materials. The
cast iron material shall be of a tenacious compact texture, with no pores, defects or cracks.
The forge pieces bearing stress shall be fine and even; cast iron, steel and other materials
shall all be in accordance with the requirements in the equipment specifications. All the
materials chosen shall be new and unused.
5.4 Fasteners
The Contractor shall provide all the fasteners for equipment installation, including adjusting
bolts, anchor bolts, nuts and sleeves. The anchor bolts and particularly noted bolts, nuts and
gaskets shall all be stainless steel, and others shall be galvanized steel. DIN standard 267-
series shall be applied.
2-5-260 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
5.7 Lubrication
- Lubrication of mechanical equipment shall be able during continuous operation.
- Lubrication system shall be operated during starting or closing of equipment and shall
avoid waste of lubricant
- The type of lubricant shall be suggested by the manufacturer
- The Contractor shall provide instructions on the lubrication type of equipment and annual
consumption of lubricant, and shall suggest the time of lubrication
5.8 Coupling
Driving motor > 3 kW : driving spindle of driving unit shall be coupled with the
output spindle of the
motor with flexible coupling.
Factors of motor power, rotation speed, driving type and the service coefficient = 1.5.
Corrosion problems arisen from tight connection of different types of metals shall be
avoided.
When it is a must of the contact of different metals, the electrochemical series difference
shall be kept below 250 mV.
(4) Bearings
- Motors < 1.5 kW : pre-lubricated ball bearings
- Horizontal motors > 1.5 kW : antifriction bearings
- Plugs at the inlet and outlet of grease to allow lubrication at any time and discharge of
waste grease without any dismantling
- Each vertical motor shall have rotary drum or rotary ball shaped thrust bearings, which are
enough to bear gravity and the force generated during construction
- Each motor shall have a data plate showing its bearing and lubrication method
- Design of bearings shall be up to the service time of five years (50,000 hours) when the
motor is under 100 % full-load operation
(7) Miscellaneous
Motors
Waterproof and totally-enclosed motors have silicon rubber gaskets between the terminal box
and the wire pipes of the motor
Have anti-corrosive metal components
Shall be painted according to the standard of manufacturers
Fan : anti-corrosion materials
: suitable with rotation in all directions and accurately balanced
: casing shall be of metal(s)
Rotary element : dynamic balance adjustment
: max vibration amplitude < 0.04 mm when rotation speed <
1800 rpm
: < 0.03 mm when the synchronous speed is 3600 rpm.
Motors rating at 50°C ambient temperature, shall be squirrel cage induction type,
=< 15 kW : direct on-line starting
> 15 kW : star-delta starting
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-5-263
All pump motors CMR 10% above calculated CMR 5% above calculated power
power requirements under requirements under all operation
all operation conditions conditions
Blowers and CMR 25% above calculated CMR 12,5% above calculated
compressors power requirements for power requirements for normal
normal duty and 5% above duty and 5% above requirements
requirements for maximum for maximum duty
duty
All other drives CMR 50% above normal CMR 25% above normal duty
duty requirements requirements
Terminal boxes
Provided with glands suitable for PVC insulated wire
Motor steel base : drilled at works vertically below the terminal box gland for
the passage of cables
: edges of the hole slightly countersunk or the hole bushed
All motors over 5,5 kW rating shall have terminal boxes arranged to accept both, the main
cable and the cable for measuring temperature as well as a separate anti-condensation heater
cable
Shall be of suitable dimensions to accept appropriate oversized cables
The mechanical / switch boxes and electrical diving must be carried out according to the
requirements of operating areas. The minimum requirements shall be based on European
Standard Atex 95.
The contractor must prepare drawings and a detailed list to determine the potential explosive
gas area, relevant area class, fire protection class, explosion class, temperature class and
other particular measuring requirements.
Noise levels:
- Facility installed in a separate room/enclosure : < 80 dB(A) outside the room/enclosure.
- Control room : < 55 dB(A).
- Site boundary : < 40 dB(A)
Hazardous warning notices indicating ear defenders are to be worn shall be installed at
entrances to rooms/enclosures where the sound pressure level exceeds 80 dB(A).
Spare Parts
If a component from a certain manufacturer must guarantee uninterrupted operation in any
condition, in this case sufficient spare parts such like motors, etc. must be provided in the
design.
Easy Maintenance
During the design stage, the Contractor must pay special attention to ensure easy
maintenance of machines and equipment as to ensure the realization of quick, easy
inspection, maintenance and repairing.
From the view of safety facilities as ladder, hand rails and platforms have to be provided to
get close safely to machines and equipment for inspection and operation.
Lifting facilities must be provided for the machines over 50 kg. The Contractor must give
thorough considerations to the size and alignment of lifting facilities and lifting holes.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-5-265
Group Operation
Preparations must be made to separate the selected machine from related procedures for
maintenance and repairs.
Installation of Pumps
When pumps and similar equipment are installed into the pipelines, there must be valves.
Expansion joints must be installed on both the suction side and the pressure side.
- All equipment used for indication, alarm and control shall be adequately labelled with
regard to their function, mode and sequence of operation
- Adhesive tape shall not be allowed for labelling
- Each label shall be provided in Arabic and English language
- The labels shall only be manufactured and affixed after checking and approval of the
inscription
2-6-266 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The hydraulic test pressure applied at the manufacturer’s work shall be twice the working
head, or one and a half time the maximum working head, whichever is the greater.
After completion of any fabrication, all pipes shall be hydraulically tested. If any alterations
involving additional fabrication are made after dispatch, a further hydraulic test will be
required on the pipe or piping assembly concerned.
The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that the internal surface of all pipe work is
thoroughly clean before and during erection and before commissioning. Cleaning shall
include removal of all dirt, scale and welding slag due to site welding. Before dispatch from
the contractor’s works the ends of the pipes, branch pipes, etc. shall be suitable capped and
covered to prevent any accumulation of dirt or damage. This protection shall be not removed
until immediately to connecting adjacent pipes or valves.
All small bore pipes shall be blown through with compressed air before connection is made
to instruments and other equipment.
6.2 Piping
The following summary of recommended velocities in pipes.
Terms of delivery : DIN EN 10 312, test certificate DIN EN 10204/3.1 B
Edge preparation for welding : DIN EN ISO 9692-1.
Pipe Bends
Bends : same wall thickness as the joining pipes
: DIN EN 10253, Radius 1.5 *D.
Threaded rods and nuts through two opposite flanges should allow the dismantling piece to
be secured in the position determined during installation, so that the system represents a rigid
connection of two adjoining pipes.
Flexible Coupling
A sufficient number of flexible couplings must be installed in the pipe lines to ensure
uninterrupted operation in case of different settlement.
Pipe Bends
Bends : welded stainless steel pipes to be used
: wall thickness must correspond to those of adjoining pipes
Standard : DIN EN 10253
: Bending radius R = 1.5* D
: DN 250 and above may have R=D + 100 mm
Flange Connections
Dimensions : to be as specified above
Material : flanges, bolts, nuts, washer: stainless steel
: different materials have to be used for bolt and nut, e.g. material
1.4571 and
1.4541
Welding Works
Welders : must possess the welding certificate according to DIN EN 287-1
131/135/141.
Quality of welds : DIN EN ISO 5817, Categories B, and C (category B for inside
analysis; category C
for outside analysis, for gas lines only category B will be accepted)
: avoid the occurrence of annealing colours
: root weld must be protected by inert gas against ingress of oxygen
: ignition spark spots and weld spatter will not be accepted on material
surface
: areas affected by scale / annealing colours must be subjected to
smooth
grinding
: post-treatment from stainless steel surfaces by pickling.
6.12 Labels
Type : engraved identification labels fitted on all valves and items of plant
Information : reference numbers of all valves as indicated on the schematic
diagrams
Warning labels : on all machinery that is operated under automatic control
Language : in English and Arabic
6.13 Guards
Guards : drive mechanisms are covered with adequate guards
: all rotating and reciprocating parts, drive belts, etc. are to be securely
shrouded
: guards are readily removable for gaining access to the Facility
without the need
for first removing or displacing any major item of plant
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-6-271
7 Pumps
Pumps used in the Facility shall be designed to handle raw sewage and sewage sludge and
shall run unattended for long periods. They shall be capable of passing solids up to a sphere
size of 100 mm and shall pass stringy matter, rags, paper and plastics without clogging and
be resistant to abrasive components present in the wastewater.
B: Design
The pumps and motors
Efficiency : overall efficiency > 65 %
: efficiency point close to the most common duty point the pump is
designed for
Speed : low revolving speeds and not more than 1,500 revs/sec
: periodical speed of impeller blades does not exceed 25 m/s at
specified duty
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-7-273
Casings
Design : equipped with exchangeable internal wearing plates in the volute
: allow the withdrawal of impeller and drive end cover assembly
without
disturbing the pump casings
: hand holes close to impeller and near to delivery branch on the volute
: covers to the hand holes are bolted and shaped internally to match the
internal
contours of casings and minimize disturbances of the flow
The impellers
Design : best nickel cast iron, smooth, well finished, free from blow holes and
imperfections, statically and dynamically balanced and of self-
cleaning,
preferably non-shrouded type
: grit, solids and other foreign matter is kept away from the eye and
neck bush
: securely fitted to pump spindles so that they will not be loosened or
detached
when the pump is in operation.
Pump spindles
Design : stainless steel or high tensile steel, fitted with exchangeable stainless
steel,
chrome nickel or bronze sleeves to protect the spindles against wear
over the
distance it passes through the stuffing box
entering into the impeller. Only when not available due to higher
design
capacity, three-passage blades are allowed.
None 6 100
Light 5 75
Medium 4 50
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-7-277
Heavy 3 25
The pump
Mounting : on a single, rigid baseplate preventing distortion under all operating
conditions
: baseplate designed to prevent formation of trapped air pockets during
grouting
as to avoid collection of water and debris when the unit is in service
Casing : suitable for the environmental conditions and the fluid being handled
: suction and discharge connections can be re oriented in 901 steps.
: suction casing provided with access ports to allow clearance of
blockages and
inspection of rotor drive components
Stator : pump stators moulded from high quality resilient synthetic rubber
bonded to an
external steel sleeve to ensure dimensional stability.
: where synthetic rubber is chemically incompatible with the pumped
media, the
Contractor shall select a suitable alternative and state his selection
Pump rotors : corrosion resistant material with a hard plated coating or abrasion
resistant,
hardened tool steel
Transmission system : purpose designed shaft solidly connected to the pump rotor and to the
input
drive shaft
: or shaft jointed to the pump rotor and the input drive shaft via 'sealed
for life',
lubricated pin joints
Access to drive assembly : afforded without the need to disassemble the pump casing
Lifting points : clearly identified on the equipment and located to give a balanced,
safe lift
Protection : ump sets are provided with mechanical and electronic over pressure
and
electronic dry running protection
: rotating clockwise, seen from the upper bearing to the lower bearing
: end-plates welded to the screw pump tube thus making a watertight
and
gastight screw pump body, also when the bearing flanges are not
mounted
: end-plates have recesses for the stub shaft connections
: after the end-plates, the blades are welded to the tube
: welds have to be accomplished manually by certified welders
Blades : outer edge shall be machined for adjusting the right dimension and
creating a
true cylindrical shape
Tension : deflection, bending moment and welding tension of the screw pump
shall be
minimized. The actual tensions have to be ascertained
Upper bearing
Type : a spherical roller bearing
: or, for large screw pumps, a combination of a spherical roller and a
spherical
roller thrust bearing
: cast iron housing shall be supported by a heavy cast support flange
: unit meets the radial and axial forces of the operating screw pump
Bearing life : min. 100.000 hrs. (ISO B 10)
Seal : special lip seals with stainless steel spring
Lubrication : grease, manual, intermittent
Lower bearing
Type : 3D-self-aligning, absorbs the radial forces whilst permitting axial
expansion of
the screw pump body due to ambient temperature changes
: enclosed cast iron housing containing 2 single-row tapered roller
Seal : 3 special cargo-seals, warranting an optimum seal at relatively high-
pressure,
extreme temperature, high rpm and in corrosive, abrasive or
aggressive media
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-7-279
: at the position of the seals the shaft surface is provided with a grinded
ceramic
layer
Lubrication : lubricated for lifetime (minimum lifetime 100.000 hours) with a
special
monograde oil.
Side rail
Type : removable lateral steel guide plates, wall thickness of min. 3 mm
Contractor has to submit design documentation proving that type and make of the pump is
suitable to handle the chemical that is to be dosed.
Specifications of the pumps will not be less than specified for the various types of pumps
specified above.
2-8-280 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Mechanical requirements
Flow velocity : between bars 1.2 m/s
Bar distance : max 25 mm for coarse screens and 3 mm for fine screens
Cleaning : automatically cleaned based on
. differential water level measurement before and after the screens
. time setting
. continuous under rain weather flow conditions
Safeguards : automatic opening of by-pass when high-high water level is detected
:
General : stainless steel piping
: all materials used resistant to corrosive atmosphere
: grit removal as continuous operation
: access bridge required
: automatic greasing installation
: overflow weir stainless steel 316 thickness 3 mm as minimum
: overflow weir adjustable after installation
2-9-282 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Compressors shall be sized for the variations in atmospheric pressure, temperature and
relative humidity stated below:
Standard Conditions
Air Temperature 15 °C
Relative Humidity 0% 80 %
9.2 Diffusers
General
Diffusers shall be made from porous material fully covered with rubber membranes and shall
have a proven record of successful and efficient operation in a wastewater treatment plant.
Diffusers shall be disc or plate membrane type, made of EPDM/poly-urethane based rubbers.
No ceramic disc diffuser shall be used.
Materials of Construction:
supports : SS 316L
expansion joints : SS 316L
all welded parts : SS 316L
submerged air manifolds : SS 316L
drop pipes : SS 316L
2-9-284 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Pipework Installation
Pipes : from the blower station and headers for aeration tanks preferably be
installed
above ground with a condensate release device fitted at the lowest
accessible
point of the main pipe
: designed and installed to accommodate thermal expansions
Levelling : pipework and diffusers shall be "levelled" to ensure even air
distribution
Water release : water release pipes be installed at appropriate points from each
diffuser section
to enable entrapped water to be blown from the air pipework
: each release pipe shall terminate in a valve at a point easily accessible
from a
walkway
Frictional Losses
Frictional losses : to be minimised by keeping cross sectional changes and directional
changes to
A minimum and by use of large radius bends
: use of valves shall be the minimum
: pipework, including all valves, diffusers and restrictions, be designed
so that the duty point discharge pressure head of each blower does not
exceed Static Head (Water Depth above Diff users) + 100 mbar
: this shall be measured at maximum design air flow with all control
valves fully
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-9-285
Flow measuring : Suitable tapings and air flow measuring devices installed on each
zone of each aeration lane
: devices shall be complete with any necessary interface equipment for
connecting to portable flow indicating instruments
: contractor shall supply two sets of indicating instruments and will, in
addition, install a permanent flow measuring device in the main pipe
from the blower station
9.3 Mixers
General
Mixers will be used to prevent sedimentation in activated sludge basins and other tanks and
compartments of the HRWWT that are not designed for sedimentation. Contractor will
present calculations in his tender demonstrating that the offered equipment transfers enough
energy to prevent sedimentation.
Equipment
Mixer : all materials of stainless steel 316
: oil chamber equipped with detection ‘water in oil’
: suitable for wastewater and resistant against components that are
normally present in wastewater
Motor : protection IP 68
: isolation class F
: continuous operation
: IEC-34 and IEC-72
: nominal power at least 10% higher than maximum needed axis power
: cables are oil and grease resistant
Hoisting : chain stainless steel 316, hoisting ring (hoisting clip) and steel string
(stainless steel 316) for each mixer
: hoisting ring shall be threaded by steel rings
: all components are able to bear the total weight of mixer and motor
Guiding bars : installed on the anchor base on the bottom of the tank
: bar, its supports and other fasteners stainless steel 316
: arrangement of the guide bar allows steady conveyance of the mixer
2-9-286 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-10-287
General Description
Scraper : rotating, half bridge type, up to and including 55 m diameter
Bridge: D=< 40 m : extends > 1000 mm beyond the centreline of the centre bearing
D>40 m : extends 5m beyond the centreline of the centre bearing
: driven at the periphery of the tank and rotate in a clockwise direction
looking
on the plan
: sufficient traction at all times, including snow, ice, high winds and
the sludge
loading of 200 kg/m² of blade
: Speed at the tank periphery in a range of 72 to 144 m/h, according to
ATV
regulations and calculated for the complete sludge removal
Clamps, fixings and pins : stainless steel to 1.4571 minimum Grade A4.
Loads and deflection : design to accommodate the following loads and maximum deflections
in addition to its self weight and ancillary equipment
- Imposed loading via flooring : 3.0 kN/m²
- Wind loading on structure : 1.4 kN/m²
- Sludge loading on blades : 200 kg/m² of blade
- Maximum deflection of beams : 1/250th of part
: internal cross bracing shall be provided to stiffen the structure
Walkway : 700mm minimum clear width between hand railing
: from tank periphery to the inner end of the bridge.
Flooring : > 900mm either side of the slip ring collector
: > 6 mm thick galvanised steel,
: floor plating with raised, self-draining non slip tread pattern and the
top surface
finished flush with the top surface of the open grid flooring
: sectional and removable, panel length < 1,000 mm
: panels individually secured, abutting ends of each panel suitably
fixed together,
< 10 mm gap.
Access : permanent ladder fixed to the bridge suitably positioned to avoid
creating trap
points with any projecting structures and ground level pathways <
300 mm
2-10-288 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Central Bearing
Comprises : grease fed slewing ring bearing (ball or roller type) allowing
rotational
movement
: stainless steel axle supported in self lubricating plain bush bearings
allowing the
bridge to pivot in the vertical plane
Bearings : withstand the deflection of the bridge
: are fully sealed against the ingress of dust, moisture etc
: minimum design life of 100,000 hours
: bearing support plate be bolted to the tripod top plate. Fixing holes be
slotted
at 90° to those in the tripod, to give at least + 25mm universal
adjustment for
centralising the bearing assembly
being support plates > 250 mm high x 6mm thick, with a 90° returned
top edge
backing strip > 40 mm wide x 6mm thick flexible blade high quality,
wear
resistant rubber or polyurethane specially compounded to resist wear
and
damage, > 150 mm wide x 20 mm thick with 55 mm protruding
below the
bottom edge of the support plate
: fixing holes along the centre of the flexible blade so that it may be
inverted to
extend its working life
: materials for the blades and the mechanism: stainless steel or
galvanised steel,
but only one material shall be used
Supports : series of vertical rigid tubes extending to trailing arms
: trailing arms shall incline downwards at an angle not exceeding 30°
to the
horizontal
: all tubular members of the scraper support system shall be capped
Scum removal : automatically via a rotary tube actuated by a bridge mounted cam
which
partially rotates the tube, enabling scum and top water to gravity
discharge
through an orifice in the tube
: orifice shall be returned to top dead centre, before being dipped for a
second
time to collect carriage water
: system allows a full range of adjustment to immersion depths and
dwell periods
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-10-291
General : The equipment for the SBR shall include influent distribution,
aeration, mixing, decanting, sludge extraction, scum removal,
instrumentation and process control facilities suited for a well
functioning SBR operation capable of providing all stages required –
fill, react, settle, decant, sludge removal and idle.
Influent distribution : prevents hydraulic short circuiting between the influent and effluent
outlets
: allows for rapid mixing of the influent with the mixed liquor
: prevents odour emission
Mixing equipment : the mixing system shall be designed to allow the development of
perfect mixing conditions inside the reactor. The time required for
development of perfect mixing conditions inside the reactor from the
start of operation of the aeration/mixing system shall not exceed 5
minutes.
The difference between the concentration of the suspended solids at
any two sampling points inside the reactor under conditions of
aeration/mixing shall not exceed 10% under varying conditions.
Blowers : the SBR package will include blowers that are suitable for
intermittent (batch) operation and variable water levels operation of
the SBR system.
: will be in accordance to the Blower specification
Foam/scum removal : automatic foam removal that allows for foam and scum removal
: easy access for maintenance
Sludge removal : for automatic sludge removal from the SBR from either the react or
after decant stages.
Shall be installed for easy access for operation and maintenance
Process control : Fully automatically control process that integrates all the process
controls with operator interface that can operate the system either
completely automatic or manual via switches (in emergency
situations).
: allows for both time and flow based process programs
: allows for blower control both by timer and DO in reactor
: allows for complete parameter adjustment for process optimization
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-11-293
Construction : complete package unit operating on a continuous belt press and all
ancillary
equipment
: constructed for least 20 years of full operational life with the
minimum of
maintenance
: all components shall be capable of renovation during overhaul
: electrical control equipment installed in a dry environment suitably
protected
from the belt operating conditions
Operating conditions : maximum allowable PE dosage is 5g active PE/kg DS
: only 40 hours a week (5 consecutive days 8 hours)
: TSS in the supernatant will be no more than 500 mg/l
Main Provisions
Loading : hydraulic loading of sludge (m3/m/h): < 40
: dry solids capacity per m belt width: < 350 kg/hr
Diameter : rollers (mm): > 240
: rollers pin for bearings (mm): > 45
Lifetime : rollers (h): > 100.000
: roller bearings (h): > 50.000
: belt (h) : > 8.000
: bearings (L10h according to ISO; h): > 50.000
Belt filter : two continuous weaves high strength polyester of the split type
: constant filter tension, irrespective of sludge loading to be provided,
accommodating an increase in belt length of at least 3 per cent
: automatic belt alignment within inner band limits achieved by means
of sensing
devices
: automatic belt breakage and ‘out of band’ limit lateral movement
with suitable
signals provided
: ploughs and other suitable mechanisms for sludge distribution to be
included
: even sludge distribution over full width of belt required
: high pressure belt washing system required to adequately clean belt
and
prevent blinding
: removable nozzles to allow simple cleaning
: aerosol emissions from belt washing system is not allowed
Provisions : pre thickening drum (dynamic flocculation)
: air compressor (if required)
: cake scraping doctor blade
: safety cut-out devices for safety purposes
Materials: : rollers from stainless steel AISI 316 or rubber covered carbon steel
: frame hot spray metallisation and epoxy painted
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-11-295
Mechanical Requirements
Mixing : per unit a suitable vessel (covering) and agitator to promote
flocculation
: mixing arrangement ensures uniform agitation and no short-circuiting
: mixing tank enables sludge and polyelectrolyte to develop a good floc
: sludge from the flocculation/conditioning tank shall be conveyed on
to the filter
belt in a manner to avoid excessive turbulence and consequent floc
break up
Pipe work : steel pipe firmly fixed to the structural frame of the belt thickener
: suitable access for removal of blockages
Enclosure : if belt thickener is enclosed, suitable provision for visual checking
during
operation
: transparent panels shall not discolour with age
: suitable access for adjustment and maintenance of equipment
Polymer Trials
Where thickening is to be achieved by polymer dosing to the sludge the Contractor shall
complete evaluation trials during the tests before completion to establish the most cost
effective polymer.
The contractor shall provide all equipment and consumables (including polymer) necessary
to undertake the trials.
Main Provisions
Diameter : rollers (mm): > 240
: rollers pin for bearings (mm): > 45
Lifetime : rollers (h): > 100.000
: roller bearings (h): > 50.000
: belt (h) : > 8.000
: bearings (L10h according to ISO; h): > 50.000
: belt (h): > 8,000
: bearings (L10h according to ISO; h): > 50,000
Belt filter : two continuous weaves high strength polyester of the split type
: constant filter tension, irrespective of sludge loading to be provided,
accommodating an increase in belt length of at least 3 per cent
: automatic belt alignment within inner band limits achieved by means
of sensing
devices
: automatic belt breakage and ‘out of band’ limit lateral movement
with suitable
signals provided
: ploughs and other suitable mechanisms for sludge distribution to be
included
: even sludge distribution over full width of belt required
: high pressure belt washing system required to adequately clean belt
and
prevent blinding
: removable nozzles to allow simple cleaning
: aerosol emissions from belt washing system is not allowed
Provisions : pre thickening drum (dynamic flocculation)
: air compressor (if required)
: cake scraping doctor blade
: safety cut-out devices for safety purposes
Materials: : rollers from stainless steel AISI 316 or rubber covered carbon steel
: frame hot spray metallisation and epoxy painted
: belt of polyester fabric with clipper seam
Mechanical Requirements
Mixing : per unit a suitable vessel (covering) and agitator to promote
flocculation
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-11-297
Polymer Trials
Where thickening is to be achieved by polymer dosing to the sludge the Contractor shall
complete evaluation trials during the tests before completion to establish the most cost
effective polymer.
Mechanical
Decanter : rated speed bowl (rpm): at least 3000
: differential speed bowl / conveyor (rpm):to be adjustable between 0
to +/- 30
: speed control, hydraulic drive or planetary gear with eddy current
brake motor
or cyclo gear box + 2 frequency inverters or direct drive in
conjunction with a
planetary gear box
: lifetime bowl (h): > 40.000
: lifetimescroll (h): > 20,000
: casing; upper part removable
: lower part with discharge funnels for centrate and sludge cake
Bearings : ball- and/or roller bearings
: lifetime (L10h according to ISO, h): 100.000
: lubrication, oil (compact unit oil pump with oil tank), alternatively
can offer
grease pack lubrication
Provisions : vibration monitor / switch
: inlet and outlet flexible connections
vibration dumpers
Materials : centrifuge bowl from stainless steel AISI 316, with welded strips of
hard-wearing
metal
: scroll from stainless steel AISI 316
: scroll flights, replaceable wearing tips made of tungsten carbide alloy
or
tungsten carbide tiles
: discharge funnel from stainless steel AISI 316
: cover from stainless steel AISI 316
: support frame / platform / ladder from St 37-2
Drive unit
Principle : Electric motor, fluid coupling and multi V-belts, mounted on a base
plate as a
drive unit. Alternatively when using a variable frequency drive for
main motor
Electric motor: : power supply (V/Hz): 3 x 400 / 50
: rated speed (rpm): 1500
: starting method: variable frequency drive
: continuous operation
: life time bearings (L10h according to ISO, h): more than 100.000
: lubrication, grease (for lifetime)
: insulation class F (temperature rise as for class B)
: protection class IP55
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-11-299
Polymer Trials
Where thickening is to be achieved by polymer dosing to the sludge the Contractor shall
complete evaluation trials during the tests before completion to establish the most cost
effective polymer.
The contractor shall provide all equipment and consumables (including polymer) necessary
to undertake the trials.
11.5 Conveyor
General
Dewatered sludge is to be conveyed into containers in which the dried sludge will be trucked
away. Water leaking during conveyance is to be collected and diverted to sewer network.
Automatic loading of containers.
Conveyor
Type : screw or belt conveyor
Medium : dewatered sludge
: specific design weight 1100 kg/m³
: dry solids 18 - 28 % weight
Make : all materials stainless steel 316, minimum 6 mm thick
: protection class IP 54
: IEC-34 and IEC72
: screw: maximum of 35 rpm, reversible direction
2-12-300 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
12 Sludge digestion
Mechanical requirements
Availability : all components shall be capable of renovation during overhaul and all
replaceable components shall be readily available
Mixer in the digester : shall suitable for operation in a digester
: stator casing, mixer and mixer shaft shall be made from stainless steel
: removable out of the digester in parts by a mobile crane
Mechanical requirements
Biogas :
: gas storage tank is equipped with an internal rubber balloon, dual
membrane
: gas pressure shall be reached by means of weights on the internal gas
balloon
: gas balloon shall be equipped with the following safeties:
. under pressure
. overpressure
. detection-instrumentation
. automated valves
: biogas supply and biogas take-off pipes shall be equipped with drains
: biogas shall be burned in cogeneration-units or in the sludge heating
boiler
(back-service of the gas motors)
Safety : safety zone around the gas storage tank shall be at least 7 m
: gas storage tank shall be located and installed according to the
European
Guideline Atex 137. The instrumentation and the auxillary equipment
will be
installed according to the European Guideline Atex 95
: includes pressure/vacuum relief valves, leak detection systems, flame
arrestors,
flame traps etc.
Gas storage : gas storage tank is constructed from stainless steel AISI 316 L
: rubber membrane of the balloon shall be internally guided with a
wooden guide
bars to protect the membrane against wear and sticking
: membrane is made of resistant rubber, which shall have a proven
record of
successful and efficient operation in a wastewater treatment plant.
12.3 Flare
General requirements
Flare : capable of conserving the daily differences in the gas flow production
: capacity sufficient to burn full actual gas production
: constructed to give at least 20 years of operational life with the
minimum of
maintenance
: all components shall be capable of renovation during overhaul
making
2-12-302 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Fuel
Biogas : gas motors-units generate thermal power and electrical power from
biogas
: installations are resistant against 1000 ppm H2S for 10 years
Safety : cogeneration units shall be located and installed according to the
European
Guideline Atex 137
: instrumentation and the auxiliary equipment will be installed
according to the
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-12-303
Requirements
Gas motor : runs in part load from 60% – 100%
Equipment (not limited) : gas motor
: generator
: gear
: automatic controlling valves, condense valves, valves, gas filters, and
instrumentation for biogas, valves
: intercooler
: gas motor heat exchanger (or gas motor cooler)
: stack heat exchanger
: stack with dampers
: controlling system: temperature control (low-off), temperature
control (high-
low), maximum temperature control, automatic switch (on/off),
temperature
gauges, pressure gauges
Heat exchange : outlet temperature of the water shall be 70 °C and the inlet shall be 50
°C. The
gas motor shall have a independent water system for heat distribution:
.drains
. filters and valves for air-outlet and filth-outlet
. expansion vessel
. controlling valves
. blocking valves
. circulation pumps
. feeding pumps
. emergency cooling pumps
. heat exchanger
. effluent pumps
. isolation
maintenance.
Fuel
Fuel : biogas or liquid fuel shall be burned in the boiler
Safety : sludge heating boiler shall be located and installed according to the
European
Guideline Atex 137
: instrumentation and the auxiliary equipment will be installed
according to the
European Guideline Atex 95
Equipment (not limited) : automatic switch of fuel
gas dryer for biogas
: ventilation system to prevent explosion in case of gas leakage
Requirements
Boiler : overpressure boiler, standard equipped
: temperature control (low-off)
: temperature control (high-low)
: maximum temperature control
: automatic switch (on/off)
: temperature gauges
: pressure gauges
: weather dependent controlling devices
: range of power from 25% – 100%
: outlet temperature of the water 70 °C and the inlet 50 °C
: independent water system for heat distribution
: following equipment: drains filters and valves for air-outlet and filth-
outlet,
expansion vessel, controlling valves, blocking valves, circulation
pumps, feeding
pumps, emergency cooling pumps, isolation, pipe-work
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-13-305
The specifications in this section apply to all equipment, materials and parts that are to be
implemented in the HRWWTP.
Equipment, materials or parts may that are not specifically described and/or detailed in this
section may be used as well. In that case, the high standards, quality definitions and design
principles defined in these specifications will be effective as if the equipment, materials or
parts were described in this section. The client can refuse design solutions that do not meet
these standards, quality definitions and design principles.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-14-307
1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
1.1 General
The specification of electrical equipment defines supplies and services and all extra work
required for the plant ready for automatic operation, even if it should not be listed or
specified in detail.
The total electrical engineering is to be based on the relevant data of the offered mechanical
equipment and respect temperatures, altitudes and sudden variations of load and voltage as
may be encountered at site. The requirements for continuous operation during prolonged
periods with a minimum of maintenance have also to be considered. The design has further to
incorporate every reasonable precaution and provision for the safety of all those concerned in
the operation and maintenance of the plant.
The equipment and materials are to be new, of sound workmanship and robust design, and of
grade and quality, suitable for the climatic conditions at the site.
The lettering is to be done in two languages that means English and Arabic.
The contractor has to provide free of charge all spare parts required for the first year of
operation. For the purpose of a simplified stocking of spare parts, uniform devices of one
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-14-309
manufacturer are always to be used for similar tasks. The number of manufactures coming up
for use is to be reduced to a minimum.
The equipment parts have to leave the supplier’s works carefully cleaned up and preserved
especially as regards the inside. All openings have to be closed up in such a way that no
contaminations of the inside are possible during the transportation and the assembly till the
connection.
The assembly of the electrical equipment has to depend on the construction progress.
Normally, it is not practicable in one step so that interruptions during the assembly have to be
considered. The structural measure can be divided into stages which will be realized at
different times. These requirements are to be met without additional costs.
Upon the end of assembly, all terminals and screwed connections have to be tightened once
again and the corrosion protection and the coating have to be subsequently improved, if
necessary.
The nominal low voltage of 400/230 V will be provided by an integrated compact substation
with transformer, medium voltage switchgear and metering. According to the power factor
the instructions of the power distribution company should be followed, if the power
distribution company has no requirements the PF should be minimal 0,92.
In order to meet a high security of supply even in case of power supply interruptions, an
emergency generator will be permanently installed.
Highest priority is to be given to the safe working and supply conditions when designing and
dimensioning the equipment.
General
The contractor calculates the equipment, determines the necessary space required and
coordinates the structural conditions with the other buildings that will be erected. In view to
the local climatic and environmental conditions, appropriate measures have to be met for
cooling and protection against dust of the equipment.
First of all, the contractor will design and calculate the entire supply services (inclusive the
incoming-feeder and cable) according to the fixed requirements. On the basis of this design,
the final co-ordinations are to be done with the Project Manager, the principal and the local
energy supplier IDEC.
2-14-310 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The operation and control of the equipment shall be effected a) via local control units, b) via
manual control elements on the door of the switchgear cabinet or c) by automatic control by a
PLC/SPC System. The reporting and archiving are made by a SCADA System and additional
by printing recorder with a data logger on board. The following structure has to be set up for
each equipment, even if the equipment will be controlled by a sub-distribution switchgear of
the manufacturer. The reports will include but not limited to:
a. Daily flows with max and min hourly flows;
b. Operation hours of critical process components;
c. Energy consumption of headworks, primary clarifiers, biological treatment, pumps,
secondary clarifiers, thickeners, digesters, dewatering;
d. Alarms and warnings;
e. Water quality measurements – DO, pH, EC temperature, etc. This will provide the
average daily the maximum daily and the amount of time that the reading was not in
compliance during the day.
1.4 Documentation
In the course of the detailed planning, the contractor satisfies himself about the designed
process structure and accepts the development of all shop drawings on his own responsibility.
The contractor has to prepare and to submit for verification the following documents:
1 Directory of all drawings and further documents
2 Layout (schematic layout, block diagrams, single-line representations )
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-14-311
The complete documentation is to be set up in two languages, i.e. in English and Arabic. A
table of contents with a tabulation of all single drawings, sheet number, drawing numbers and
so forth has to be set up. All drawings have to be provided with a common numbering system
according to DIN 40719, part 2, or DIN 6779, part 1, under inclusion of all individual
devices, building parts, etc.
Furthermore, all drawings are to be delivered on data carriers. Here, current formats have to
be used (DXF-format, Excel, Word, etc.).
The preparation of the documentation has exclusively to be done according to the respective
DIN-standard (item designation, graphical symbols, terminal diagrams, etc.).
If necessary, all records are to be folded in DIN-A-4 format and handed over in appropriate
files.
Depending on their size, the originals have to be made available in wrappers, drawing rolls
and so forth.
Complete list of components, which will be delivered under this contract, belongs to the
documentation. The listing is done on DIN-A-4 lists with item designation, the electrical
drawings, manufacturers, type designation, manufacturer or product number as well as an
indication about wear and durability. A complete maintenance list is to be set up.
Functional and automation descriptions and charts are to be submitted in duplicate for the
start-up. The complete operation under manual and automatic control, the functional
connections and the instructions for fault location have to be presented in this document.
2-14-312 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
In case of outside cabling, site drawings of cable lines and the reserve conduit system are to
be set up.
In case, no relevant proposals will be made on behalf of the contractor, the standards
mentioned in the specification are valid. In addition, the following standards have to be
considered:
The total plant and all devices belonging to the scope of service have to correspond at least to
the interference suppression level “N”. Here, the standards DIN 57874 and 57875 as well as
VDE 0874 and 0875 are valid.
The contractor will certify that all electrical equipment’s, operating materials and the
electrical installation meet the relevant standards and local provisions.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-313
2.2.1 General
The equipment shall be designed for operation from the front, except where necessary for the
isolation of voltage transformers where rear access is required. The package unit / M.V
switchgear should include Metering panel in addition to the incoming and transformer
panels. The LV switchboards should be separated from the MV room/ building.
Materials
Enclosures shall be constructed of folded and welded sheet steel.
Suitably insulated bus bars and earth bars shall be of high-conductivity, hard drawn copper,
and all other main current carrying components shall be of solid copper.
Mounting
The equipment shall be freestanding floor mounted, with the exception of ring main units,
which may be transformer mounted. Fixing shall be by not less than four holding down bolts
for each unit.
Working space
Clear floor space of not less than 1.000mm shall be provided all round the equipment after
allowing for withdrawal of component parts and projecting operating handles. It shall be
possible to close any cover after withdrawal of a truck-mounted breaker in its line of
withdrawal.
Earth connections
Each switchboard shall be equipped with a suitably rated earth bar along its full length with
provision for bonding to the site cables, and a main earth terminal. Ring main units shall be
2-2-314 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
equipped with a main earth terminal and provision for bonding to site cables. The integral
earthing system for each unit shall be solidly connected to the earth bar of terminal. Bolted
connections shall be tinned.
Ambient conditions
Unless otherwise specified the assembly and all equipment provided shall be capable of
satisfactory operation within the temperature limits of -10˚C to 40˚C and relative humidity of
80 %.
Training
The contractor shall provide training in the operation of MV Switchgear and Control Gear in
the manufacturers works. Further training shall be provided on site.
2.2.3 Arrangement
MV switchboards and motor control gear shall comprise either a single unit or a suite of such
units. Each unit shall be cubicle type, single bus bar, with vertical or horizontal isolation.
Extension
It shall be possible to extend the board safely by installing additional units at either end, and
cabling up with existing units live except when making the bus-bar connections.
2.2.6 Interlocks
Comprehensive mechanical and electrical interlocks shall be provided to prevent any mal-
operation.
Circuit breakers shall be capable of clearing any fault condition with may occur in the system
without damage to equipment or personnel.
Circuit breakers shall be of the vertical isolation, horizontal draw-out pattern, complete with
carriage earthing contact. The isolating contacts shall comprise an appropriate number of
individually spring loaded fingers.
Vacuum circuit breakers shall comprise separate vacuum interrupters that are designed to
prevent welding of contacts and sharp current chopping during fault interruption and
switching of motor loads.
Sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) circuit breakers shall comprise separate vacuum interrupters that
are designed to prevent welding of contacts and sharp current chopping during fault
interruption and switching of motor loads.
Operating mechanisms shall be as detailed in the Particular Specifications and selected from
the following:
- independent manual spring;
- hand charged spring with manual release;
- motor charged spring with electrical release.
All operating mechanisms shall have mechanical ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ indicators in Arabic
language and a manual trip device fitted with means for locking. Hand charged and motor
charged spring mechanisms should have mechanical indicators to show ‘SPRING
CHARGED’ and ‘SPRING DISCHARGED’ in the Arabic language.
Operating mechanisms of the hand charged and motor charged spring types shall be arranged
so that release of the springs to close the circuit breaker can only be achieved by a deliberate
action. It shall not be possible for vibration or mechanical shocks to release the charged
springs. Motor spring mechanisms shall be arranged so that charging is initiated
automatically following a discharge. The necessary limit stops and switches for the automatic
control of the charge, once initiated, shall form an integral part of the mechanism. It shall be
possible to hand charge a motor charged spring mechanism.
2-2-316 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Spring operated mechanisms shall be provided with volt-free contacts to give indication that
the springs are charged.
The closing solenoids of dc solenoid operated mechanisms shall be suitable for operation at a
minimum of 80 % of the nominal supply voltage. They shall not mal-operate or cause
excessive vibration when energised at the voltage rate, or when energised from a full wave
rectified source designed for multiple simultaneous operation. Unless otherwise agreed, this
higher voltage shall be taken as 120 % of the nominal supply voltage.
Voltage transformers shall be protected by HRC primary fuses, and by secondary fuses in
each relay and metering circuit. The secondary circuits shall be kept as short as possible, and
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-317
separate leads used to connect the transformer to each relay and metering burden. A means of
isolation of the primary shall be included and lockable safety shutters shall cover the fixed
isolating contacts when the transformer is isolated.
Protective relays
Protective relays for circuit breakers shall, unless otherwise specified, be of the electronic
type installed in draw-out cases mounted in an instrument cabinet above the circuit breaker
on the front of the panel.
Over current and Earth Fault Protection shall be provided on all circuits.
The protection shall be inverse, extremely inverse, definite time, instantaneous, directional or
non-directional as appropriate to the circuit or circuits being protected. Discrimination must
be provided with the REC´s protection, for all types of fault. The discrimination shall extend
to all points on the system down to the final sub-circuit.
Type
Motor control gear shall be of the vacuum interrupter type, arranged for direct on line starting
of the motors specified.
Isolation
Off-load isolation shall be provided such that it operates only when the carriage is fully home
or completely withdrawn, and with the contactor open.
Co-ordination
The main fuses, contactor, overload protection and all other components shall be fully co-
ordinated so that no damage or change to the starter’s characteristics shall occur under any
fault conditions.
Additional protection
The following additional protection shall be provided when specified in the pump
Specifications:
- Bearing Temperature Protection. This shall comprise temperature detectors suitably
located to detect an over-temperature in any of the pump or motor bearings. The over-
temperature device(s) shall operate into mechanically latched flag relays. Once operated,
the drive must stop and must not restart until the relay has been reset.
- Water Cooled Motor Protection. Water-cooled motors shall include protection appropriate
to the type of installation. All water-cooled motors shall have Loss of Cooling Water Flow
protection. This shall comprise a flow switch (or switches) and a mechanically latched
flag relay to detect loss of flow of cooling water. Once operated, the drive must stop and
must not restart until the relay has been reset. Closed air circuit water-cooled motors shall,
in addition, have a sensor to detect loss of water into the closed air circuit. The sensor
shall operate in conjunction with a mechanically latched flag relay. Once operated, the
drive must stop and must not restart until the relay has been reset.
- Motor Over-temperature Protection. Over-temperature Protection shall comprise
thermistors in the motor and a thermistor relay in the starter. The thermistor relay shall
operate in conjunction with a mechanically latched flag relay. Once operated, the drive
must stop and must not restart until the relay has been reset.
- Pump Over-temperature Protection. Pump Over-temperature Protection shall comprise a
temperature sensor in the pump casing. This shall operate in conjunction with a
mechanically latched flag relay. Once operated, the drive must stop and must not restart
until the relay has been reset.
- Pump Low Flow Protection. Pump Low Flow Protection may be provided instead of
Pump Over-temperature Protection. This shall comprise a flow switch/sensor in the pump
delivery. This shall operate in conjunction with a mechanically latched flag relay. Once
operated, the drive must stop and must not restart until the relay has been reset.
- Pump Low Suction Protection. Pump Low Suction Protection shall comprise a pressure
gauge, with electrical contacts that open at low pressure, fitted in the suction main to each
pump. This shall operate in conjunction with a mechanically latched flag relay. A timer
relay (0 to 30 seconds) shall be provided to enable the protection to be time delayed
during starting and instantaneous during running. Once the protection has operated, the
drive must stop and must not restart until the relay has been reset.
- Pump High Delivery Protection. Pump High Delivery Protection shall comprise a pressure
gauge, with electrical contacts that open at high pressure, fitted in the delivery main from
each pump. This shall operate in conjunction with a mechanically latched flag relay. Two
timer relays shall be provided. One timer (0 to 10 minutes) shall prevent the protection
operating during starting. The other timer (0 to 30 seconds) shall delay the protection
operating during running so as to protect against nuisance tripping due to transients. Once
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-319
the protection has operated, the drive must stop and must not restart until the relay has
been reset.
Control transformer
A double wound single-phase transformer with an earthed metal screen between the windings
shall be included in each unit to provide 230 volts control supplies. Primary and secondary
HRC fuses shall be included, together with a neutral link, the neutral side of the secondary
being earthed
Insulating medium
The ring main units shall be filled with sulphur hexafluoride (SF6). Gas pressure shall be
monitored, and a low-pressure lock-out device with a means of remotely indicating the
existence of abnormally low pressure shall be included.
Ring switches
The ring switches shall be fault make, load break type with ‘on’, ‘of’, and ‘earth’ positions.
There shall be a time delay incorporated to prevent immediate opening of the ring switch
after closing onto the ‘on’ or ‘earth’ position.
Tee-off switch
Type
The tee-off switch shall be circuit breaker utilising the SF6 medium for arc control with a
separate earth switch, or a fault make, load break switch with ‘on’, ‘off’ and ‘earth’ positions
with HRC striker pin fuses arranged to trip al three phases if any one fuse blows.
2-2-320 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Tripping characteristic
The characteristic of the circuit breaker or fuse shall be suitable for the transformer load
being fed from the ring main unit.
Circuit earthing
It shall not be possible to close any switch to earth and bus bar simultaneously, or to switch
directly to the ‘earth’ position from the ‘on’ position without first topping at the ‘off’
position.
It shall be possible to padlock earth switches open or closed, and circuit breaker carriage
position selectors in any position or to restrict selection of any position.
Where transferable key interlocks are fitted, the keys shall be non-copyable and no spare
keys shall be supplied. Transferable key interlocks requirements are included in the
Particular Specifications.
Electrical
A volt-free changeover contact shall be wired to the auxiliary circuit terminal box for each
circuit breaker and switch on/off state, service and earth position, and fault trip. Other states
as defined in the Particular Specifications shall be similarly equipped.
A minimum of four spare auxiliary switches, two normally open and two normally closed,
shall be provided for each circuit breaker and contactor.
Batteries
The batteries shall be of the nickel-cadmium alkaline type designed for long life minimum
maintenance and continuous floating across a constant voltage supply without emitting
corrosive fumes. Sufficient capacity shall be available for any future extension of the
switchgear that may be stated in the Particular Specifications.
Battery charger
The battery charger shall be an automatically controlled unit designed to maintain the
batteries in a state of full charge. It shall incorporate a current limiting device for protection
against low battery volts and short circuit, and reverse battery protection.
Monitoring
A voltmeter shall be included on the unit to indicate the system condition. A relay with a
tripping supply failed flag, situated at the far end of the switchboard from the tripping supply
unit, shall monitor the tripping supply. A volt-free change–over contact on this relay shall be
wired to terminals within the unit for connection to a tripping supply failed alarm.
2.2.18 Labelling
Each ring main unit, switchboard and control board shall bear an identification label with
letters of minimum size 12mm. Additionally, each individual switch shall bear an
identification label at both the back and front of the unit where applicable with the switch
name and number, with minimum lettering size 8mm.
2-2-322 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Tool cupboard
A wall mounted tool cupboard shall be provided in each substation to store all operating
handles and any special attachments for testing etc.
Logbook cupboard
A wall-mounted cupboard with a drop down writing surface shall be provided in each
substation to house the substation logbook. This cupboard may be combined with the tool
cupboard.
Key safe
Two lockable key safes shall be provided in each substation. Each shall be provided with not
less than 8 hooks. Each safe shall be manufactured from steel, shall be of rigid construction
to prevent being forced open, and be capable of being locked by two padlocks.
2.3 Transformers
2.3.1 General
Power transformers 25 KVA and above for installation outdoors shall be oil immersed,
naturally cooled type classified ONAN: Unless specified otherwise, power transformers for
installation indoors shall be of the cast resin type.
When oil filled transformers are used indoors, they shall only be installed at ground level.
2.3.2 Rating
Transformers shall be sized for continuous operation at the maximum rating under the
ambient conditions specified. Allowance shall be made for harmonics where non-linear loads
(i.e. inverters) are connected.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-323
2.3.4 Windings
The primary windings of all transformers shall be closed delta connected. Unless specified
otherwise, the winding configuration shall be Dy11.
The secondary windings of all transformers, except for special applications such as 12 pulse
inverters, shall be star connected with the star/neutral point brought out to the low voltage
terminal box.
The transformer star/neutral terminal shall be capable of accepting cabling as specified in the
Particular Specifications.
A padlock facility shall be provided for locking the tap change selector in any chosen
position. A padlock, and one key only, shall be provided.
The core shall be earthed at one point only with a readily accessible removable connection
that may be conveniently opened to check the core insulation.
Tanks shall be oil pressure tested to at least 34 kN/m2 plus the dead weight of oil contained
under operating conditions.
Transformer oil
Transformer oil shall be of the mineral oil.
If the transformer is to be filled with oil on Site, the Contractor shall provide oil and filtration
equipment of suitable capacity.
The Contractor shall supply a schedule of insulating oils and greases that the Contractor
recommends for use with the transformer.
It shall be possible to remove the cable boxes without breaking the cable seals or oil seals.
The primary and secondary terminal boxes shall be provided with gland plates, to suit the
MV and LV cables detailed in the Particular Specifications. Non-magnetic gland plates shall
be provided where single core cables are specified. All cable entries shall be on the bottom of
the terminal boxes.
2.3.9 Fittings
Oil filled transformers
The following fittings and auxiliary equipment shall be fitted, where applicable, to oil filled
transformers:
- Conservator (transformers of 2 MVA and above).
- Explosion vent.
- Bucholz relay (transformers of 2 MVA and above) with alarm and trip contacts, 2 sets
N/C (i.e. open for alarm and trip conditions, and to be confirmed) contacts for both alarm
and trip settings.; Winding temperature indicator fitted with alarm and trip contacts, 2 sets
N/C, (to be confirmed) or both alarm and trip settings.
- Silica gel breather, weatherproof, complete with first filling of silica gel.
- Two drain valves (in series), each fitted with a padlock facility. Two padlocks shall be
provided.
- Auxiliary terminal/marshalling box, housing all terminals for the alarm and trip contacts
from Bucholz and winding temperature units. The terminal box shall have a degree of
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-325
In addition to the above routine tests the transformers shall have been subjected to a
temperature rise ‘Type Test’ as set out in the relevant British or Harmonised European
Standard. A copy of all test results shall be sent to the Contract Administrator.
Site testing of transformers after erection and prior to the connection of site cables and
commissioning shall consist of the following tests (where relevant to the type and size of
transformer):
- Insulation Tests of Primary and Secondary Windings;
- Bucholz Relay Calibration and Functional Tests (to auxiliary terminal box);
2-2-326 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
- Winding Temperature Indicator Calibration and Functional Tests (to auxiliary terminal
box);
- Oil Temperature Indicator calibration Test;
- Dielectric Tests;
- High Voltage Tests on Primary and Secondary Windings with cable links disconnected.
The Contractor shall provide power required for testing purposes. This may involve the
provision of a portable generating set.
Transformer Rooms shall be designed and constructed to withstand fire, and shall have doors
designed to burst open in the event of an explosion. All doors into the transformer room shall
be external doors, and shall open outwards. No doors or windows shall link into another
building, or room, other than one used for housing transformers. The Transformer Room
shall be vented to outdoors; it must not vent into another room or building. The transformer
shall sit on a concrete pad. A bunded soakaway shall be provided. This shall be designed to
rapidly absorb any oil spillage and to prevent a fire being sustained in the event of the tank
exploding.
Steel rollers or wheels shall be provided for positioning the transformer and left in-situ for
future use.
Transformer Rooms shall be designed and constructed to withstand fire, and shall have doors
designed to burst open in the event of an explosion. Doors into the transformer room may
open into other rooms, but must be at least ½ hour fire rated and open outwards. The
Transformer Room shall be vented to outdoors; it must not vent into another room or
building. The transformer shall sit on a concrete pad.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-327
2.4 Diesel-generatorset
2.4.1 Diesel-engine
The diesel engine shall be a water-cooled inline or V-type four stroke cycle compression
ignition diesel, normally aspirated or turbo charged. If needed, after-cooling and / or air-to-
air-cooling are also permitted.
The diesel engine shall be equipped with lubrication oil, intake air filters, lubrication oil
cooler, gear driven fuel transfer pump, fuel priming pump, gear driven cooling water pump,
cooling water temperature controls and starting motor. The stand-by diesel engine should be
of low fuel consumption and low emissions.
2.4.2 Coupling
The coupling between the engine and generator preferably to be designed as a close-coupled
system in which the generator flange is bolted to the engine flywheel housing. If a conventio-
nal coupling is applied an increased rigidity of the frame is required.
In case a single bearing type generator is applied, the rotor weight of the generator must be
compared to the capability of the selected engine to support this additional load.
A flexible coupling between engine and generator shall be fitted in case of selecting a two
bearing type generator.
The engine to be equipped with a torsion vibration damper. The contractor shall make a
torsion vibration analysis. The calculation to be submitted to the Project Manager.
2.4.3 Generator
The generator shall be a three-phase, 50 Hertz, synchronous brushless 4 pole alternator. The
generator with a revolving field and a solid-state exciter.
The generator shall be of dripproof type and shall be ventilated. The sound proof canopy
shall be provided ( if use nearby residential area) to reduce the noise level otherwise possible
to have the room itself sound insulated to achieve the recommended values. The generator
completes with voltage regulator with compounding system.
The generator shall be designed for a run away speed of 1.2 times the rated speed, and shall
be suitable for unbalanced operation. The generator shall be provided with a superior class of
insulation. A temperature-sensing element shall be fitted to each set of stator windings.
The momentary short-circuit current shall not exceed the value of 3 times the peak value of
the rated current. The end windings shall be properly braced and anchored in order to prevent
injurious deformation in case of short circuits.
2.4.8 Mounting
The diesel-engine and the generator shall be mounted on a structural steel base. The base to
be secured on the concrete foundation by means of anchor bolts. Between base and
foundation vibration dampers shall be fitted to prevent transmission of vibration to
inoperative diesel-generatorsets.
The vibration isolators shall be rubber or spring type. The isolators to be capable to isolate at
least 80 % of the vibratory forces. A vibration calculation shall be carried out by the
contractor and to be presented to the Project Manager.
For re-charging the batteries, with the diesel-engine in operation, the batteries shall be con-
nected to the alternator of the diesel engine by means of as short as possible, slack cables.
The alternator has to be equipped with a voltage regulator.
To keep the batteries alive if the diesel-generatorsets are not used for long periods, a battery
charger shall be delivered for every diesel-generatorset. The battery charger to be placed in
the corresponding section of the switchboard as above mentioned.
All inlets of the suction connections inside the tank shall be situated at least 80mm above the
tank bottom.
The capacity of the Fuel Storage Tank shall be sufficient for 36 hours of operation under full
load, but 2 cubic meters minimum. Steel thickness 6 mm. Tank design has to be double
walled.
Has to have replaceable paper air filter or breather caps with air filters.
Have to include float switch, solenoid valve and dial-type alarm on over-fill and low-level.
2-2-330 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Fuel feed line to daytank has to have bypass with stop-cock. Size of fuel return line from
daytank to main fuel tank has to be to manufacturer's recommendations.
Filling line of main fuel tank has to be at least as fuel-line-size & external diameter, entering
tank at opposite end to drain plug. Main tank fill and sounding line connections must have
hinged, lockable caps with female threaded bottom inlets.
2.4.15 Preservation
The outside of the fuel daytank to be preserved according to code G. The inside of the tank to
be de-rusted and cleaned.
Panels shall close the upper side and the rear side of the assembly. The bottom side shall be
closed with a bottom panel provided with bushing openings for electric cables. A door shall
close the front side of the assembly. Two doors shall be installed in case the width of a cell
exceeds 1.200mm. Each cell shall comprise a mounting plate made in one piece of Sendzimir
galvanised steel.
Each cell (or cell compartment) shall comprise the following items:
- one lighting armature provided with 15 W strip-light mounted to the upper- inner side of
the cell and shall be switched on/off using a door switch;
- one heating element;
- one 230 Vac wall socket with a protection contact.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-331
For every three cells one automatic moisture meter shall be installed. This moisture meter
shall switch on/off the heating elements of these three cells.
For each switchgear and control-gear assembly the Contractor shall provide a heat load
calculation. The Contractor shall provide all necessary provisions to prevent the temperature
in the assembly exceeding 25°C or a lower temperature if prescribed by any supplier of
materials within this assembly.
The heat load calculation shall be based on the following conditions:
- all heat generating equipment within the assembly is operating simultaneously at a
maximum heat load;
- an ambient temperature of 30°C.
The power supply for the lighting armature and wall socket within the assembly shall be
connected to the main power supply cable before the main switch and shall be provided with
a circuit breaker. The circuit breaker shall be mounted onto the mounting plate in the supply-
cell (section).
Apparatus connected before the main switch shall permanently have a warning label at a
conspicuous position.
Branching cables shall be connected to connection boxes with warning labels attached to
them.
Dimensions on drawings of switchgear and control-gear assemblies are for information only.
The Contractor shall determine the exact dimensions required, based on a logical and orderly
arrangement of the internal. For this no price adjustments will be accepted.
Within the switchgear and control-gear assembly a swinging frame shall be used for
apparatus which must be accessible at the rear side.
The main switchgear and control-gear provision shall be provided with a single line diagram.
As a reserve each mounting plate within a switchgear and control-gear assembly shall have at
least 15 % of free space.
For each Switchboard the Contractor shall supply the following equipment:
- electrical grade rubber floor mat 1.000mm wide extending the full length of the
switchboard;
2-2-332 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
2.5.2 Construction
The construction guidelines of the supplier shall be adopted in case the make and type of the
prefabricated switchgear and control-gear is specified. The scope shall include:
- mounting plates including fastening materials;
- bottom panel;
- coupling materials for coupling of the cells.
If the make and type of the switchgear and control-gear assembly is not specified in the
Particular Specifications the switchgear and control-gear assembly shall be manufactured and
assembled according to the following specifications.
The assembly shall be constructed from a welded box profile framework of steel. The casing
shall be of plate material of at least 2mm thickness. To obtain a rigid construction the edges
of the plate shall be chamfered.
Doors shall be made of 2.5mm steel plate material and shall be provided with stiffeners. Each
cell shall have a mounting plate of 3mm thickness.
Doors shall be provided with internal hinges with a profile of sponge rubber (neoprene),
mounted in a U-profile over the entire outline of the door. The door shall completely close
the assembly.
The construction of the switchgear and control-gear assembly shall be placed on a framework
of U-profiles (UNP 100) in one piece made of hot galvanised and preserved steel.
The assembly used outdoors shall be constructed from stainless steel (AISI 316) of at least
3mm thickness.
Unless otherwise specified a switchgear and control-gear assembly shall meet the following
protection classes:
- closed condition: IP 54;
- open condition: IP 20.
Doors of switchgear and control-gear assemblies shall be provided with a three-point lock
with crank handle and cylinder lock, except for motor chambers of assemblies with
compartments. All locks must be opened and locked with one universal key. The Contractor
shall furnish a total of 6 keys to the Project Manager.
Doors of switchgear and control-gear assemblies shall be provided with a stop mechanism,
which will limit the openings angle of the door to 85°. This mechanism will prevent that this
door can come in contact with another door or with a wall.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-333
If any standard prescribes that the door of the switchgear and control-gear assembly has to be
grounded, a litz wire provided with a yellow/green socket shall connect the door with the
framework.
Cable inlet chambers or cells with cable inlets shall be provided with a bottom plate. Cable
inlet dust seals shall close these compartments. For this aspect the Contractor shall consult
with the Project Manager.
Adequate protection in the form of shrouding and/or vertical and horizontal screening
between sections and sub-sections shall be provided to minimise the risk of accidental short-
circuiting and to limit propagation time, if occurring.
The insulation shall be capable of providing adequate and lasting protection under specified
normal conditions and recognised over currents and over voltages.
Compartments for cable termination shall be large enough to allow for spreading and
locating of cores by hand.
The degree of protection between compartments shall be not less than IP20.
The door of each compartment shall be mechanically interlocked with the switchgear
mechanism so that the door cannot be opened when the switch is closed.
Each prefabricated part shall be provided with temporary eyebolts, which shall be detachable.
Measures shall be taken to prevent the switchgear and control-gear from any damages during
transport.
After assembly and erection the eyebolts shall be detached and the remaining holes shall be
closed.
2-2-334 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Any damages to the coating of the assembly shall be properly preserved. the Project Manager
may require preservation of complete assembly once again if necessary. Resulting additional
costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
2.5.5 Bus-bars
For each bus-bar system the Contractor shall furnish a certificate of acceptance.
Bus-bars shall be made of electrolytic tin dipped, nickel dipped or epoxy-coated copper and
shall be constructed to resist the maximum expected short-circuit current. This shall be
proven with a typical test certificate.
All joints and branches shall be fixed using tapped holes with bolts, nuts and washers. For
this the Contractor shall provide a certificate in which it is declared that:
- the connections will have a minimum lifetime of 10 years;
- items within the bus-bar system are dismountable and replaceable.
- Cells containing supply sections and motor groups shall be provided with a bus-bar,
excluding cells containing only measuring and control equipment.
Bus-bars shall have codes attached to them if required by the local Electricity Company.
Bus-bars shall be coloured according to their standards.
At the bottom of the switchgear and control-gear assembly an uninterrupted electrically tin-
dipped or nickel-dipped red copper earthing bus bar of at least 25x5mm shall be installed.
M6 tapped holes shall be provided every 50mm. Every 25-cm a green/yellow mark shall be
attached to the bar.
2.5.6 Wiring
Wiring shall be of flexible assembly flex:
- type VDS 450/750 V for cross-sections 1,5mm;
- type VDMS 300/500 V for cross-sections < 1,5mm.
The following minimal cross-sections shall be applied:
- circuits 230 Vac : 1mm²;
- circuits < 230 Vac : 0,75mm²;
- safety circuits : 1,5mm²;
- secondary circuits of current transformers : 2,5mm².
The selection of any cross-section shall be based on the relating safety provision.
Coloured wiring shall be applied:
- black : wiring AC and DC voltage main circuits;
- (light) blue : neutral.
The following colours shall be applied for control current wiring:
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-335
Explanatory text for the codes of colours shall be engraved in a white synthetic nameplate.
This plate shall be installed using PVC spreading rivets in a conspicuous position within the
switchgear and control-gear assembly.
Wire ends shall be finished with cable sockets in such a way that an adequate connection
between the conductors is obtained. The isolation of the socket shall enclose the earthing
isolation properly.
Wire ends connected to the bus-bar system shall be finished with ringed sockets.
A maximum of two wires may be connected to one socket if a suitable socket is applied.
Each wire end shall be provided with a code according to the potential-coding system as
described in the attached standard coding diagram. The code shall be attached
uninterruptedly in a conspicuous way and numbers shall be properly fixed.
Wiring shall be concealed in cable trays with a removable cover. The filling ratio shall not
exceed 80 % taking also future extensions into account. Cable trays shall be placed within 30
- 75mm from equipment in such a way that all codes shall be legible.
Back loops of wiring to the cable tray are not allowed. Loops shall be avoided as much as
possible (laying phase and neutral, + and – according to the same route).
Connecting through two wire ends in one wire line is not allowed.
2-2-336 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Wires for measuring signals (0-10 V, 4-20 mA en 0-20 mA) shall be of flexible multi-core
shielded cable or cord.
Wires for intrinsically safe signals shall be of flexible multi-core protected blue clad wire.
Wire beams to doors shall be suspended within a 500mm loop and shall be shielded with
weaved shielding material. Wire beam-ends shall on both sides (door side and assembly side)
be relieved from any stress using proper synthetic brackets. Both brackets shall be installed
as close as possible to the hinged side of the door. Braid wiring will not be accepted.
To avoid motions of cables within the cable tray in case of a short-circuit motor power
supply wiring, limited to one motor, shall be bound together with nylon cable binders.
2.5.7 Selectivity
Safety apparatus shall activate in a regulated selective way.
All safety units of the power switches shall be selected and set in such a way that an optimal
selectivity between the various safety units is obtained. The settings of the power switches
shall meet the requirements of the local Power Supply Company. In a selectivity diagram the
Contractor shall present the switch-off characteristics of all relating safety switches.
All live parts shall be protected against accidental contact. Therefore the equipment shall be
installed in the most convenient way and, if necessary, protected with a removable 3mm
thick transparent isolation plate.
Each section door shall have a title legend and each door-mounted component shall have a
function legend.
Each internal component shall have identification and each fuse shall be engraved with fuse
type and current capacity.
All legends shall be engraved in a white synthetic nameplate in the Arabic language. The
colour shall be a white background with black characters. The legends shall be mounted with
chrome plate nuts and bolts with slotted holes to allow expansion of the legend.
All fuses shall be of High Breaking Capacity (HBC) types. One spare fuse for each fuse
fitted in the panel shall be supplied, clipped adjacent to the position in which it would be in
service. A complete scheme of all fuses used in the panel shall be supplied and affixed on a
convenient position in the panel.
Neutral links will not be arranged in fuse holders but shall be arranged in bolted copper links
with one link for each fuse.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-337
Provision for the accommodation of rising armoured cables shall be provided with adequate
cable supports and a form of cable entry seal.
Space shall be provided to accommodate cable glands of the appropriate size for incoming
and outgoing cables. Non-ferric gland plates shall be provided were single core cables are
terminated. All gland plates and trays shall be adequately earthed.
Auxiliary switches for indication, protection, interlocking and supervisory purposes shall be
readily accessible and protected by a transparent dust-proof cover. Adequate secondary
disconnection means shall be included in between the fixed and the moving part of the circuit
breakers.
Fuse switches shall comprise of flush mounted air break switches and fuse units and shall be
rated as detailed.
For each type of fuse in each section a suitable fuse carrier shall be provided. It shall be fitted
on a convenient place inside the section.
Equipment mounted on the rear mounting board with switch knobs/handles on the door must
be equipped with a self-searching coupling.
All terminal blocks for the connection of small wiring shall comprise shrouded anti-tracking
mouldings of melamine phenolic or comparable material with provision for securing
conductors by high tensile screws and clamps.
All terminals for outgoing connections shall be located in a lower level of the section
adjacent to the cable gland trays. Direct termination on equipment such as fuses, motor
contactors or thermal protection relays is not acceptable.
Terminal blocks shall be arranged in such a way that easy access to both terminals and wiring
ends is guaranteed.
Valves Generally
125 psi steam working pressure rating and 200 psi cold water non-shock pressure rating and
type that can be repacked under pressure.
relay and time delay relays to signal generator start and stop, auxiliary switches and
indicating lights etc. as necessary for the required operation of the system. The Automatic
Transfer Switch (ATS) preferable to be part of the L.V switch board rather than incorporated
in the Generator panels.
The number of the low voltage sub distribution switchgears to be supplied depends on the
entire concept of the wastewater treatment plant, the spatial arrangement of certain drives and
mechanical equipment. All drives of extension of WWTP will be supplied from the low
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-339
voltage main distribution switchgear directly. Some units and drives will be supplied via sub-
distribution by the manufacturer.
All switchgears are to be equipped with protective combinations for emergency OFF,
according to DIN EN 60204 part 1 (DIN/VDE 0113 part 1).
Warning and indicating boards have to be attached in all areas. Especially in switchgear
rooms sign-posting of the escapes are to be effected. Furthermore, these rooms are to be
equipped with CO2-fire extinguishers and portable emergency hand lamps for battery
operation.
The possibility of proper storage of the respective drawings has to be ensured for each
functional unit in the doors, frames or side walls of the switchgears. The pockets for the
drawings are to be delivered in a form-resistant design with screwed fixing.
Against accidental arcs the switchgear cubicles have to be partitioned. Only the concerned
section may be affected in case of disturbance.
Each section gets an engraved signboard which clearly displays the functional group,
installation place, circuit diagram, terminal strip, etc. These signboards are to be mounted
durable on the outside.
The wiring inside the switchgear cubicles is done by highly flexible conductors. The
stripping of insulation is thermally effected or done by mechanical special tools, according to
cross section. The connection to the devices is effected by insulated terminal ends or wire
end ferrules. Non-insulated connecting systems are not allowed.
The cross section design is to be effected in accordance to DIN/VDE. The lines have to be
provided with 20 % reserve to the nominal current. In main circuits the smallest allowed
cross section is 2.5 mm². Control and measuring circuits will be wired according to the back-
up fuse, whereby 0.75 mm² is accepted as smallest section. For electronic circuits, the wiring
2-2-340 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
in form and method is depending on the conditions of the manufacturer, however with a
minimum of 0.75 mm².
Measuring circuits are to be installed shielded. The wiring of the control-, signal- and
measuring circuits as well as electronics in-/outputs is done in colour.
All bus bars have to be provided with appropriate markings over the total length according to
their meaning.
All in- and outgoing cables and lines have to be marked with cable-identification labels
inside the switchgear cubicles, main distribution switchgears, etc. The respective cable
number has to be mounted permanently in a respective designation carrier. It is not allowed
to paste the cable numbers on the cables.
Installed operating and supervising devices will be marked outside in plain language with
engraved Formica labels which are to be fixed by screws or rivets.
Connectors inside the switchgears are to be marked clearly and durable on the plug and the
device.
All terminal-, plug-in- and solder tag strips are to be assembled with a 20 % reserve.
The contractor has to ensure a durable protection against corrosion for the entire scope of
delivery. All switchgear cubicles are to be sand-blasted. A priming coat is to be applied
immediately after sand blasting. The following coating on epoxy resin base is to be applied
twice. The colour has to be agreed upon with the Project Manager. Transportation and
assembly damages are to be repaired professionally on the site.
The effectiveness of foundation earths supposes that a certain degree of humidity is kept in
the ambient concrete. Therefore, it is not allowed to apply humidity insulation under
foundation earth.
The resistance of the earthing/lightning system should be measured by the contractor and
should be no more than 1 ohm.
The buildings have to be equipped with a lightning protection system. On the roofs air
terminations are to be installed. Down leads are to be drawn up behind building linings as far
as possible.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-341
All metallic structural elements of outdoor buildings are to be included in the lightning
protection. The earthing systems are to be connected to equipotential bonding strips and
marked in correspondence to their application.
In any case, all metallic casings of electrical equipment which can take up voltages in case of
faults are to be connected with the protective conductor according to DIN/VDE 0100.
The control and instrumentation systems are to be equipped with overvoltage protectors in
their signal input. These are also to be equipped with quick-acting transient protection
devices. It is to be observed that protected and unprotected lines are not running parallel.
Contractor is to describe effective mitigation of over voltage,
The functionality of these protective devices is depending on the careful planning and
execution of the equipotential bonding. All measures of this domain are separately to be
documented including the necessary measurements of the earthing system.
As further criterion for trouble-free operation of the plant and as protection against corrosion
damages, the earthing system is to be kept at zero current, as far as possible. No equalizing
currents due to unacceptable PEN links may flow over the earthing system. This is to be
proved by measures.
2.8 Cables
Cables shall be single or multicore.
All cables shall be of suitable voltage grade, copper cored and manufacturers test certificates
shall be submitted to the Project Manager before the cables are installed. Cables laid not in
the ground shall be N2XY; cables laid in the ground N2KXFG.
All cables used shall bear the manufacturers’ original guarantee and shall be delivered on site
in their original wrapping.
The Contractor shall pay particular attention to the appearance of all cable routing. Before
start of the installation work the Project Manager shall agree to the arrangements. The
highest standards of neatness with respect to the visible cable routing and the arrangement
and alignment of apparatus and fittings shall be observed.
When the Contractor proposes the use of junction boxes in auxiliary control cable circuits for
marshalling a number of cables feeding a common item of equipment, full details shall be
given to the Project Manager. The Contractor shall not continue his activities until the Project
Manager gives written permission. Such junction box shall be of the wall mounting type with
a double set of terminals with cores ferruled and identified in accordance with the schematic
and cable diagrams.
2-2-342 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The Contractor shall deliver and install all the necessary cable glands and sealing boxes to
complete the installation. All materials used in the manufacture of glands etc. shall have no
effect on the cable core or armouring and shall be corrosion-proof.
The conductors of each cable shall be taken direct to the terminals of the machine, instrument
and equipment to be connected. Cable ends shall be sealed in suitable cable boxes bolted to
terminal boxes.
Whenever it is necessary to remove the PVC sheathing of a cable, this must be done over a
minimum length. Exposed copper sheath or armouring shall be covered with a PVC tape or
sleeve or any other suitable means. A minimum length of 250mm tail shall be left on all
cables at outlet positions for connection of the components at the outlet.
Multi-core cables shall be terminated with suitable glands and earth bonding washers. Black
PVC shrouds shall be installed on glands. Care shall be exercised to ensure that
manufacturers’ minimum bending radiuses are not exceeded during installation.
No wire of less than 2.5mm2 shall be used in the installation and no combining or splicing of
cables shall be permitted. Only insulated cables shall be installed in conduit and trunking.
Cabling for different services shall be installed in separate conduits.
Cables shall not be combined in trunking. Cables of different circuits in trunking shall be
taped or bound at intervals of 1.5 meters for easy identification. Cables shall not be packed or
forced into trunking in such a manner as to damage or disfigure the insulation. This
requirement is to be strictly followed.
The total voltage drop from the connection from the Electricity Company to the terminals of
the equipment under the most severe circumstances foreseen may not exceed 5 % for the
power installation and 2 % for the lighting installation.
The Contractor shall submit details of the cable size calculations to the Project Manager and
shall not proceed until the Project Manager gives written permission.
Where a number of cables approach a particular item of equipment, special care must be
taken to ensure that the cables finally approach the equipment from a common direction and
in an orderly and symmetrical manner.
The Contractor shall be responsible for measuring the required cable length. The cable shall
be supplied in a suitable length and be continuous throughout its routing. Cable combining
shall not be permitted without written permission given by the Project Manager.
Excessive bundling of cables in large conduits shall not be permitted and the Contractor shall
not exceed the requirements laid down in the local or international Standard and Regulations.
The Contractor shall provide, for terminating cable conductors in excess of 30 A current
carrying capacity, a pressure operated mechanically crimped cable lug or terminal socket.
In addition, control cables and individual conductors shall be identified by means of suitable
permanent ferrules, bearing the same number at both ends. Conductor identification shall
occur at every point of termination using a suitable system of ferrule markers. Numbering
shall be read from the terminal outwards on all conductors. At those points of interconnection
between wiring where a change of number cannot be avoided double numbers shall be
provided on each wire. This identification shall also be provided on the wiring diagrams were
the change is made.
Cables entering or leaving buildings shall be laid in ducts that are sealed at the point of entry
in the building. Sealing shall be done with a Multiple Cable Transit (MCT). Care must be
taken that the PVC sheathing of the cables shall not be damaged. All entrances and transits
must be watertight.
2-2-344 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
All cables shall be either clipped to walls, ceilings or building structures or run in trays or
ladders. All cable hangers, cleats, saddles, brackets and similar supporting devices shall be of
a suitable type and of adequate strength for the cables they are supporting. They shall be non-
ferrous and so treated that they can withstand the conditions on site without corroding.
All cables, whether in or out of sight shall run vertically, horizontally or parallel to adjacent
walls, beams or other structures.
Spacing of clips, saddles and cleats shall be in such a way that sagging during the lifetime of
the cable will be prevented.
The cable trenches shall be cleared of stones and other sharp / hard objects. On the base of
the cable trench a sand bed of 100mm thick shall be applied on witch the cables are laid.
The minimal horizontal distance between low voltage cable work and the remaining cable
work is 200mm.
If it is necessary to layer or cross cable work, comply with the following requirements:
- between the cable layers a compacted sand layer of 50mm shall be applied;
- the top cable layer shall be supplied with a cover of 600mm compared with the ground
level;
- all other specified depth measures in this document towards field cable works shall be
applicable to the cable trenches.
The cables shall be laid zigzag in the cable trench, reckoning with 10 % excess length.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-2-345
Signal cables in the ground must have 25 % reserve cores, with a minimum of 2 cores.
The backfilling of the cable trenches will be sustained in a suitable manner. The first 100mm
clean sand cover shall be carefully compacted on the cables. The backfilling shall be applied
with the original material cleared from stones and other hard / sharp objects.
All other cable trenches shall be provided with a red warning ribbon 300mm under ground
level provided with the text “ATTENTION: ELECTRICITY CABLES” in the Arabic
language.
Field cables that have crossings with pavements, shall be provided with synthetic material
jacked pipes sections. Likewise two reserve synthetic material jacked pipes at cable depth
shall be applied. The reserve synthetic material jacked pipes shall be watertight and provide
with detachable covers on both sides. The jacked pipes shall exceed each side of the road
with 1 m, be provided with nylon pull cord and have a diameter of Ø 110mm.
Cables that are not directly connected shall be capped in a watertight manner.
The revision drawings of cable routings shall comply with the following requirements:
- the exact location of the cable trenches compared to a reference point;
- the depth of the cable trenches;
- the cross-section of the cable trenches which indicates the position of the cables;
- details of road intersections and crossings of cable work;
- the locations which do not have the minimum ground covering of 600mm;
- the locations of the coupling sleeves.
The beginning, end and each 300mm of the pipes shall be attached with hot dip galvanised
pipe brackets. Cables outside the building shall be laid in stainless steel pipes. The pipes shall
be mounted with stainless steel pipe brackets.
Vertical protection tubes that are mounted outside shall be carried out till 200mm under
ground level. The protection tubes shall be drained out to ensure that water doesn’t stay in
the tubes. The topside of the protection tubes shall be sealed.
The horizontal assembly of four or more cables near each other shall be laid in a cable tray
and vertically assembly of the cables shall be attached to a cable tray.
Cables in horizontal assembled cable trays can be laid unattached under the condition that
cables are laid in a proper and orderly way and are joined together. If the cable trays exceed
2-2-346 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
an angle of 30o the cables shall be attached each 400mm with cable ties or hot dip galvanised
pipe brackets.
Bushings of cables guiding systems shall be provided with rubber bushings or coupling nuts.
Cables in cable trays or cable ladder shall be laid with the required bend radius in the cable
trays and sufficient cable spreading shall be guaranteed.
Outgoing cables of a cable tray or cable ladder shall be protected to prevent damage
throughout the complete length of the cables. Inside a prefabricated galvanised steel
assembly system shall be used for the cables. This system shall also be used to assemble
main switches and wall mounted devices that are not near the machine. If necessary the
cables shall be adequately supported and relieved of tensile strain.
After completion of various parts of the installation the Contractor shall provide a Test
engineer, labour and materials to demonstrate to the Project Manager that the cabling has
been correctly installed.
It shall remain the responsibility of the Contractor to test the insulation of the cables, both
between conductors and earthing during installation with a ‘Megger”; ‘500 Volt hand
generator.
The Contractor shall test all cables after installation to ensure correct phasing out of the
conductors, continuity of the conductors, sheaths and armouring over the whole length of the
cable.
cable ladder shall be executed with stand-up longitudinal ribs of at least 15mm high. The
inside of the bends shall be fluidly. The trays outside shall be carried out in stainless steel or
synthetic material as agreed with the Project Manager.
For separation of low-voltage current / measuring signal cables and power supply cables a
partition wall shall be applied.
The bends, tees, couplings, reducers etc. shall be of the same manufacture as the tray.
The accessory curvatures shall be wide enough to fit the cables smoothly in the trays with the
required bending radius.
Cable ladders shall be suitable for attaching cables with cable brackets.
Cable trays and cable ladders shall be suspended with typical brackets and shall be suitable
for a lateral attachment of the cables. The attachment of the tray shall be adjustable.
The suspension and support distance shall be in accordance with manufacturers’ regulations
of the cable tray or cable ladder. The maximum deflection shall not exceed 5mm with the
maximum cable loading on the tray.
Cable trays and cable ladders shall be carried out with covers unless they are situated in
creeping spaces or nearby ceilings. The covers shall be attached with metal clips.
All suspensions and mounting devices, nuts, washers etc. shall be made of the same material
as the concerned cable tray or cable ladder.
Damages to cable trays or cable ladders including suspension etc. shall be recovered in
conformity with the conserving regulations.
Conduits shall be run on the surface or sunk as specified and be neatly arranged. Ways shall
be provided for additional conduit boards at all switchboards. The sizes of conduits used
shall be determined by the number of cables to be drawn in as scheduled or as specified. But
2-2-348 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
in no case conduits less than 20mm diameter shall be used. Sunk and concealed conduit
systems shall support fittings independently of any false ceiling.
All conduits shall be installed in a suitable manner and arranged with adequate ventilation
and drainage where necessary. The Contractor shall ensure that conduits drawn-in boxes and
junction boxes are of sufficient capacity to allow all cables plus 15 % to be drawn in or
withdrawn.
Conduits shall be of the screwed pattern, galvanised by the hot dip galvanising process. All
conduit fittings not carrying accessories shall be supplied with flat covers fixed in position
with round head brass screws.
Surface run conduits shall be supported in such a way that a maximum distance of 1,00 metre
between two points shall not be exceeded.
Where possible all bends and sets shall be formed in the conduit itself. Factory made bends
are only installed after written permission of the Project Manager. The radius of bends shall
not be less than specified in the standards.
Standard junction or adaptable boxes shall be provided at all junctions and at sharp changes
of direction in addition to any special positions to be called for by the Project Manager on
site. Inspection couplers may be used in long runs to facilitate drawing in cables.
Particular care must be taken to ensure that no water is allowed to enter a conduit. However,
they shall be arranged with adequate ventilation and drainage where necessary as directed by
the Project Manager. Inaccessible junction boxes shall not be allowed.
Fixing to surfaces of walls shall be by means of spacer bar saddles securely fixed by screws.
Where conduits are concealed or laid in structural floors they shall be held in position with
substantial fittings, make and type to be presented topresented to the Project Manager.
For the different voltage levels of the cables, separate compartments must be provided.
Conduit entries shall be protected against ingress of moisture or debris during installation.
The complete conduit system shall be cleaned from loose matter and dirt before cables are
drawn in.
Where conduits connect to switch boxes, drawn-in boxes and the like, the conduits must have
a machined faced socket screwed on to the end which, when tightened, is flush with the
outside of the box. The conduit is then to be secured to the apparatus by means of a screwed
conduit socket in order to make a sound and tight mechanical joint.
As protective measure for safety, the TN-S-system has to be equipped with over current
protective devices and residual-current-operated circuit-breakers.
2-3-350 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
3.1 General
The instrumentation and control includes all services for an automatic operating mode of the
wastewater treatment plants. All services for control, measured-data acquisition and
observation are to be included in the Contractors scope of supplies. After finishing, all plant
has to run automatically on the PLC.
Centralized fault and alarm indications are to be linked to an existing emergency call central
unit. The valence of the indications is to be determined in the customer requirement
specification. These specifications are to be done by the contractor in agreement with the
designer of the plant.
Essential interventions are to be displayed to the staff by the small mosaic-type panel on the
switchgear cabinet. The logs of the main measured-data will be displayed on the SCADA
System and printed out by the printing recorder and stored there on an integrated Data-
Logger. After the appropriate training, the operating staff has to be able to observe and
control the procedures independently.
Cabling, cable racks, cable ducts, tubes, conduits and all fixing materials belong to the scope
of delivery.
For measuring- and control cabling, shielded cables or lines have to be used. The shielding
has to be put on single ended in the terminal boards.
All sensors, flow-rate meters, probes or other equipment parts delivered by the Contractor or
other suppliers have to be fail-safe and have to be connected, adjusted, calibrated and put into
operation.
Every measuring circuit, actuator and control loop is to be checked. The check list is to be
provided with the name and signature of the test engineer as well as the date.
All equipment shall be guaranteed to be suitable for operation under the prevailing
environmental conditions and shall be designed:
- such that routine and occasional maintenance throughout its life shall be a practical
minimum, compatible with the preservation of maximum reliability;
- to withstand the electrical, mechanical, thermal and atmospheric stresses to which it may
be subjected under operational conditions, without deterioration or failure;
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-351
The degree of protection for equipment enclosures shall be in accordance with IEC529 as
follows:
- IP54 for indoor applications;
- IP65 for outdoor applications;
- IP68 for transducers and other equipment mounted within valve or meter chambers or
similar locations.
All equipment cabinets shall have lockable doors and any ventilation openings or louvers
shall have effective dust filters. Any cooling fans shall have fan failure alarm contacts
connected into the relevant alarm system.
All instruments shall be installed in the locations shown on the Contractors drawings and
where connections are to be made into pipelines, each installation shall be complete with the
necessary manifolds, isolating valves, drain valves, test points, sample cocks, etc., as
appropriate. In all cases it shall be possible to isolate and remove the instrument, and fit
check gauges, or take samples as appropriate.
All analogue transmitters, receivers and direct wire transmission systems shall have a signal
level of 0/4-20 mA or 0-10 V.
Test Certificates, including characteristics covering the full operating range of measured
variable against output signal, shall be provided for all instruments or sets of equipment
measuring primary quantities.
Site testing shall include demonstration of the satisfactory operation of each system
individually and the complete system as whole, before the start of main plants
commissioning.
As an integral part of the setting, to work and commissioning procedures, the Contractor
shall ensure and demonstrate that all items of transmitters, trip amplifiers, meter relays,
controllers, timer etc.) have been adjusted to achieve optimum control of the process or plant
operation.
All signal and control cables (also for PLC) shall be shielded.
All multi-pair cables, except those connected to remotely controlled actuators, shall include a
minimum of 25 % spare cores. This spare capacity shall be over and above any cores that
may be required for proposed future installations or extensions. Spare cores in addition to the
above may be required in some cables to cater for the spare alarm channels.
There shall be a separate multi-core cable between each motorised valve actuator and the
local distribution enclosure or control panel. All such cables shall include a minimum of 2
Nos. spare cores except those associated with actuators having remote control, which shall
have a minimum of 12 Nos. cores.
All cores, even spare cores, in the cables shall be connected to terminals at both ends.
Cabling for chlorination shall have insulation material that shall not deteriorate in the
presence of any of the gases stored. Conduit shall be of a heavy gauge high impact PVC type.
Joints shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of gas into the conduit system.
incorporating voltage stabilisation if necessary. The mean voltage of the rectified output
shall not exceed the nominal output from the instrumentation battery/charger units.
Equipment such as battery/chargers, no break and control power supplies, inverters etc. shall
be supplied as necessary to maintain the required electrical supplies to essential
instrumentation, monitoring and control systems which are to be kept in operation during a
mains power failure. Such essential equipment comprises flow measuring, indicating,
recording and integrating equipment or as otherwise detailed in the application clauses.
All equipment, other than front of panel items, shall be mounted on racks or fixing bars and
not directly onto the panels.
Each enclosure shall be vermin proof and dust proof with the necessary provisions made for
natural or forced ventilation.
All panel construction and arrangement details shall be checked before manufacture, and
panels shall be subject to inspection.
Equipment mounting panels shall be not less than 2mm thick and shall be strengthened
and/or braced to avoid any distortion or vibration. Equipment mounting plates and brackets
shall if necessary be hinged to provide quick and easy access to equipment securing screws,
terminals and wiring.
Doors and access panels shall be adequately braced or strengthened to avoid any buckling or
twisting. Doors shall be of folded and welded construction mounted on lift-off hinges, with
one hinge engaging before the other. Where necessary, removable access covers secured by
quick release fasteners shall be provided. All doors and access panels shall close onto
neoprene or soft rubber sealing strips which shall be held in place mechanically and not by
adhesive. All doors shall be lockable. Where “walk-in” panels or structures are provided,
these shall be fitted with lockable car type handles operable from inside even when locked.
The design and construction shall be such as to provide an enclosure of superior quality,
which shall match all other panels in the same location in style, appearance and finish, and
have environmental protection to IP54. In cubicles for PLC (Programmable Logic
Controllers) the temperature shall be between + 10°C and + 30°C. The relative humidity
shall not exceed 85 %.
Box sections shall be encapsulated into door edges and doorframes. Hinges shall be of high
tensile, non-corroding alloy with stainless steel pins and through fixing bolts. Large plane
surfaces shall have adequate reinforcing to ensure rigidity.
The doors shall be complete with latching handles and locks. All door catches and locks shall
latch onto steel reinforced surfaces. The doorsill shall be protected by a non-corroding alloy
material.
Colour impregnated gel coats backed by coloured resin shall be used to ensure maintenance
free and “colour fast” finishes. The finish colour, both internal and external shall be glossy
white.
Door-mounted meters and transparent windows shall be of glass, which shall be protected
from harmful direct sunshine by orientation or other suitable means.
All internal equipment shall be mounted on supports built into the fibreglass structure. Fixing
bolts through the skin will not be accepted.
Panel wiring
Panel wiring shall be carried out using cables installed in a neat, systematic manner, securely
fixed and supported on insulated cleats or trunking, and arranged so as not to impede access
to any internally mounted equipment.
Analogue signal cables and DC control cables at voltages not exceeding 48 volts (nominal),
may be run together in the same cable bunch or trunking; but these cables shall be run
separately from all other cables. In any cubicle, panel, or structure which is not fully enclosed
(such as some mimic diagram structures), all cabling which is or may be at a voltage in
excess of 55 volts (nominal) to earth, shall be run in conduit.
For all cables, the sizing shall be fully adequate for the possible maximum loading, and
derating shall be applied as appropriate for cable bunching and ambient temperature.
Identification ferrules shall be fitted to both ends of all wires, and shall be of the full circle
type, threaded onto the cable such that all numerals are in line, and read outwards from the
terminal.
Where stranded conductors are used, each end shall be fitted with a sleeved termination lug.
Cabling to door mounted equipment shall be protected in flexible cable conduit(s) and
created to form a loom with a loop of adequate length to allow easy door opening without
causing strain to the components or cable.
Sharp edges of cubicles, trunking, components etc., which may be in contact with cables,
shall be protected to avoid damage to cable insulation.
Panel protection
All terminals and all level parts (on equipment) which are or may be at a voltage in excess of
55 volts (nominal) to earth, shall be enclosed by a protective cover and carry a warning label
stating the actual voltage.
For panels and enclosures covered under this section, the maximum potential between any
two points within the panel or enclosure shall not exceed 250 volts.
Terminals and equipment which are supplied from other sources and which may remain live
when the panel isolators are opened shall be adequately protected and clearly labelled to this
effect.
2-3-356 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Adequate fuse protection for circuits and sub-circuits shall be provided and arranged such
that any fuse failure causes the minimum disruption to controls and indications, and that any
such fuse failure cannot crate an unsafe operating condition. Fuses shall be of the HRC
cartridge type and be mounted within fuse carriers. Ceramic fuse carriers and buses will not
be accepted. All neutral links shall be bolted connections.
Panel earthing
A copper earthing bar shall be provided and bonded electrically to the main frame. It shall be
provided with suitable brass screw terminals for the connection of the metal cladding,
instrument frames, gland plates, cable tray, the armouring of all incoming cables and the site
earthing system.
Panel heating
Each enclosure shall be fitted with one or more heaters to prevent condensation and assist
ventilation. The heaters shall be so arranged and located that no deterioration can be caused
to any equipment or wiring. The surface temperature of any part that may be accidentally
contacted shall not exceed 65°C. The heating circuit shall be supplied via a fuse, an isolator
and an Off/Auto switch. In the “Off” position the heater shall be isolated and in the “Auto”
position a thermostat or humidistat shall control the heater. All switches and controls shall be
mounted within the enclosure.
Panel equipment
A fuse and isolating switch shall be provided for each incoming AC and DC supply.
Each cubicle other than terminal enclosures shall be complete with a distribution unit
providing an adequate number of fused outlets at 110 volts (55-0-55) for possible future
requirements.
Cubicles for PLC shall be equipped with a two-way outlet 220 V, and a fluorescent lamp 18
W, automatically switched-on when the door is open. Both the outlet and the lamp shall be
fused in the LV distribution board.
All items of equipment mounted within the enclosure such as relays, electrical transducers,
indicators, recorders, switch fuses, terminals etc. shall be arranged so as to provide easy
access, be securely fixed and clearly labelled as to their function, designation, and where
applicable, the voltage.
Where meters and recorders are mounted on vertical front panels, the height of the
instrument centrelines shall be within the following limits above finished floor level:
- indicating meters: 1,35m min. and 1,90m max.
- recorders: 1,45m min. and 1,85m max.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-357
All terminals used on circuits not exceeding 55 volts (nominal) to earth, excluding power
supplies and auxiliary drives, shall be of the disconnecting link type.
Every terminal shall carry a clear identity number. Terminals at different voltages shall be
grouped separately, and each group shall be clearly labelled with its respective voltage and
function. Each group shall be segregated with a proprietary barrier to give a physical
separation of 2mm minimum.
Transparent protective covers complete with a voltage-warning label shall be provided on all
terminals that are, or may be, at a voltage in excess of 55 volts (nominal) to earth.
Sufficient terminals shall be provided for terminating all cores of all cables (including spares)
associated with the particular enclosure. The number of terminals shall be sufficient to cater
for all anticipated requirements plus 20 per cent spare terminals and 30 per cent spare
terminal rail. A minimum of 5 terminals and 50mm of spare terminal rail shall be provided.
Terminal rails shall be back plate mounted only. The mounting of terminal rails on the sides,
bottom or top of cubicles shall not be allowed under any circumstances.
3.8 Labels
All external labels for panels and other items where specified shall be of clear perspex, batch
engraved, filled and back painted the same colour as the panel. All labels shall have
chamfered edges and shall be fixed with chrome plated screws or adhesive with two-
component glue (epoxy).
All internal labels shall be of engraved multi-layered plastic fixed with chrome-plated
screws.
Every internal component shall be identified and each fuse shall be labelled with the
identification reference, fuse type and fuse current rating.
2-3-358 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Panels with doors not interlocked to an isolator giving complete protection shall have a label
affixed to the door: “DANGER LIVE TERMINALS” with black letters on a yellow
background. The relevant voltage shall be stated.
A list of labels with Arabic and English inscriptions shall be submitted to the Project
Manager for information before manufacture.
All socket outlets shall be clearly labelled to indicate their respective operating voltages. All
junction boxes shall be clearly labelled to indicate the relevant cable reference numbers.
Where alternative AC supplies are available, provision shall be made for taking the supply to
the battery charger from either source (e.g. form either side of the bus-section switch) with
facilities for automatic change-over from one source to the other in the event of failure of the
supply source.
The battery and charger unit shall where possible form a composite unit and be housed in a
single sheet steel, floor standing cubicle having adequate ventilation and separate
compartments for the batteries (lower compartment) and chargers (upper compartment).
Access to the batteries shall be via lockable, hinged doors, and to the chargers via removable
covers.
Batteries
The batteries shall be of the nickel cadmium type having alkaline electrolyte with a nominal
output of 24 volts. The batteries shall be of adequate capacity to maintain full operation of
the relevant load equipment plus an additional 10 per cent, for a period of 2 hours during
mains failure, assuming a normal charge condition at the start of the mains failure.
The battery cases shall be made of polypropylene or similar translucent material such that the
electrolyte level can be seen through the battery casing.
All batteries shall be suitable for the intended service under the prevailing site conditions
without excessive gassing or loss of electrolyte.
Battery chargers
Duplicate chargers, one “Duty” and one “Standby”, shall be provided and mounted on their
own respective chassis in the upper cubicle compartment.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-3-359
The controls for each charger shall be mounted on their own respective mounting plate and
these, together with all controls and indicators projecting through the front of the upper
compartment, shall be positioned at a height not exceeding 1.800mm from floor level.
The following items of common equipment shall also be provided and mounted on the front
panel:
- 1 No. DC output voltmeter, scaled to indicate regions of “Low”, “Normal” and “High”
output voltages, by the use of differently coloured sectors;
- 1 No. DC output isolator switch;
- 1 No. DC output Ammeter;
- 1 No. Duty/Standby selector switch (labelled “No. 1 Duty, No. 2 Standby/No. 2 Duty, No.
1 Standby”).
The battery charger unit shall also be provided with one set of full capacity rated output DC
terminals and fuses.
In the event of failure of the duty-selected charger, the standby charger shall be connected
automatically and contacts for the remote alarm indication shall be provided. The alarm
indicating failure of the duty charger unit shall remain on until the failed charger has been
repaired and returned to operation.
Reversion form “Standby” to “Duty” charger shall be a manual operation. The chargers shall
be of the solid state constant potential type, and shall be designed to regulate the charger
output voltage to within ± 1 per cent for a mains input voltage variation of ± 6 per cent.
2-3-360 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The DC terminal voltage shall be further regulated such that under “Float” or “Boost” charge
conditions the DC voltage does not rise to more than 10 % above the nominal.
The charger unit shall also be provided with both short-circuit and reverse polarity
protection.
The charger when selected to “Float” shall be capable of restoring the battery to 75 %
capacity within 7-8 hours.
Under “Boost” conditions the charger shall be capable of restoring a fully discharged battery
to 75 % capacity within 4-5 hours.
The cabinet shall be manufactured in accordance with the relevant clauses but with additional
treatment to the interior surfaces to prevent any corrosion by battery chemicals and with
environmental protection to IP32.
For each batter/charger unit the Contractor shall supply a set of maintenance tools, equipment
and spares, and for non-sealed batteries this shall include a resealable, 2-litre container of
electrolyte, a pouring device and hydrometer; all of which shall be contained and secured
within the charger cabinet.
The Contractor shall fix inside the cubicle a wiring diagram indicating and identifying all
outgoing terminals, components and fuses.
Special precautions shall be taken in the sizing of the battery and charger for seasonal
conditions, and all equipment shall be adequately rated for the prevailing site conditions.
Although two or more auxiliary or limit switches may initially be set up to give simultaneous
operation, it is impossible to ensure that such simultaneous operation still be maintained over
an extended period. The use of duplicate auxiliary or limit switches to provide the same
effective status signal to avoid the possibility of a system malfunction due to the above will
not be accepted.
Where a valve or penstock status signal is to be used in more than one circuit (e.g. control
and indication), one set of auxiliary or limit switch contacts only, together with a slave relay
if necessary, shall be used to initiate the operation of all such circuits.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-4-361
4 Measurements
4.1 Electromagnetic flow meters
Electromagnetic flow meters shall be in accordance with the following:
- Meters shall be of the short form, having a modulated, direct current excitation and
inherent total zero stability.
- The power consumption shall not exceed 16 watts per 100mm of diameter.
- The output shall be 0/4-20 mA or 0 – 10 V and the system accuracy shall be within ± 1 %
or actual flow across the full range of the instrument.
- A test certificate shall be provided for each instrument.
- The field coils shall be fully encapsulated.
- The equipment shall be guaranteed to be suitable for the ambient and process liquid
temperatures.
- Each flow meter primary shall be supplied with a neoprene liner and electrodes of the
material best suited to the particular process fluid.
- Primary units shall be suitable for accidental submergence to a depth of 3 metres.
- The Contractor shall provide primary units having flanges in accordance with the relevant
Specifications relating to pipes, flanges, fittings, etc.
- The Contractor shall ensure that all primary units are rated to withstand the maximum
possible fluid pressure, including possible surge pressures.
- Each primary unit shall be supplied and installed complete with a dismantling joint to
permit removal for repair and inspection.
- The flow meter equipment shall be supplied complete with amplifier (converter), drive
unit (if applicable) and all cable for connecting between the components. The termination
box shall be sealed to IP68 minimum.
- The amplifier/converter shall be fully screened to prevent interference from adjacent
equipment and shall be remote from the electrodes.
- The amplifier/converter shall incorporate voltage stabilisation to ensure maintenance of
system accuracy with a supply variation of ± 10 %.
- The Contractor shall provide a length of pipe having the same length and being flanged as
the flow meter primary, to replace the meter should this have to be removed for repair.
- The flow meter primary shall incorporate an electrode (or electrodes) to detect when the
pipe is not full. The detector output shall control circuits within the converter to interrupt
the analogue signal and initiate an indication of the “pipe not full” condition.
The acoustic transducers shall be non-intrusive and arranged so that they may be removed
without shutting down the process line.
All materials in contact with the process liquid shall be suitable for use in the specified
application.
All items of equipment attached to the pipe an/or pipe insert shall be of non-corrosive
material, designed to withstand continuous submergence to a pressure of 3 m head and be
guaranteed to be suitable for the temperature and process pressures, including maximum
possible surge pressures.
The transmitter shall process the signals from the acoustic transducers and shall:
- provide an output of 0/4-20 mA or 0 –10 V proportional to flow;
- be suitable for direct or wall mounting with up to 30 m of cable;
- incorporate contacts to initiate an alarm in the event of malfunction;
- incorporate temperature compensation;
- include facilities for field checking and zero adjustment.
The complete system shall operate within as accuracy of ± 1.5 % of full-scale deflection over
the full ambient temperature range. Attest certificates shall be provided for each set of
equipment.
Each primary unit shall be supplied and installed complete with a dismantling joint to permit
removal for repair or inspection.
The sensing lines shall be installed with a continuous slope to avoid blocking by
condensation in the pipe. Stopcocks shall be provided close to the tapping points.
The equipment shall consist of a sensor incorporating both transmitter and receiver, together
with a separate control unit.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-4-363
The equipment shall be provided with automatic temperature compensation, and shall be
suitable for operation in the designated application under the specified climatic conditions.
The sensor shall be suitable for mounting in the open, or within an enclosed tank, and shall
be totally enclosed to IP68.
The control units shall incorporate facilities for adjusting independently both zero and span,
and shall have an output of 0/4-20 mA or 0-10 V proportional to level.
The overall accuracy of the level measurements shall be within ± 1,0 % of the instrument
span.
The connection between the sensor and control unit shall be via commercially available
screened cable, and the equipment shall operate with up to 150 metres of such cable.
The Contractor shall ensure that each equipment is suitable for the application, particularly
with regard to the blocking distance and transmitted beam angle or cone.
The Contractor shall provide, where applicable, a canopy above the sensor and/or the control
unit to provide a protection from direct sunlight.
The Contractor shall provide the necessary sample pumps, pressure reducing valves, isolation
and control valves for the sample pipework from the tapping on the water pipe through the
instrument to a drain point to be agreed. All high-pressure connections to the process,
isolating and pressure reducing valves shall be bronze. Pipework shall be plastic coated
2-4-364 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
copper. Low-pressure pipework and fittings shall be uPVC. Pipework and wiring shall be run
on traywork provided under this contract.
Each transmitter shall give a local display (either analogue or digital) of the turbidity in NTU
and shall provide an isolated 4-20mA output for monitoring by a PLC and SCADA system.
Accuracy to be at least +/- 1 % of range.
4.8 UV-absorption
UV-absorption shall comply the following as a minimum:
- purpose measurement: continuous in-line measurement of UV absorption of water at 254
nm (UV monitor);
- UV254 is used as surrogate parameter for the colour of the raw water;
- dual-beam measuring method (for high stability);
- range UV254 absorption: 0,005 – 0,250 cm-1 (colour 0 – 40 Hazen), average 0,16 cm-1;
- accuracy: 0,001 cm-1.
4.9 pH
pH monitors shall comply with the following as a minimum:
- be of the submersion, insertion, or flow through type;
- produce a current output proportional to measured pH in the sample;
- have a measuring range 0-14 pH;
- be accurate to +/-0,05pH;
- incorporate automatic temperature compensation;
- include separate high and low setpoints, which are adjustable over the entire measuring
range. Setpoints shall have indication lights on the unit face;
- be enclosed in an IP65 enclosure;
- be capable of cabinet, panel front and wall mounting;
- include a local 4 digit LED display.
Process analysers are generally complicated systems and shall be properly applied and
installed in order to ensure a high degree of accuracy with trouble free operation.
Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations shall be adhered to.
For installations in areas containing Chlorination Equipment the following precautions shall
be taken:
- exposed copper and copper-based alloys shall be avoided;
- cable exit and entry to the area shall be at high level and cable ways sealed.
Every effort shall be made to keep sensitive electrical/electronic equipment out of chlorine
storage and chlorination rooms but where this is unavoidable care is to be exercised in the
choice of materials used.
Residual Analysers
Free residual chlorine values shall be continuously monitored by duty and standby analysers
with a minimum accuracy of plus or minus 2 % of span (± 0,01 mg/l). The operating range of
the analyser shall correspond to the maximum chlorine residual with a capability to withstand
chlorine concentrations up to 10 times its maximum range and a recovery time of less than 5
minutes following out of range excursions.
The chlorine residual indicator/transmitter shall incorporate local indication with high and
low level alarm initiation adjustable either side of the set point anywhere within the range of
the instrument. Panel mounted adjustable electronic timers shall inhibit short-term variations
not constituting a true alarm. The transmitter shall provide a fully isolated signal for remote
control and indication.
The sample water inlet to the measuring cell shall incorporate isolating and pressure reducing
valves, a flow controller, and flow rate indicator to ensure the sample water enters the cell at
the correct flow rate and pressure. In addition, the sample water inlet arrangement shall
incorporate a strainer to prevent foreign particles entering the measuring cell.
Where necessary, pH buffer facilities in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions shall
be provided.
The outputs of the individual load cells, before filling the vessel shall be measured. The
outputs shall be similar. As a general rule, an imbalance of less than 10 % is satisfactory. If
the outputs differ greatly, this indicates an overload situation on the load cells exists. This
shall be corrected by placing shim plates underneath the load cells with the lower outputs.
For hoppers, vessels and silos, it is important that the centre of gravity lies within the locus of
the load cells and they are in the same horizontal plane.
2-4-366 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
All connections to the vessel shall be decoupled by the use of flexible couplings.
Other instrumentation required for control of the process shall be provided as necessary.
The complete system shall provide an accuracy of within ± 0,75 % of span, with a linearity
better than ± 0,1 %.
For installations where the sump depth does not exceed 3 m, the sensor shall be supplied and
installed as a rigid assembly comprising a stainless steel tube, a tube holder (both as used for
control electrodes) and the transducer, with the cable passing through the tube. The
transducers shall be a close fit, located completely within the tube at the lower end. The
assembly shall be fixed at not less than two places to the sump wall and installed with the
bottom of the tube just clear of the sump invert.
For all installations the cable between the transducer and the controller/transmitter shall be
one continuous length, and kept as short as is reasonably possible. This cable shall be run in
conduit and installed well clear of all AC mains and power cables.
All fixings, brackets, etc. as required for the complete installation shall be provided.
For all applications, sufficient electrodes and associated controls shall be provided to prevent
“hunting” between the two states.
- have an output relay with double pole changeover contacts of suitable material for the
application;
- have a light emitting diode mounted on the front panel to indicate when the relay is
energised;
- have a lockable sensitivity control potentiometer;
- be capable of operating at a distance of up to 100 m from the electrodes;
- have a voltage on the electrodes not exceeding 25 volts.
- The electrode and holder shall comply with the following;
- The electrode holder shall be of the heavy duty type, fully weatherproof, constructed form
die cast aluminium and provided with a mounting flange having a minimum O.D. of
25mm a wall thickness not less than 2,6mm. The lower end of the electrode shall be
sealed and the upper end shall be locked to the insulator by a brass clamp.
- Cable entry shall be via a standard screwed gland entry.
- Each electrode shall be firmly secured to avoid any movement due to turbulence or flow
velocity. The securing brackets shall be of the same material as the electrode and shall be
installed above top water level.
- Where the electrodes pass through securing brackets; they shall be protected by heat
shrunk sleeving extending from 300mm above the bracket to 300mm below the bracket.
The float shall be of robust design and comprise a mercury switch having changeover
contacts encapsulated in hard plastic foam and connected to a 3 core cable. The whole
assembly shall be covered and hermetically sealed in Hypalon or similar material.
With the tilting action that occurs on rising level, the contracts shall change over, but there
shall be a dead band between opening one contact and closing the other, during which period
both contacts shall be open. This dead band shall operate over an arc approximately 20°
either side of the horizontal.
The contacts shall be rated for a minimum of 5 amps at 100 volts. The voltage on the
contacts shall not exceed 55 volts (nominal) to earth.
In all applications the installation shall be complete with suitable means of preventing the
float (and lead) from movement due to wind or liquid turbulence.
Where float switches are to be used in applications under which they may be submerged
during normal operation (e.g. pump control and/or low level alarm); they shall be attached to
a weighted chain to minimise movement due to turbulence and also to provide means of
raising the units for maintenance and repair. All brackets, fixings, etc. as necessary for the
complete installation shall be provided. The chain/float assembly shall be installed such that
the point of suspension is not less than 400mm from any side wall.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-4-369
- intended for installation on an inclined surface shall be suitable for the application and
when so mounted, the accuracy shall be maintained over the full range;
- accept input signals of 0/4-20 mA or 0-10 V.
Digital indicators
The digital indicators shall have a 4-digit display with floating decimal point and shall:
- display positive and negative readings;
- display digits approximately 14mm high;
- have standard DIN format 96 x 48mm;
- accept a 0/4 – 20 mA or 0-10 V input and display in the relevant engineering units;
- have a sampling rate not less than 10 per second;
- include a remotely initiated display hold facility;
- be powered from the 24 Volt battery supply.
Meter relays
Meter relays shall comply with the requirements as detailed in the Particular Technical
Requirements, but shall additionally incorporate one or two adjustable set point contacts for
alarm or control.
The set point shall be visible and adjustable from the front and the signal output shall be via
volt-free change-over contacts of suitable material and rating for the application.
The units shall be located within the cubicle and mounted so that they are easily accessible
for adjustment of set points.
Trip amplifiers required to continue in operation during a period of power failure shall be
supplied from the instrumentation system battery, either directly or via an inverter.
The integrator and counter may be combined into a single unit, or the integrator may be
mounted separately from the numerical display unit.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-4-371
The counter shall be flush mounting with a matt or semi-matt bezel, and shall match all other
instruments on the same panel as regards style, finish and appearance.
If a counter reset facility is provided, this shall be arranged such that accidental operation is
impossible, and should preferably not be located on the front panel.
Integrators required to continue operating during a period of power failure shall be supplied
from the instrumentation system battery, either directly or via an inverter.
A low signal cut-off facility shall be provided on all integrators, and this shall be adjustable
over the range of 0.5 % to 5 % of the flow.
Integrated flows shall be in cubic metres and this, together with the measurement designation
and any multiplying factor, shall be clearly marked on the face of the counter, or on a
matching label immediately below the counter.
Unless otherwise stated in the application clause, the multiplying factors shall be as follows:
0 - 5.000 m3/day x1
Alternatively
0 - 60 l/s x1
61 - 600 l/s x 10
The Contractor shall submit for information of the Project Manager details of integration
rates and multiplying factors for all integrators to be supplied under the Contract.
Predetermining counters
Where a liquor sampler is used and/or where indicated in the application clause, the relevant
integrator shall incorporate a predetermining counter having a minimum of 3 digits. The
predetermining counter shall be on the front of the instrument with thumb-wheel setting
facilities and shall operate such that a relay with changeover contacts is energised when the
2-4-372 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
pre-set quantity is reached. The relay shall remain energised for approximately 1 second,
following which the counter shall automatically reset and start counting again.
All relays operating on a DC supply shall have a surge suppression diode connected directly
across the coil.
All relays and the associated wiring shall be protected by suitably rated fuses.
Relays having different contact arrangements or coil voltages shall not be interchangeable. A
permanent means of identification shall be fixed to each relay base and this identification
shall be in accordance with the circuit diagram reference.
Where voltages from a remote source (i.e. voltages which cannot be readily isolated from
within the cubicle), are connected to a relay or associated terminals, fuses etc., the Contractor
shall ensure that all such live parts are fully shrouded and that appropriate warning notices
are fitted.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that AC relays cannot be held in due to
capacitance effects on long switching lines. Where such a possibility exists, a DC supply
shall be provided.
The switches shall be of the type having a rotary action to select the operation and a push
button action to initiate the operation.
DC operated lamps
All DC indicator lamps shall have diodes in series to prevent reverse current when making
lamp tests.
AC operated lamps
In applications where a battery supply is not available, status indicator lamps shall be
operated on available AC supplies. For these applications the indicator shall be a low-voltage
lamp supplied via a transformer incorporated within the light unit. The lamps shall have a
voltage rating higher than the transformer secondary.
All local controls get an emergency stop button which turns off the concerned drive not only
in automatic mode but also when in manual mode.
4.26 Communication
In each new low voltage switchgear room of both WWTP´s a stationary telephone is required
which is connected to the existing telephone system of the WWTP.
In the case of fault or alarm of WWTP extensions the operation staff on site or the on-call
service will be notified by cable connection to the existing emergency via potential free
contacts in upstream.
As far as the fault message is not acknowledged via potential free contact in downstream, it
has to be repeated periodically. The operator in charge shall then acknowledge the alarm and
initiate respective measures.
2-5-374 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
5.1 General
All equipment required to fulfil the requirements shall be industry standard proven
computing equipment with a demonstrable long-term life cycle and support.
To permit other manufacturers’ equipment, e.g. PLC’s, to be added to the SCADA system,
all equipment shall, wherever possible, interface using open-system communication
protocols. The SCADA system will be designed together with a process engineer that has had
experience in at least 3 other similar sized plants.
Below an example on how the electrical system and the control system should be provided:
System access
Users of the system shall be allocated individual passwords allowing each user an
appropriate level of access commensurate with their requirements, responsibilities and areas
of knowledge and interest.
Data only shall be generally available to all system users. Data and control shall be limited to
those personnel with the knowledge and responsibility to take control actions.
Mimic diagrams
Mimic diagrams are required to present a pictorial representation of the plant and its present
status. Features required are as follows:
- display of fixed (background) diagrammatic plant information and text;
- display of variable information i.e. symbols or text displaying plant status;
- easy picture creation, possibly using a CAD style package.
Display of variables
Variables can be considered as digital on/off parameters, analogue or totalisers.
Digitals may be either status (e.g., running/stopped) or alarm points, and shall be displayed
by:
- text changing;
- symbol colour changing;
- symbol shape changing;
- text or symbol flashing.
It must be possible to associate more than one digital point with a symbol so that more than
two colours/shapes can have operational meaning. For example, a pump may be shown in
four colours indicating running/stopped/failed/non-operational.
In addition, it shall be possible to associate any number of symbols within different mimics
with a particular digital point.
2-5-376 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Display attributes
Using the display facilities described above, the mimic diagrams shall indicate the following
attributes for analogue, digital and totaliser points:
Picture creation
It is essential that picture creation is a straightforward procedure; a CAD type package would
be suitable. It must be possible to create symbols which may then be used in any orientation,
size and colour and to create a symbol library, i.e. a part of diagram which may then be used
many times. It must be possible to display, on any single mimic diagram, information from
anywhere within the system.
Help pages
Help pages shall be available within the system, to assist the operators in dealing with
received alarm conditions. These pages will be compiled by the plant managers and will
provide advice as to which staff shall be notified of which alarms.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-5-377
Help pages may be presented as individual pages accessed from a mimic, or as a window
superimposed on a mimic.
Graphs
Graphical representation of historical data is required, with a selectable time base and the
ability to put up to four graphs on display at once on the same axes, using different colours.
The system must be easy to use, with automatic default facilities so that only a minimum of
instructions need be given to the system to obtain each plot.
Bar charts
A bar char type representation of analogue variables is required. This is required on mimic
diagrams, and must be capable of horizontal or vertical orientation, with selectable scaling.
Width of bars must be selectable so that the feature can also be used for such items as tank
level pictorial representations.
Logging On/Off
Every user of the SCADA system shall be required to log on (i.e. activate) his terminal when
he wishes to operate on it. The system will be aware of which terminals are logged on and
the access rights of the user and will therefore be aware of where to send certain information.
Alarm facilities
General
Digital points within the system shall be capable of operating as either status (e.g.
running/stopped) or alarm points (e.g. normal/failed). A digital alarm point shall enter the
Alarm State when it is either a logical ‘1’ or logical ‘0’ as designated in the system set-up for
each point, the opposite state being the normal condition.
Analogue points shall be provided with two high alarm limits (high and high-high), and two
low alarm limits (low and low-low). Should an analogue value either rise or fall from a value
considered to be normal, a first stage high or low alarm limit will be encountered resulting in
a new alarm condition. Should the value continue to rise (or fall) it will then encounter the
second stage high-high or low-low alarm limit again resulting in a new alarm condition.
Alarm priorities
Every alarm generated within the system shall be allocated an alarm priority to indicate the
importance of the alarm. Whereas a digital point will have only one alarm priority, an
analogue point will have three. This will allow the relative importance of the first and second
stage high and high-high (low and low-low) alarms to be set. The alarm priority is used in
conjunction with the ‘area of interest’ of the users logged onto the system to determine where
and when a new alarm is enunciated. The priority of an alarm shall change if required
depending on the time and date.
Alarm annunciation
Alarms are to be annunciated on the appropriate operator workstations both visually and
audibly, and have clear and unambiguous acceptance procedures. High priority alarms shall
be presented for acceptance before low priority ones.
Alarms filtering
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-5-379
The SCADA system shall have a “toolkit” of facilities that may be applied to individual
points in the system in order to prevent unnecessary annunciation of alarms. These shall
typically include:
- analogues:
· dead-bank;
· delays before initial;
· minimum alarm repeat interval;
· logical suppression of new alarm if other conditions are present;
· averaging values in PLC.
- digitals:
· delay before initial alarm;
· minimum alarm repeat interval;
· logical suppression of new alarm if other conditions are present.
·
Users subject to authorisation (i.e. correct level of access) shall be able to manually suppress
an alarm, e.g., if a transducer is faulty and is being particularly troublesome. The suppression
of alarms shall be logged to the event list.
Derived alarms
A combinational and sequential logic package is required within the SCADA system,
allowing signals to be combined to form derived alarms. These may be combinations of
analogue and digital information obtained from different sites (e.g., a pump may be running
at a pumping station but no flow entering the associated inlet works resulting in a derived
alarm indicating a potential burst).
5.3 Controls
Manual Control
It shall be possible to perform control operations (e.g. remote pump start/stop) from any of
the operator consoles. Access to controls will be limited by the access rights assigned to the
individual passwords for various operatives (see System Access).
The issuing of control instructions shall take precedence over the scanning for alarms.
Automatic Controls
Automatic control features shall be available within the SCADA system, and fall into two
categories:
- Profile type controls where a working pattern (e.g. of reservoir level) is downloaded to a
PLC for use by a local control system. New profiles may be sent for each day or week
etc., as required.
- Combinational and sequential control:
2-5-380 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
There are circumstances where the only practicable way of closing a control loop is via the
SCADA system, although this should be avoided whenever possible. The package used for
alarm derivation will also fulfil the automatic control requirements. The following facilities
shall be provided as a minimum:
- logical AND/OR/NOT/EXOR/EQUALS;
- IF-THEN-ELSE Constructions;
- arithmetic operations including >,$ , > , #, =, +, -, H, ), /;
- logical constructions including time and data;
- look-up tables, with interpolating facilities;
- input to functions from any system point including digital, analogues, totalisers, controls
from a keyboard, set point input from a keyboard;
- output from functions to be available as digital, analogue or totaliser points, or transmitted
to any PLC as a control or set point;
- access to point attributes in addition to present value, including: suppressed, telemetry
failed, in alarm (and for analogues, which alarm level).
An example of a regular report which may be produced from the system is the following,
designed to be made available to the works manager each morning:
- service reservoirs: levels (%);
- treatment works: previous day’s output;
- river flows: at points where flows have to be maintained for abstraction purposes;
- rainfall: previous day;
- impounding reservoirs: level;
- alarms that have occurred during the night.
- Leap Years.
All data shall be logged at GMT/UCT + 2 hours, but automatically displayed in the
appropriate local time adjusted for daylight saving.
It shall be possible to define process point files, calculated/derived pint files, and remote PLC
files, to include:
- meaningful point identification and description;
- allocation of points to groups/locations;
- range of analogue values in Engineering Units;
- alarm limits/categories;
- scan control/frequency;
- report control (whether change of state is to be logged to the alarm/event printer);
- save control (whether values are to be archived);
- MIS control (whether values may be transferred to other systems).
2-5-382 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
2 From change of state being detected by the Dispatcher to updating the 0,5
SCADA database
3 From change of state in the SCADA database to updating the alarm list 0,5
4 From change of state in the SCADA database to updating the active 0,5
mimic
5 All requests for mimic displays, alarm lists and help pages from the 3
completion of the operator request.
6 All requests for trend displays and event lists from the completion of the
operator request.
SCADA system
In addition to the raw operational data, a long-term archive of analogue max/min/mean
values, pump hours run etc. will be maintained. Values stored will be as detailed within the
Particular Specifications.
Essential services, e.g. UPS, security etc. shall be monitored by the SCADA system.
Printing devices
The system shall be provided with two types of printing device:
Alarm/Event Printer
To provide a hard copy log of all alarms and significant events, e.g. operator sign-on or
control override issued, a medium speed dot matrix printer shall be provided. The printer
shall be capable of 300 characters per second, 132 characters per line, multiple colours (to
differentiate alarms and level of alarms from events) and operation on continuous fan fold
stationery.
Colour Printer
To provide high quality printed output for report summaries, programme development,
copies of mimic displays, historical trends etc., a high speed colour ink-jet printer shall be
provided.
- D.I.N. rail mounted terminals shall be fitted in the bottom of the cabinet allow the
termination of all control and sequencing cabling. The terminals shall accept up to 4mm2
stranded conductor.
- All output ports from the controller shall be correctly fused in order to protect the
controller (by means of fused terminals).
- The PLC shall be capable of supporting the following component parts either inherently
or via expansion when required process I/O as detailed elsewhere:
· power supply;
· central processor;
· gigital input;
· digital output;
· analogue input;
· analogue output;
· communications;
· high speed pulse counter.
- field contact inputs shall be debounced such that status changes will not be recognised
unless the contact condition is maintained for at least 25 milliseconds.
5.10.8 Protocols
- Provision of the communication required to satisfy this Specifications shall include all
necessary protocols for its successful operation.
- A serial RS 232 port shall be available to enable interfacing to local PC´s for MMI
purposes to allow local database and control sequence loading, interrogation or
modification. The port shall cater for communication with a suitable encoding device.
5.11 Communications
5.11.1 General
The Contractor shall supply, install and commission all necessary communications
equipment and software to provide a complete integrated communications network for the
SCADA system.
The longest scan time for PLC with radio communications shall not exceed two minutes
under full system utilisation.
Type approval numbers issued by the National Frequency Allocation Committee in the
country of manufacture shall be supplied, together with appropriate CCIR recommendations,
appropriate National and International Standards Specifications met by the equipment at the
time of Tender.
Radio system
The radio system shall conform to the latest regulations and requirements current at the time
of delivery. The radio system shall be of the following type:
Frequency: UHF as allocated by the Frequency Committee
Modulation: FM
Base Mode: Full Duplex
PLC Mode: TWO-Frequency Simplex
Channel Spacing: 12.5 kHz
failure. The units may either be wall-mounted or installed in the PLC enclosure (the preferred
option).
The alarm signal shall be transmitted to the SCADA system when a changeover occurs due
to a radio failure.
The R.F. output of the radio units shall be variable from maximum down to 0.5 watt.
Attenuation pads shall be provided in the transmit leg only, and the radio output set to
maximum in the final system configuration.
The alarm signal shall be transmitted to the SCADA system when a changeover occurs due
to a radio failure.
The R.F. output of the radio units shall be variable from maximum down to 0,5 watt.
Attenuation pads shall be provided in the transmit leg only and the radio output set to
maximum in the final system configuration.
The base station radio shall be forced to change the duty radio at a user definable interval
(normally every 24 hours).
The aerial and support structure shall be capable of withstanding winds gusting to 160
km/hour without damage. The Contractor shall provide all supporting calculations.
The contractor shall supply to the Project Manager all necessary calculations and information
to demonstrate the aerial wind performance and structural integrity of the aerial support
structure and all necessary documentation and calculations to enable the appropriate planning
for the aerial and it’s support structure.
2-5-388 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The Contractor shall supply and install all necessary low loss coaxial down leads for
connection to the radio unit and lightning protection for the aerial system. The lightning
protection system shall include use of aerial elements at earth potential, the aerial support
structure, the test link and the earth rods/spikes.
Mast structures
The Contractor may use the following mast types, however the contractor shall assess the
requirements for the mast structure:
- 3m or 5m Pole
A 50mm diameter aluminium pole with a 300mm standoff bracket kit for building mounting,
aerial clamps and 15 metres of low loss coaxial cable.
- 6m pole
A free standing circular or octagonal column of aluminium finish with bottom flush fitting
door opening, tamper-proof lock and stainless steel earth stud.
Poles may be flange mounted or cast in a concrete foundation. A 35mm diameter PVC duct
shall be installed between the pole and the PLC building. 25 metres of low loss coaxial cable
shall be allowed at each 6m pole.
- Guyed pole
A 50mm diameter aluminium pole secured by stainless steel guyed lines mounted on a
concrete base. A 35mm diameter PVC duct shall be installed between the pole and the PLC
building. 25 metres of low loss coaxial cable shall be allowed at each guyed pole.
- Lattice
Lattice structures shall be constructed of steel and shall be hot dip galvanised to provide a
maintenance free finish. The coaxial down-lead shall be enclosed within a galvanised steel
conduit to a height of 2m above ground level. A 35mm diameter PVC duct shall be installed
between the pole and the PLC building. 25 metres of low loss coaxial cable shall be allowed
at each lattice structure.
Modems
The contractor shall supply and install all modems and interconnecting wiring to the SCADA
system and telephone equipment as appropriate.
PLC equipment modems shall form part of the PLC unit and shall be compatible with the
associated “line connection” modules.
All modems shall be presented to the national and local service provider and shall comply
with V21, V23, V26, and V29 (III-1) as appropriate.
5.12 Testing
The Contractor shall provide for system testing as detailed.
Test 2:
- as test 1;
- performing daily system archive.
test 3:
- as test 1;
2-5-390 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
test 4:
- as test 1;
- performing screen dump;
- printing daily report.
The simulation package shall use the SCADA system to demonstrate proper performance
under full utilisation conditions.
The Contractor shall provide evidence that the tests (FAT/SAT) have been successfully
performed prior to the witnessing by the Project Manager.
The witnesses of both parties shall initial all entries within the log.
Copies of the log shall be provided to the Contracting Authority on completion of the Factory
Acceptance Test.
Any test that is deemed unsuccessful may be retried following any remedial action that may
be necessary.
If the system should fail any test and it is apparent that the fault may have affected the result
of tests previously regarded as successful, any or all of the tests affected may be re-tested.
To allow all participants to fully understand all aspects of the Factory Acceptance Test, the
Factory Acceptance Test Specifications as agreed between all parties shall be issued with the
Contractor’s Project Specifications (CPS).
System management
The Factory Acceptance Test shall include, but not be limited to, the following as defined
within Contractor’s Project Specifications.
Hardware
the hardware configuration being tested shall be fully detailed and cross-referenced against
the Tender Return Document.
Picture configuration
The tests shall exercise the picture configuration commands available to the privileged
operators, including:
- the creation of picture pages, to include foreground/dynamic and background/static
picture elements;
- the modification of picture pages, to include foreground/dynamic and background/static
picture elements;
- the deletion, copying and renaming of pictures;
- any function control key usage;
- examples of all picture types, e.g.:
· static information pages (e.g. indices);
· mimic pictures for information display and control monitoring;
· alarm list pages;
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-5-393
Data collection
These tests shall exercise the data collection commands available to the privileged operators,
including:
- the collection of digital, analogue and derived parameters;
- the collection of all data from outstations at frequencies defined by the privileged
operator;
- the inhibition of data collection from a PLC;
- the inhibition from data collection from an individual point;
- the editing of stored data (subject to correct level of access).
Supervisory control
These tests shall exercise the supervisory control commands, including:
- The creation and downline loading of control sequences;
- Digital (e.g. open/close) and analogue (e.g. set point) controls of individual control points;
- Revertive checks to ensure the correct control point is addresses
Alarm/event handling
These tests shall exercise the alarm and event reporting procedures, including:
- digital and analogue alarms:
· reported on the alarm/event printer;
· logged to disc;
· reported to the appropriate operator consoles.
- events, e.g. issue remedial control command:
· are only issued from appropriate operator consoles;
· logged to the alarm/event printer;
· logged to disc;
· are subject to correct level of access and regions of interest.
- alarm acceptance/acknowledgement procedures;
- alarm list interrogation procedures;
- alarm list printing;
- alarm inhibit for an individual point.
Data logging
These tests shall exercise the data logging and archiving procedures including:
2-5-394 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
- tests to ensure all data/alarms collected are logged to the on-line archive storage;
- tests to ensure data can be archived to and recalled from long term archive media.
PLC programming
These tests shall exercise the PLC sequence programming procedures, including:
- sequence program editing, compilation and loading;
- the ability to load new sequences on demand by a privileged operator.
General
The requirement is for a Hot Duty/Standby SCADA Dispatcher installed in each control
centre room of relevant WWTP:
The computer equipment shall be the latest IBM PC compatible, operating under the current
Microsoft Windows Operating system (minimum MS Windows Server 2008), necessary to
meet the system performance requirements as specified within the General Specification for
SCADA. Furniture for the control centre shall be supplied and installed by the Contractor, to
include:
3 no. flat top desks complete with integral cabling system and electrical sockets.
1 no. lockable cupboard to be located beneath desk.
2 no. swivel chairs with a duty of 8 hours continuous use.
Furniture shall be matching and presented topresented to the Project Manager.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-5-395
System Availability
The system availability shall be in accordance with market availability at the time of deliver.
The Contractor shall demonstrate within his Preliminary Design how the system availability
shall be satisfied.
Data Storage
The SCADA system shall provide on-line historical data for all inputs/outputs on the system,
whether real or derived signals, at:
- Digital signals: On change of state.
- Analogue: Every 5-10 seconds and significant change.
- Integrated e.g. flow, mean, max/min, 15 minute, daily, weekly, monthly, yearly.
Data Transfer
The Contractor shall provide the ability to export data from the SCADA system to other
computer systems via the Microsoft Excel product. The data also should be capable of
operating from remote control via WEB so as to allow for home operation as well as via
smart phone technology. It also allow for receiving test messages of alarms
System Access
The Contractor shall configure the system in accordance with the General Requirements for
SCADA.
Mimic Displays
The mimics listed below shall be designed, configured and commissioned by the Contractor
under this Contract. All mimic displays shall be submitted to the Project Manager for
informatio prior to configuration. All mimics shall be suitable for display all sizes of monitor
supplied within the Contract and careful design of the mimic shall be used to this end. Where
mimics replicate those configured for the local PLC display, the mimics shall be identical to
those displayed on the PLC display. The following requirements are required for all mimics:
- The background colour for all mimics shall be subject to the approval of the Project
Manager.
- All flows shall be displayed in engineering units as specified in the I/O listing of the
agreed Functional Design Specification.
- Each mimic shall have navigation 'pushbutton' to the process overview, the geographical
overview and associated process mimics.
- The symbols used to describe the plant items shall be subject to the approval of the
Project Manager.
- Mimics shall display process lines as colour dynamic with arrow indication of flow
direction.
2-5-396 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
The Contractor shall allow for the following number of additional mimics as instructed by
the Project Manager.
The system will allow for "zoom in". The screens will show the process is a logical graphic
manner. Each screen will allow for additional pop-up screens for operation. In addition each
screen will allow for automatic graph generation of analogue data – both current and
historical. The SCADA system will allow for complete data transfer from the local PLC
operation the various components to the HMI
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-6-397
Cables have to run in one length without splice boxes or muffles. All cables have to run
properly adjusted, side by side, with mutual distance, especially as regards power cables, so
that a good ventilation is guaranteed (DIN/VDE 0298, part 2). The filling factor of cable
racks may not exceed 70 %.
All designation systems for cables and lines have to be executed in English and Arabic. The
marking of the cables with identifying bands are to be effected durable with a distance of 20
m. All cable selling ends on devices, equipment and machines are to be marked with
respective cable numbers.
For the final dimensioning of the conductor cross sections and the corresponding fuse, the
DIN/VDE 0100- and the DIN/VDE-0298-standards are valid, especially the reduction factors
for method of installation, cable bundling and the expected ambient temperatures.
The voltage drop between the feed-in and the electrical consumer shall not exceed 3 % of the
nominal values. Every drive and every measuring gets a separate lead wire.
The proof for the compliance of the release conditions for over-current- and fault current-
protective devices are to be provided in tabular form for each line/cable and with indication
of the line/cable length.
On principle, the request is valid that the degree of protection of the device to be connected
has to be observed. It is the contractor’s duty to check the available cable entries in view to
functionality and degree of protection. If necessary, the glands, screwing, entrances and so
forth are to be modified in order to meet the demand. In case of non-compliance, the
2-6-398 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
contractor has to perform corrective measures. Possible operating failures are to be borne by
him.
For all connections it has to be obligatory that a perfect strain relief of the cables is
guaranteed.
All reserve strands of cables have to be put on respective terminals and are to be indicated in
the documentation. The terminals for the reserve strands are to be marked according to the
documentation.
Cable racks and gutters consisting of metal have to be connected electrically conductive and
to be included in the equipotential bonding. The used materials for the cable routes are to be
adapted to the local demands. Sheets are to be used with ground perforation, depth at least 60
mm. If necessary (e.g. for common embedding of energy- and measuring cables), separation
strips are to be used. If necessary, cutting edges or drill holes have to be after treated and
equipped with an edge protection.
Fixings among each other and on brackets, walls, ceilings and so forth have to be executed
with typical accessories. For accident prevention, stirrups are to be equipped with plastic
protection caps on the bottom cutting edge.
In the domain of building installations, all socket-outlets are to be provided with their fusing
number of the corresponding sub-distribution switchgear. The same signboards as for the
cable markings can be used.
If necessary, an air conditioning and electrical heating is to be provided for low voltage
room. The room temperature of the low voltage rooms of the WWTP during the summer
period shall not exceed 30 °C when reaching 40°C outside temperature, and shall not fall
below 5°C during the winter period.
The inner diameter of a duct shall be 150 mm, but the Contractor may, at his expose, use
ducts of larger size, if required. The specification should mention that the electrical system
will be designed so that surface water does not flood the cable system. The ducts should be
color coded for identification such as green low voltage, yellow very low voltage, blue
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-6-399
communications etc. If larger ducts are used, they shall be of the same diameter along the
entire crossing. It should also be required to specify that manholes long the cable route must
be installed. The material of construction should be specified as well as the strength of the
cover. It also should be marked for identification. Reducing couplings will not be permitted.
Cable entries into buildings and sub-structures, e.g. into the raised floor of the low voltage
switchgear room have to be executed with waterproof cable glands.
Outside junction boxes should be specified. These should be capable of between 5 C and
45C, 10% moisture, rain of 60 mm/hr and winds of up to 120 km/hr. These should be made
of corrosion resistant material – SS316 or FRP and have a IP65
The requirements in view to the quality grade of the glare restriction are to be considered by
selection of luminaries for the different room tasks.
Type, number and arrangement of luminaries are to be adapted to the requirements of the
individual rooms.
Non-maintained emergency lighting shall be provided to ensure safe passage, escape and exit
from buildings, structures and stairways in the event of normal electrical supplies being
interrupted.
In addition a minimum of 20% of the fluorescent fittings installed in process and plant areas
shall act as emergency lighting. These luminaries shall be evenly distributed throughout the
area.
In switch rooms and control rooms 30% of the luminaries shall be three hour non-maintained
emergency type.
A dedicated emergency light test switch shall be provided, in a position accessible from the
respective floor level, adjacent to each emergency luminary.
2-6-400 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Slip-fitter and wall mounted luminaries are to be used. The exterior lighting is switched
either manually by a central switch at the administration building or automatically by a time
limited twilight switch.
Type, number and arrangement will depend on the design and arrangements of the exterior
plants.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-7-401
A fire detection and alarm system shall be provided and installed to cover all buildings as
well as generator and fuel system area.
The fire detection and alarm system shall designed by the Contractor. The design and works
shall strictly comply and be subject to the approval of the Civil Defense.
Each building shall be provided with local addressable control panels for the fire detection
system. This shall be located adjacent to buildings’ main access doors, and shall be powered
from the distribution compartment by a dedicated circuit breaker with a red label “Fire Alarm
- Do not switch off”. The control panel shall be housed in a wall mounted enclosure with
clear Perspex windows displaying the system indicators. The location and area covered by
each zone shall be clearly indicated on a diagram mounted adjacent to the control panel. This
diagram shall be printed on non-combustible media or plastic encapsulated sheet.
8 REQUIREMENTS ON ELECTRICAL
MATERIALS
The materials and equipment used shall comply with the following standards:
For all ratings above 20 amps, fuses shall be of the non-deteriorating HRC cartridge type
complying with IEC 269 and fuse bridges shall be so designed as to permit detection of fuse
rupturing without removing the bridge. Led and screw-in type fuses are not permitted. Test
links in current transformer circuits shall be of the plug-in type.
Individual fuse-link types and rating shall be as shown on the single line/schematic layouts
and distribution schedules.
All fuse ratings have to be confirmed by the Project Manager prior to notification of
readiness for equipment inspection by the Project Manager.
The labelling of fuses, carriers and bases shall comply with IEC 269. Identification labels
fixed to panels, boards and desks for fuses and links shall describe their duty, voltage and
rating.
presented to. Contacts shall have a positive wiping action when closing.
All auxiliary switches, whether in service or not in the first instance, shall be wired up to a
terminal board and shall be arranged in the same sequence on similar equipment.
Auxiliary switches mechanically operated by the load break switches, isolators, etc. have to
be presented to the Project Manager. Contacts shall be mounted in accessible positions, clear
of the operating mechanism of the isolator, etc. and they shall be adequately protected against
accidental electrical shock.
ventilated and the design shall permit removal of lamp and glass without removal of other
parts.
Instruments shall have an external zero adjustment and an adjustable pointer or inscription to
indicate the normal circuit rating for the associated plant.
Instruments shall be positioned so that they can be easily read and the horizontal zero level
shall not be less than 400mm or more than 2.000mm above finished floor level.
Ampere-meters shall have a suppressed scale to indicate the maximum starting current.
Kilowatt-hour meters shall be arranged to register 3 phase 4 wire unbalanced loads except as
otherwise indicated.
All instruments shall be mounted adjacent to the relevant circuit breaker switch or starter
unless otherwise stated.
The Short Time Current Rating should not be less than 3 seconds. The rated secondary
current shall be 5A.
Bar type current transformers have preference over transformers with wound primaries. Short
Time Current factors shall be related to the full fault Short Circuit Current level for one or
three seconds as applicable. Each current transformer shall be earthed through a removable
link from one secondary terminal to the Main Earth Bar.
Current transformers used for indication/metering purposes shall be Class 1; for energising
integrating meters this shall be Class 0.5.
Selector switches shall be of the two or more positions type as required and have a stay-put
action to remain in any selected position. Each position of the selector switches shall be
suitably labelled to indicate their function. The switch handle shall be of the spade type.
8.7 Interlocking
Mechanical and electrical interlocking shall be provided at the main switchboard, between
the main circuit breakers on the incoming electricity supply from the network and the
generator.
8.11 Contractors
Contractors shall be triple pole, moulded case and capable to withstand the short circuit
current in the most severe circumstances. Auxiliary contacts (NO and NC) for control
purposes must be supplied.
Mixed voltages must not be used on different contacts of a specific relay. If necessary
additional relays must be used.
Coils shall be vacuum impregnated or guaranteed to be suitable for use in tropical conditions.
Terminals of the relay bases shall be of the front connected screw clamp type. The relay-
mounting panel shall be prepared for future extension.
For preventing malfunctioning due to the relay being loosened from its base; it shall be
secured by a retaining bar or clip.
The Contractor shall take care to ensure that relay contacts and associated wiring are suitably
fuse-protected.
To both relay and base a permanent identification shall be affixed in line with the circuit
diagram reference.
Push button control units, with the exception of emergency stop units, shall be provided with
guard rings.
All push buttons, selector switches and indicator units shall be provided with legend plates
bearing the appropriate legends.
Colours of push buttons and indicator lights shall be in accordance with IEC standards.
Testing and start-up of the electrical equipment will be performed together with the hydraulic
and mechanical testing plant. The procedures to be followed are described under the General
Requirements for the execution of contractual works. All special tools and testing apparatus
has to be arranged for the testing purposes, specialized technician to perform all related tests
as per standards.
All expenditures for the functional tests and the start-up have to be included in the tender. It
has to be considered that further tunings and settings of parameters could be necessary even
until one year upon the start-up, include:
Prior to start-up, the contractor will check the entire equipment in view to its functionality.
All equipment parts are to be examined in view of their complete functionality. Not only an
individual device- and information verification has to be performed, but the entire
interdependent functionality from the process control to the respective signalling devices,
processing blocks and the automatic control level has to be proved. As far as process data are
not available, they have to be simulated.
During this phase, all operating conditions have to be performed. The step-by-step start-up
can only be carried out upon the successful functional tests.
On request of the Project Manager, the Contractor is obliged to demonstrate the functionality
of the plant under “dry conditions”.
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-9-407
Furthermore, the functional testing of electrical equipment includes the verification of the
correct operation of all switching, measuring, the checks on keeping the desired temperature
of all engines and drives, insulation tests for all power circuits (voltage tests) etc.
For the WWTP the correct operation of the permanent emergency generator set, and thus the
operation of the entire electrical plant under emergency power supply, has to be simulated
and tested under power cut conditions.
Performing the tests, the Contractor shall use only tested measuring instruments. A copy of
the test certificate for test instruments shall be submitted at request of the Project Manager.
9.2 Start-up
Prior to start-up, all necessary certificates and test protocols have to be submitted to the
Project Manager.
The starting up of the electrical plant is effected together with the commissioning of the
mechanical equipment and the process technology. The Contractor shall carry out the start-up
including final functional tests of all connected components. These will be carried out at the
discretion of the Project Manager. Changes and adjustments will be made where necessary
for proper operation of the equipment.
At this time, the Contractor undertakes the entire responsibility for the start-up of the manual
and automatic functions for the electrical engineering.
Functional tests and the start-up are to be performed in the presence of the Project Manager
and his future operating staff. It is the Contractors obligation to render a detailed introduction
into the operation and maintenance of the electrical plant to the Project Manager’s staff.
The coordination of the plant commissioning with regards to the contractual deadlines is the
Contractor responsibility.
2-10-408 Section VI. Employer’s Requirements
Where used in this specification, the term ‘Supply’ shall mean all of the execution designs,
drawings, documentation for and the manufacturing, packing, despatch, transport,
installation, testing, commissioning of the respective items of the complete equipment and
the complete process systems specified and/or tendered for installation at the site(s) by the
contractor according to the contractor’s instructions and under his supervision.
1. Complete equipment of
- mechanical and all other equipment and accessories within process units and ancillary
structures;
- equipment including hoists, conveyors, valve operating systems and scour systems and
waste disposal
- pipework, penstocks, gates, fittings and all accessories.
2. Miscellaneous
- pipework, jointing materials including connectors, gaskets, bolts, nuts and washers;
- identification markings, tabs, tags and the like;
- fasteners, clips, stands, trays and hangers and all other auxiliary materials of any
description. It is recommended that all electrical trays will be from SS316.
4. Commissioning
- test run of all mechanical, electrical equipment and on commissioning of the plant
5. Maintenance & operating instructions & spare parts lists for all items of plant
delivered:
- Parts and tools for routine maintenance;
- Maintenance & operating Instruction manuals;
- Spare parts
Section VI. Employer’s Requirements 2-10-409
PART 3 – Conditions of
Contract and Contract
Forms
3-3
General Conditions
Contract and Interpretation
1. Definitions 1.1 The following words and expressions shall have the meanings
hereby assigned to them:
“Contract” means the Contract Agreement entered into between
the Employer and the Contractor, together with the Contract
Documents referred to therein; they shall constitute the Contract,
and the term “the Contract” shall in all such documents be
construed accordingly.
“Contract Documents” means the documents listed in Article 1.1
(Contract Documents) of the Contract Agreement (including any
amendments thereto).
“GC” means the General Conditions hereof.
“PC” means the Particular Conditions.
“day” means calendar day .
“year” means 365 days.
“month” means calendar month.
“Party” means the Employer or the Contractor, as the context
requires, and “Parties” means both of them.
“Employer” means the person named as such in the PC and
includes the legal successors or permitted assigns of the
Employer.
“Project Manager” means the person appointed by the Employer
in the manner provided in GC Sub-Clause 17.1 (Project
Manager) hereof and named as such in the PC to perform the
duties delegated by the Employer.
“Contractor” means the person(s) whose bid to perform the
Contract has been accepted by the Employer and is named as
Contractor in the Contract Agreement, and includes the legal
successors or permitted assigns of the Contractor.
“Contractor’s Representative” means any person nominated by
the Contractor and approved by the Employer in the manner
provided in GC Sub-Clause 17.2 (Contractor’s Representative
and Construction Manager) hereof to perform the duties
delegated by the Contractor.
3-6 Section VII. General Conditions
3. Interpretation 3.1 In the Contract, except where the context requires otherwise:
(a) words indicating one gender include all genders;
(b) words indicating the singular also include the plural and
words indicating the plural also include the singular;
(c) provisions including the word “agree,” “agreed,” or
“agreement” require the agreement to be recorded in
writing;
(d) the word “tender” is synonymous with “bid,” “tenderer,”
with “bidder,” and “tender documents” with “bidding
documents,” and
(e) “written” or “in writing” means hand-written, type-
written, printed or electronically made, and resulting in a
permanent record.
The marginal words and other headings shall not be taken into
consideration in the interpretation of these Conditions.
3.2 Incoterms
Unless inconsistent with any provision of the Contract, the
meaning of any trade term and the rights and obligations of
Parties thereunder shall be as prescribed by Incoterms.
Section VII. General Conditions 3-9
waiver, and must specify the right and the extent to which
it is being waived.
3.8 Severability
If any provision or condition of the Contract is prohibited or
rendered invalid or unenforceable, such prohibition, invalidity or
unenforceability shall not affect the validity or enforceability of
any other provisions and conditions of the Contract.
3.9 Country of Origin
“Origin” means the place where the plant and component parts
thereof are mined, grown, produced or manufactured, and from
which the services are provided. Plant components are produced
when, through manufacturing, processing, or substantial or
major assembling of components, a commercially recognized
product results that is substantially in its basic characteristics or
in purpose or utility from its components.
4. Communica- 4.1 Wherever these Conditions provide for the giving or issuing of
tions approvals, certificates, consents, determinations, notices,
requests and discharges, these communications shall be:
(a) in writing and delivered against receipt; and
(b) delivered, sent or transmitted to the address for the
recipient’s communications as stated in the Contract
Agreement.
When a certificate is issued to a Party, the certifier shall send a
copy to the other Party. When a notice is issued to a Party, by
the other Party or the Project Manager, a copy shall be sent to
the Project Manager or the other Party, as the case may be.
5. Law and 5.1 The Contract shall be governed by and interpreted in accordance
Language with laws of the country specified in the PC.
5.2 The ruling language of the Contract shall be that stated in the PC.
5.3 The language for communications shall be the ruling language
unless otherwise stated in the PC.
6. Fraud and 6.1 If the Employer determines that the Contractor and/or any of its
Corruption personnel, or its agents, or its Subcontractors, subconsultants,
services providers, suppliers and/or their employees has
engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive coercive, or
obstructive practices, in competing for or in executing the
Contract, then the Employer may, after giving 14 days notice to
the Contractor, terminate the Contractor's employment under
Section VII. General Conditions 3-11
the Contract and expel him from the Site, and the provisions of
Clause 42 shall apply as if such expulsion had been made under
Sub-Clause 42.2.1 (c).
For the purposes of this Sub-Clause,
(i) “corrupt practice” is the offering, giving, receiving or
soliciting, directly or indirectly, of anything of value
to influence improperly the actions of another party15;
(ii) “fraudulent practice” is any act or omission, including
a misrepresentation, that knowingly or recklessly
misleads, or attempts to mislead, a party to obtain a
financial or other benefit or to avoid an obligation16;
(iii) “collusive practice” is an arrangement between two or
more parties17 designed to achieve an improper
purpose, including to influence improperly the actions
of another party;
(iv) “coercive practice” is impairing or harming, or
threatening to impair or harm, directly or indirectly,
any party18 or the property of the party to influence
improperly the actions of a party;
(v) “obstructive practice” is
(aa) deliberately destroying, falsifying, altering or
concealing of evidence material to the
investigation or making false statements to
investigators in order to materially impede a
Bank investigation into allegations of a corrupt,
fraudulent, coercive or collusive practice; and/or
threatening, harassing or intimidating any party
to prevent it from disclosing its knowledge of
matters relevant to the investigation or from
pursuing the investigation, or
(bb) acts intended to materially impede the exercise
of the Bank’s inspection and audit rights
15
“Another party” refers to a public official acting in relation to the procurement process or contract
execution]. In this context, “public official” includes World Bank staff and employees of other
organizations taking or reviewing procurement decisions.
16
“Party” refers to a public official; the terms “benefit” and “obligation” relate to the procurement process or
contract execution; and the “act or omission” is intended to influence the procurement process or contract
execution.
17
“Parties” refers to participants in the procurement process (including public officials) attempting to
establish bid prices at artificial, non competitive levels.
18
“Party” refers to a participant in the procurement process or contract execution.
3-12 Section VII. General Conditions
of spare parts.
8. Time for 8.1 The Contractor shall commence work on the Facilities within
Commence- the period specified in the PC and without prejudice to GC
ment and Sub-Clause 26.2 hereof, the Contractor shall thereafter proceed
Completion with the Facilities in accordance with the time schedule
specified in the Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled
Time Schedule.
8.2 The Contractor shall attain Completion of the Facilities or of a
part where a separate time for Completion of such part is
specified in the Contract, within the time stated in the PC or
within such extended time to which the Contractor shall be
entitled under GC Clause 40 hereof.
9. Contractor’s 9.1 The Contractor shall design, manufacture including associated
Responsibilities purchases and/or subcontracting, install and complete the
Facilities in accordance with the Contract. When completed,
the Facilities should be fit for the purposes for which they are
intended as defined in the Contract.
9.2 The Contractor confirms that it has entered into this Contract
on the basis of a proper examination of the data relating to the
Facilities including any data as to boring tests provided by the
Employer, and on the basis of information that the Contractor
could have obtained from a visual inspection of the Site if
access thereto was available and of other data readily available
to it relating to the Facilities as of the date twenty-eight (28)
days prior to bid submission. The Contractor acknowledges
that any failure to acquaint itself with all such data and
information shall not relieve its responsibility for properly
estimating the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the
Facilities.
9.3 The Contractor shall acquire and pay for all permits, approvals
and/or licenses from all local, state or national government
authorities or public service undertakings in the country where
the Site is located which such authorities or undertakings
require the Contractor to obtain in its name and which are
necessary for the performance of the Contract, including,
without limitation, visas for the Contractor’s and
Subcontractor’s personnel and entry permits for all imported
Contractor’s Equipment. The Contractor shall acquire all other
permits, approvals and/or licenses that are not the responsibility
of the Employer under GC Sub-Clause 10.3 hereof and that are
necessary for the performance of the Contract.
9.4 The Contractor shall comply with all laws in force in the
3-14 Section VII. General Conditions
Payment
11. Contract Price 11.1 The Contract Price shall be as specified in Article 2 (Contract
Price and Terms of Payment) of the Contract Agreement.
11.2 Unless an adjustment clause is provided for in the PC, the
Contract Price shall be a firm lump sum not subject to any
alteration, except in the event of a Change in the Facilities or as
otherwise provided in the Contract.
11.3 Subject to GC Sub-Clauses 9.2, 10.1 and 35 hereof, the
Contractor shall be deemed to have satisfied itself as to the
correctness and sufficiency of the Contract Price, which shall,
except as otherwise provided for in the Contract, cover all its
obligations under the Contract.
12. Terms of 12.1 The Contract Price shall be paid as specified in Article 2
Payment (Contract Price and Terms of Payment) of the Contract
Agreement and in the Appendix to the Contract Agreement
titled Terms and Procedures of Payment, which also outlines
the procedures to be followed in making application for and
processing payments.
12.2 No payment made by the Employer herein shall be deemed to
constitute acceptance by the Employer of the Facilities or any
part(s) thereof.
12.3 In the event that the Employer fails to make any payment by its
respective due date or within the period set forth in the
Section VII. General Conditions 3-17
14. Taxes and 14.1 Except as otherwise specifically provided in the Contract, the
Duties Contractor shall bear and pay all taxes, duties, levies and
charges assessed on the Contractor, its Subcontractors or their
employees by all municipal, state or national government
authorities in connection with the Facilities in and outside of
the country where the Site is located.
14.2 Notwithstanding GC Sub-Clause 14.1 above, the Employer
shall bear and promptly pay
(a) all customs and import duties for the Plant specified in
Price Schedule No. 1; and
Section VII. General Conditions 3-19
(b) other domestic taxes such as, sales tax and value added
tax (VAT) on the Plant specified in Price Schedules No. 1
and No. 2 and that is to be incorporated into the Facilities,
and on the finished goods, imposed by the law of the
country where the Site is located.
14.3 If any tax exemptions, reductions, allowances or privileges may
be available to the Contractor in the country where the Site is
located, the Employer shall use its best endeavors to enable the
Contractor to benefit from any such tax savings to the
maximum allowable extent.
14.4 For the purpose of the Contract, it is agreed that the Contract
Price specified in Article 2 (Contract Price and Terms of
Payment) of the Contract Agreement is based on the taxes,
duties, levies and charges prevailing at the date twenty-eight
(28) days prior to the date of bid submission in the country
where the Site is located (hereinafter called “Tax” in this GC
Sub-Clause 14.4). If any rates of Tax are increased or
decreased, a new Tax is introduced, an existing Tax is
abolished, or any change in interpretation or application of any
Tax occurs in the course of the performance of Contract, which
was or will be assessed on the Contractor, Subcontractors or
their employees in connection with performance of the
Contract, an equitable adjustment of the Contract Price shall be
made to fully take into account any such change by addition to
the Contract Price or deduction therefrom, as the case may be,
in accordance with GC Clause 36 hereof.
Intellectual Property
15. License/Use of 15.1 For the operation and maintenance of the Plant, the Contractor
Technical hereby grants a non-exclusive and non-transferable license
Information (without the right to sub-license) to the Employer under the
patents, utility models or other industrial property rights
owned by the Contractor or by a third Party from whom the
Contractor has received the right to grant licenses thereunder,
and shall also grant to the Employer a non-exclusive and non-
transferable right (without the right to sub-license) to use the
know-how and other technical information disclosed to the
Employer under the Contract. Nothing contained herein shall
be construed as transferring ownership of any patent, utility
model, trademark, design, copyright, know-how or other
intellectual property right from the Contractor or any third
Party to the Employer.
15.2 The copyright in all drawings, documents and other materials
3-20 Section VII. General Conditions
19. Subcontracting 19.1 The Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled List of Major
Items of Plant and Installation Services and List of Approved
Subcontractors, specifies major items of supply or services
and a list of approved Subcontractors against each item,
including manufacturers. Insofar as no Subcontractors are
listed against any such item, the Contractor shall prepare a list
of Subcontractors for such item for inclusion in such list. The
Section VII. General Conditions 3-25
Manager.
20.3.3 The Project Manager shall not disapprove any
document, except on the grounds that the document
does not comply with the Contract or that it is contrary
to good engineering practice.
20.3.4 If the Project Manager disapproves the document, the
Contractor shall modify the document and resubmit it
for the Project Manager’s approval in accordance with
GC Sub-Clause 20.3.2. If the Project Manager
approves the document subject to modification(s), the
Contractor shall make the required modification(s),
whereupon the document shall be deemed to have been
approved.
20.3.5 If any dispute or difference occurs between the
Employer and the Contractor in connection with or
arising out of the disapproval by the Project Manager
of any document and/or any modification(s) thereto
that cannot be settled between the Parties within a
reasonable period, then such dispute or difference may
be referred to a Dispute Board for determination in
accordance with GC Sub-Clause 46.1 hereof. If such
dispute or difference is referred to a Dispute Board,
the Project Manager shall give instructions as to
whether and if so, how, performance of the Contract is
to proceed. The Contractor shall proceed with the
Contract in accordance with the Project Manager’s
instructions, provided that if the Dispute Board
upholds the Contractor’s view on the dispute and if the
Employer has not given notice under GC Sub-Clause
46.3 hereof, then the Contractor shall be reimbursed
by the Employer for any additional costs incurred by
reason of such instructions and shall be relieved of
such responsibility or liability in connection with the
dispute and the execution of the instructions as the
Dispute Board shall decide, and the Time for
Completion shall be extended accordingly.
necessary skills.
The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all
necessary permit(s) and/or visa(s) from the appropriate
authorities for the entry of all labor and personnel to be
employed on the Site into the country where the Site is
located. The Employer will, if requested by the
Contractor, use his best endeavors in a timely and
expeditious manner to assist the Contractor in
obtaining any local, state, national or government
permission required for bringing in the Contractor’s
personnel.
The Contractor shall at its own expense provide the
means of repatriation to all of its and its
Subcontractor’s personnel employed on the Contract at
the Site to the place where they were recruited or to
their domicile. It shall also provide suitable temporary
maintenance of all such persons from the cessation of
their employment on the Contract to the date
programmed for their departure. In the event that the
Contractor defaults in providing such means of
transportation and temporary maintenance, the
Employer may provide the same to such personnel and
recover the cost of doing so from the Contractor.
22.2.2 Persons in the Service of Employer
The Contractor shall not recruit, or attempt to recruit,
staff and labor from amongst the Employer’s
Personnel.
22.2.3 Labor Laws
The Contractor shall comply with all the relevant labor
Laws applicable to the Contractor’s Personnel,
including Laws relating to their employment, health,
safety, welfare, immigration and emigration, and shall
allow them all their legal rights.
The Contractor shall at all times during the progress of
the Contract use its best endeavors to prevent any
unlawful, riotous or disorderly conduct or behavior by
or amongst its employees and the labor of its
Subcontractors.
The Contractor shall, in all dealings with its labor and
the labor of its Subcontractors currently employed on
or connected with the Contract, pay due regard to all
3-32 Section VII. General Conditions
23. Test and 23.1 The Contractor shall at its own expense carry out at the place
Inspection of manufacture and/or on the Site all such tests and/or
inspections of the Plant and any part of the Facilities as are
specified in the Contract.
23.2 The Employer and the Project Manager or their designated
representatives shall be entitled to attend the aforesaid test
and/or inspection, provided that the Employer shall bear all
costs and expenses incurred in connection with such
attendance including, but not limited to, all traveling and
board and lodging expenses.
23.3 Whenever the Contractor is ready to carry out any such test
Section VII. General Conditions 3-39
not render the Contractor liable for any loss or damage thereby
suffered by the Employer.
26.3 If the Contractor attains Completion of the Facilities or any part
thereof before the Time for Completion or any extension thereof
under GC Clause 40, the Employer shall pay to the Contractor a
bonus in the amount specified in the PC. The aggregate amount
of such bonus shall in no event exceed the amount specified as
“Maximum” in the PC.
27. Defect 27.1 The Contractor warrants that the Facilities or any part thereof
Liability shall be free from defects in the design, engineering, materials
and workmanship of the Plant supplied and of the work
executed.
27.2 The Defect Liability Period shall be five hundred and forty (540)
days from the date of Completion of the Facilities (or any part
thereof) or one year from the date of Operational Acceptance of
the Facilities (or any part thereof), whichever first occurs, unless
specified otherwise in the PC pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 27.10.
If during the Defect Liability Period any defect should be found
in the design, engineering, materials and workmanship of the
Plant supplied or of the work executed by the Contractor, the
Contractor shall promptly, in consultation and agreement with
the Employer regarding appropriate remedying of the defects,
and at its cost, repair, replace or otherwise make good as the
Contractor shall determine at its discretion, such defect as well
as any damage to the Facilities caused by such defect. The
Contractor shall not be responsible for the repair, replacement or
making good of any defect or of any damage to the Facilities
arising out of or resulting from any of the following causes:
(a) improper operation or maintenance of the Facilities by the
Employer;
(b) operation of the Facilities outside specifications provided
in the Contract; or
(c) normal wear and tear.
27.3 The Contractor’s obligations under this GC Clause 27 shall not
apply to:
(a) any materials that are supplied by the Employer under GC
Sub-Clause 21.2, are normally consumed in operation, or
have a normal life shorter than the Defect Liability Period
stated herein;
3-48 Section VII. General Conditions
notice thereof, and the Contractor may at its own expense and in
the Employer’s name conduct such proceedings or claim and any
negotiations for the settlement of any such proceedings or claim.
If the Contractor fails to notify the Employer within twenty-eight
(28) days after receipt of such notice that it intends to conduct
any such proceedings or claim, then the Employer shall be free
to conduct the same on its own behalf. Unless the Contractor
has so failed to notify the Employer within the twenty-eight (28)
day period, the Employer shall make no admission that may be
prejudicial to the defense of any such proceedings or claim.
The Employer shall, at the Contractor’s request, afford all
available assistance to the Contractor in conducting such
proceedings or claim, and shall be reimbursed by the Contractor
for all reasonable expenses incurred in so doing.
29.3 The Employer shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor
and its employees, officers and Subcontractors from and against
any and all suits, actions or administrative proceedings, claims,
demands, losses, damages, costs, and expenses of whatsoever
nature, including attorney’s fees and expenses, which the
Contractor may suffer as a result of any infringement or alleged
infringement of any patent, utility model, registered design,
trademark, copyright or other intellectual property right
registered or otherwise existing at the date of the Contract
arising out of or in connection with any design, data, drawing,
specification, or other documents or materials provided or
designed by or on behalf of the Employer.
30. Limitation of 30.1 Except in cases of criminal negligence or willful misconduct,
Liability
(a) neither Party shall be liable to the other Party, whether in
contract, tort, or otherwise, for any indirect or
consequential loss or damage, loss of use, loss of
production, or loss of profits or interest costs, which may
be suffered by the other Party in connection with the
Contract, other than specifically provided as any
obligation of the Party in the Contract, and
(b) the aggregate liability of the Contractor to the Employer,
whether under the Contract, in tort or otherwise, shall not
exceed the amount resulting from the application of the
multiplier specified in the PC, to the Contract Price or, if a
multiplier is not so specified, the total Contract Price,
provided that this limitation shall not apply to the cost of
repairing or replacing defective equipment, or to any
obligation of the Contractor to indemnify the Employer
3-52 Section VII. General Conditions
Risk Distribution
31. Transfer of 31.1 Ownership of the Plant (including spare parts) to be imported
Ownership into the country where the Site is located shall be transferred to
the Employer upon loading on to the mode of transport to be
used to convey the Plant from the country of origin to that
country.
31.2 Ownership of the Plant (including spare parts) procured in the
country where the Site is located shall be transferred to the
Employer when the Plant are brought on to the Site.
31.3 Ownership of the Contractor’s Equipment used by the
Contractor and its Subcontractors in connection with the
Contract shall remain with the Contractor or its Subcontractors.
31.4 Ownership of any Plant in excess of the requirements for the
Facilities shall revert to the Contractor upon Completion of the
Facilities or at such earlier time when the Employer and the
Contractor agree that the Plant in question are no longer required
for the Facilities.
31.5 Notwithstanding the transfer of ownership of the Plant, the
responsibility for care and custody thereof together with the risk
of loss or damage thereto shall remain with the Contractor
pursuant to GC Clause 32 (Care of Facilities) hereof until
Completion of the Facilities or the part thereof in which such
Plant are incorporated.
32. Care of 32.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for the care and custody of the
Facilities Facilities or any part thereof until the date of Completion of the
Facilities pursuant to GC Clause 24 or, where the Contract provides
for Completion of the Facilities in parts, until the date of
Completion of the relevant part, and shall make good at its own
cost any loss or damage that may occur to the Facilities or the
relevant part thereof from any cause whatsoever during such
period. The Contractor shall also be responsible for any loss or
damage to the Facilities caused by the Contractor or its
Subcontractors in the course of any work carried out, pursuant to
GC Clause 27. Notwithstanding the foregoing, the Contractor shall
not be liable for any loss or damage to the Facilities or that part
thereof caused by reason of any of the matters specified or referred
to in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) of GC Sub-Clauses 32.2 and 38.1.
32.2 If any loss or damage occurs to the Facilities or any part thereof
Section VII. General Conditions 3-53
34. Insurance 34.1 To the extent specified in the Appendix to the Contract
Agreement titled Insurance Requirements, the Contractor shall at
its expense take out and maintain in effect, or cause to be taken
out and maintained in effect, during the performance of the
Contract, the insurances set forth below in the sums and with the
deductibles and other conditions specified in the said Appendix.
The identity of the insurers and the form of the policies shall be
subject to the approval of the Employer, who should not
unreasonably withhold such approval.
(a) Cargo Insurance During Transport
Covering loss or damage occurring while in transit from
the Contractor’s or Subcontractor’s works or stores until
arrival at the Site, to the Plant (including spare parts
therefor) and to the Contractor’s Equipment.
(b) Installation All Risks Insurance
Covering physical loss or damage to the Facilities at the
Site, occurring prior to Completion of the Facilities, with
an extended maintenance coverage for the Contractor’s
liability in respect of any loss or damage occurring during
the Defect Liability Period while the Contractor is on the
Site for the purpose of performing its obligations during
the Defect Liability Period.
(c) Third Party Liability Insurance
Covering bodily injury or death suffered by third Parties
including the Employer’s personnel, and loss of or damage
to property occurring in connection with the supply and
installation of the Facilities.
(d) Automobile Liability Insurance
Covering use of all vehicles used by the Contractor or its
Subcontractors, whether or not owned by them, in
connection with the execution of the Contract.
(e) Workers’ Compensation
3-56 Section VII. General Conditions
(d) the additional cost and expense that the Contractor is likely
to incur.
38. War Risks 38.1 “War Risks” shall mean any event specified in paragraphs (a)
and (b) of GC Sub-Clause 37.1 and any explosion or impact of
any mine, bomb, shell, grenade or other projectile, missile,
munitions or explosive of war, occurring or existing in or near
the country (or countries) where the Site is located.
38.2 Notwithstanding anything contained in the Contract, the Contractor
shall have no liability whatsoever for or with respect to
(a) destruction of or damage to Facilities, Plant, or any part
thereof;
(b) destruction of or damage to property of the Employer or
any third Party; or
(c) injury or loss of life
if such destruction, damage, injury or loss of life is caused by
any War Risks, and the Employer shall indemnify and hold the
Contractor harmless from and against any and all claims,
liabilities, actions, lawsuits, damages, costs, charges or expenses
arising in consequence of or in connection with the same.
38.3 If the Facilities or any Plant or Contractor’s Equipment or any
other property of the Contractor used or intended to be used for
the purposes of the Facilities shall sustain destruction or damage
by reason of any War Risks, the Employer shall pay the
Contractor for
(a) any part of the Facilities or the Plant so destroyed or
damaged to the extent not already paid for by the
Employer
and so far as may be required by the Employer, and as may
be necessary for completion of the Facilities
(b) replacing or making good any Contractor’s Equipment or
other property of the Contractor so destroyed or damaged
(c) replacing or making good any such destruction or damage
to the Facilities or the Plant or any part thereof .
If the Employer does not require the Contractor to replace or
3-62 Section VII. General Conditions
40. Extension of 40.1 The Time(s) for Completion specified in the PC pursuant to GC
Time for Sub-Clause 8.2 shall be extended if the Contractor is delayed or
Completion impeded in the performance of any of its obligations under the
Contract by reason of any of the following:
(a) any Change in the Facilities as provided in GC Clause 39
(b) any occurrence of Force Majeure as provided in GC
Clause 37, unforeseen conditions as provided in GC
Clause 35, or other occurrence of any of the matters
specified or referred to in paragraphs (a), (b) and (c) of GC
Sub-Clause 32.2
(c) any suspension order given by the Employer under GC
Clause 41 hereof or reduction in the rate of progress
pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 41.2 or
(d) any changes in laws and regulations as provided in GC
Clause 36 or
(e) any default or breach of the Contract by the Employer,
Appendix to the Contract Agreement titled ,or any activity,
act or omission of the Employer, or the Project Manager,
or any other contractors employed by the Employer, or
(f) any delay on the part of a sub-contractor, provided such
delay is due to a cause for which the Contractor himself
would have been entitled to an extension of time under this
sub-clause, or
(g) delays attributable to the Employer or caused by customs,
or
(h) any other matter specifically mentioned in the Contract
by such period as shall be fair and reasonable in all the
Section VII. General Conditions 3-67
42.1.1 The Employer may at any time terminate the Contract for
any reason by giving the Contractor a notice of
termination that refers to this GC Sub-Clause 42.1.
(a) cease all further work, except for such work as the
Employer may specify in the notice of termination
for the sole purpose of protecting that part of the
Facilities already executed, or any work required to
leave the Site in a clean and safe condition
APPENDIX
A General Conditions of Dispute Board Agreement
1. Definitions
Each “Dispute Board Agreement” is a tripartite agreement by and between:
the “Employer”;
the “Contractor”; and
the “Member” who is defined in the Dispute Board Agreement as being:
(i) the sole member of the “DB” and, where this is the case, all references to the
“Other Members” do not apply, or
(ii) one of the three persons who are jointly called the “DB” (or “dispute board”)
and, where this is the case, the other two persons are called the “Other
Members”.
The Employer and the Contractor have entered (or intend to enter) into a contract, which is
called the “Contract” and is defined in the Dispute Board Agreement, which incorporates this
Appendix. In the Dispute Board Agreement, words and expressions which are not otherwise
defined shall have the meanings assigned to them in the Contract.
2. General Provisions
Unless otherwise stated in the Dispute Board Agreement, it shall take effect on the latest of
the following dates:
(a) the Commencement Date defined in the Contract,
(b) when the Employer, the Contractor and the Member have each signed the
Dispute Board Agreement, or
(c) when the Employer, the Contractor and each of the Other Members (if any) have
respectively each signed a dispute board agreement.
This employment of the Member is a personal appointment. At any time, the Member may
give not less than 70 days’ notice of resignation to the Employer and to the Contractor, and
the Dispute Board Agreement shall terminate upon the expiry of this period.
3. Warranties
The Member warrants and agrees that he/she is and shall be impartial and independent of the
Employer, the Contractor and the Project Manager. The Member shall promptly disclose, to
each of them and to the Other Members (if any), any fact or circumstance which might
appear inconsistent with his/her warranty and agreement of impartiality and independence.
Section VII. General Conditions 3-85
When appointing the Member, the Employer and the Contractor relied upon the Member’s
representations that he/she is:
(a) experienced in the work which the Contractor is to carry out under the Contract,
(b) experienced in the interpretation of contract documentation, and
(c) fluent in the language for communications defined in the Contract.
4. General Obligations of the Member
The Member shall:
(a) have no interest financial or otherwise in the Employer, the Contractor or the
Project Manager, nor any financial interest in the Contract except for payment
under the Dispute Board Agreement;
(b) not previously have been employed as a consultant or otherwise by the
Employer, the Contractor or the Project Manager, except in such circumstances
as were disclosed in writing to the Employer and the Contractor before they
signed the Dispute Board Agreement;
(c) have disclosed in writing to the Employer, the Contractor and the Other Members
(if any), before entering into the Dispute Board Agreement and to his/her best
knowledge and recollection, any professional or personal relationships with any
director, officer or employee of the Employer, the Contractor or the Project
Manager, and any previous involvement in the overall project of which the
Contract forms part;
(d) not, for the duration of the Dispute Board Agreement, be employed as a
consultant or otherwise by the Employer, the Contractor or the Project Manager,
except as may be agreed in writing by the Employer, the Contractor and the
Other Members (if any);
(e) comply with the annexed procedural rules and with GC Sub-Clause 46.3;
(f) not give advice to the Employer, the Contractor, the Employer’s Personnel or the
Contractor’s Personnel concerning the conduct of the Contract, other than in
accordance with the annexed procedural rules;
(g) not while a Member enter into discussions or make any agreement with the
Employer, the Contractor or the Project Manager regarding employment by any
of them, whether as a consultant or otherwise, after ceasing to act under the
Dispute Board Agreement;
(h) ensure his/her availability for all site visits and hearings as are necessary;
(i) become conversant with the Contract and with the progress of the Facilities (and
of any other parts of the project of which the Contract forms part) by studying all
documents received which shall be maintained in a current working file;
3-86 Section VII. General Conditions
(j) treat the details of the Contract and all the DB’s activities and hearings as private
and confidential, and not publish or disclose them without the prior written
consent of the Employer, the Contractor and the Other Members (if any); and
(k) be available to give advice and opinions, on any matter relevant to the Contract
when requested by both the Employer and the Contractor, subject to the
agreement of the Other Members (if any).
5. General Obligations of the Employer and the Contractor
The Employer, the Contractor, the Employer’s Personnel and the Contractor’s Personnel
shall not request advice from or consultation with the Member regarding the Contract,
otherwise than in the normal course of the DB’s activities under the Contract and the Dispute
Board Agreement. The Employer and the Contractor shall be responsible for compliance
with this provision, by the Employer’s Personnel and the Contractor’s Personnel
respectively.
The Employer and the Contractor undertake to each other and to the Member that the
Member shall not, except as otherwise agreed in writing by the Employer, the Contractor, the
Member and the Other Members (if any):
(a) be appointed as an arbitrator in any arbitration under the Contract;
(b) be called as a witness to give evidence concerning any dispute before
arbitrator(s) appointed for any arbitration under the Contract; or
(c) be liable for any claims for anything done or omitted in the discharge or
purported discharge of the Member’s functions, unless the act or omission is
shown to have been in bad faith.
The Employer and the Contractor hereby jointly and severally indemnify and hold the
Member harmless against and from claims from which he is relieved from liability under the
preceding paragraph.
Whenever the Employer or the Contractor refers a dispute to the DB under GC Sub-Clause
46.3, which will require the Member to make a site visit and attend a hearing, the Employer
or the Contractor shall provide appropriate security for a sum equivalent to the reasonable
expenses to be incurred by the Member. No account shall be taken of any other payments due
or paid to the Member.
6. Payment
The Member shall be paid as follows, in the currency named in the Dispute Board
Agreement:
(a) a retainer fee per calendar month, which shall be considered as payment in full
for:
(i) being available on 28 days’ notice for all site visits and hearings;
Section VII. General Conditions 3-87
(ii) becoming and remaining conversant with all project developments and
maintaining relevant files;
(iii) all office and overhead expenses including secretarial services,
photocopying and office supplies incurred in connection with his duties;
and
(iv) all services performed hereunder except those referred to in sub-paragraphs
(b) and (c) of this Clause.
The retainer fee shall be paid with effect from the last day of the calendar month in which the
Dispute Board Agreement becomes effective; until the last day of the calendar month in
which the Taking-Over Certificate is issued for the whole of the Works.
With effect from the first day of the calendar month following the month in which Taking-
Over Certificate is issued for the whole of the Works, the retainer fee shall be reduced by one
third This reduced fee shall be paid until the first day of the calendar month in which the
Member resigns or the Dispute Board Agreement is otherwise terminated.
(b) a daily fee which shall be considered as payment in full for:
(i) each day or part of a day up to a maximum of two days’ travel time in each
direction for the journey between the Member’s home and the site, or
another location of a meeting with the Other Members (if any);
(ii) each working day on site visits, hearings or preparing decisions; and
(iii) each day spent reading submissions in preparation for a hearing.
(c) all reasonable expenses including necessary travel expenses (air fare in less than
first class, hotel and subsistence and other direct travel expenses) incurred in
connection with the Member’s duties, as well as the cost of telephone calls,
courier charges, faxes and telexes: a receipt shall be required for each item in
excess of five percent of the daily fee referred to in sub-paragraph (b) of this
Clause;
(d) any taxes properly levied in the Country on payments made to the Member
(unless a national or permanent resident of the Country) under this Clause 6.
The retainer and daily fees shall be as specified in the Dispute Board Agreement. Unless it
specifies otherwise, these fees shall remain fixed for the first 24 calendar months, and shall
thereafter be adjusted by agreement between the Employer, the Contractor and the Member,
at each anniversary of the date on which the Dispute Board Agreement became effective.
If the Parties fail to agree on the retainer fee or the daily fee the appointing entity or official
named in the PC shall determine the amount of the fees to be used.
The Member shall submit invoices for payment of the monthly retainer and air fares quarterly
in advance. Invoices for other expenses and for daily fees shall be submitted following the
3-88 Section VII. General Conditions
conclusion of a site visit or hearing. All invoices shall be accompanied by a brief description
of activities performed during the relevant period and shall be addressed to the Contractor.
The Contractor shall pay each of the Member’s invoices in full within 56 calendar days after
receiving each invoice and shall apply to the Employer (in the Statements under the Contract)
for reimbursement of one-half of the amounts of these invoices. The Employer shall then pay
the Contractor in accordance with the Contract.
If the Contractor fails to pay to the Member the amount to which he/she is entitled under the
Dispute Board Agreement, the Employer shall pay the amount due to the Member and any
other amount which may be required to maintain the operation of the DB; and without
prejudice to the Employer’s rights or remedies. In addition to all other rights arising from this
default, the Employer shall be entitled to reimbursement of all sums paid in excess of one-
half of these payments, plus all costs of recovering these sums and financing charges
calculated at the rate specified in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 12.3.
If the Member does not receive payment of the amount due within 70 days after submitting a
valid invoice, the Member may (i) suspend his/her services (without notice) until the
payment is received, and/or (ii) resign his/her appointment by giving notice under Clause 7.
7. Termination
At any time: (i) the Employer and the Contractor may jointly terminate the Dispute Board
Agreement by giving 42 days’ notice to the Member; or (ii) the Member may resign as
provided for in Clause 2.
If the Member fails to comply with the Dispute Board Agreement, the Employer and the
Contractor may, without prejudice to their other rights, terminate it by notice to the Member.
The notice shall take effect when received by the Member.
If the Employer or the Contractor fails to comply with the Dispute Board Agreement, the
Member may, without prejudice to his other rights, terminate it by notice to the Employer
and the Contractor. The notice shall take effect when received by them both.
Any such notice, resignation and termination shall be final and binding on the Employer, the
Contractor and the Member. However, a notice by the Employer or the Contractor, but not by
both, shall be of no effect.
8. Default of the Member
If the Member fails to comply with any of his obligations under Clause 4 concerning his
impartiality or independence in relation to the Employer or the Contractor, he/she shall not
be entitled to any fees or expenses hereunder and shall, without prejudice to their other
rights, reimburse each of the Employer and the Contractor for any fees and expenses received
by the Member and the Other Members (if any), for proceedings or decisions (if any) of the
DB which are rendered void or ineffective by the said failure to comply.
Section VII. General Conditions 3-89
9. Disputes
Any dispute or claim arising out of or in connection with this Dispute Board Agreement, or
the breach, termination or invalidity thereof, shall be finally settled by institutional
arbitration. If no other arbitration institute is agreed, the arbitration shall be conducted under
the Rules of Arbitration of the International Chamber of Commerce by one arbitrator
appointed in accordance with these Rules of Arbitration.
3-90 Section VII. General Conditions
Annex
DISPUTE BOARD GUIDELINES
1. Unless otherwise agreed by the Employer and the Contractor, the DB shall visit the
site at intervals of not more than 140 days, including times of critical construction events, at
the request of either the Employer or the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed by the
Employer, the Contractor and the DB, the period between consecutive visits shall not be less
than 70 days, except as required to convene a hearing as described below.
2. The timing of and agenda for each site visit shall be as agreed jointly by the DB, the
Employer and the Contractor, or in the absence of agreement, shall be decided by the DB.
The purpose of site visits is to enable the DB to become and remain acquainted with the
progress of the Works and of any actual or potential problems or claims, and, as far as
reasonable, to prevent potential problems or claims from becoming disputes.
3. Site visits shall be attended by the Employer, the Contractor and the Project Manager
and shall be co-ordinated by the Employer in co-operation with the Contractor. The
Employer shall ensure the provision of appropriate conference facilities and secretarial and
copying services. At the conclusion of each site visit and before leaving the site, the DB shall
prepare a report on its activities during the visit and shall send copies to the Employer and
the Contractor.
4. The Employer and the Contractor shall furnish to the DB one copy of all documents
which the DB may request, including Contract documents, progress reports, variation
instructions, certificates and other documents pertinent to the performance of the Contract.
All communications between the DB and the Employer or the Contractor shall be copied to
the other Party. If the DB comprises three persons, the Employer and the Contractor shall
send copies of these requested documents and these communications to each of these
persons.
5. If any dispute is referred to the DB in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 46.3, the DB
shall proceed in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 46.3 and these Guidelines. Subject to the
time allowed to give notice of a decision and other relevant factors, the DB shall:
(a) act fairly and impartially as between the Employer and the Contractor, giving
each of them a reasonable opportunity of putting his case and responding to
the other’s case, and
(b) adopt procedures suitable to the dispute, avoiding unnecessary delay or
expense.
6. The DB may conduct a hearing on the dispute, in which event it will decide on the
date and place for the hearing and may request that written documentation and arguments
from the Employer and the Contractor be presented to it prior to or at the hearing.
Section VII. General Conditions 3-91
7. Except as otherwise agreed in writing by the Employer and the Contractor, the DB
shall have power to adopt an inquisitorial procedure, to refuse admission to hearings or
audience at hearings to any persons other than representatives of the Employer, the
Contractor and the Project Manager, and to proceed in the absence of any Party who the DB
is satisfied received notice of the hearing; but shall have discretion to decide whether and to
what extent this power may be exercised.
8. The Employer and the Contractor empower the DB, among other things, to:
(a) establish the procedure to be applied in deciding a dispute,
(b) decide upon the DB’s own jurisdiction, and as to the scope of any dispute
referred to it,
(c) conduct any hearing as it thinks fit, not being bound by any rules or
procedures other than those contained in the Contract and these Guidelines,
(d) take the initiative in ascertaining the facts and matters required for a decision,
(e) make use of its own specialist knowledge, if any,
(f) decide upon the payment of financing charges in accordance with the
Contract,
(g) decide upon any provisional relief such as interim or conservatory measures,
(h) open up, review and revise any certificate, decision, determination,
instruction, opinion or valuation of the Project Manager, relevant to the
dispute, and
(i) appoint, should the DB so consider necessary and the Parties agree, a suitable
expert at the cost of the Parties to give advice on a specific matter relevant to
the dispute.
9. The DB shall not express any opinions during any hearing concerning the merits of
any arguments advanced by the Parties. Thereafter, the DB shall make and give its decision
in accordance with GC Sub-Clause 46.3, or as otherwise agreed by the Employer and the
Contractor in writing. If the DB comprises three persons:
(a) it shall convene in private after a hearing, in order to have discussions and
prepare its decision;
(b) it shall endeavour to reach a unanimous decision: if this proves impossible the
applicable decision shall be made by a majority of the Members, who may
require the minority Member to prepare a written report for submission to the
Employer and the Contractor; and
(c) if a Member fails to attend a meeting or hearing, or to fulfil any required
function, the other two Members may nevertheless proceed to make a
decision, unless:
3-92 Section VII. General Conditions
(i) either the Employer or the Contractor does not agree that they do so, or
(ii) the absent Member is the chairman and he/she instructs the other
Members to not make a decision.
3-93
The following Particular Conditions shall supplement the General Conditions in Section
VII. Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those in the
General Conditions.
3-94 Section VIII. Particular Conditions
Table of Clauses
PC 1. Definitions............................................................................................................ 3-95
PC 5. Law and Language ............................................................................................... 3-95
PC 7. Scope of Facilities [Spare Parts] (GC Clause 7) ................................................. 3-95
PC 8. Time for Commencement and Completion.......................................................... 3-95
PC 11. Contract Price....................................................................................................... 3-96
PC 13. Securities .............................................................................................................. 3-96
PC 22 Installation ........................................................................................................... 3-97
PC 25. Commissioning and Operational Acceptance ...... 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
PC 26. Completion Time Guarantee ................................................................................ 3-97
PC 27. Defect Liability .................................................... 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
PC 30. Limitation of Liability.......................................... 3-Error! Bookmark not defined.
PC 46. Disputes and Arbitration ...................................................................................... 3-98
Section VIII. Particular Conditions 3-95
Particular Conditions
The following Particular Conditions (PC) shall supplement the General Conditions (GC).
Whenever there is a conflict, the provisions herein shall prevail over those in the GC. The
clause number of the PC is the corresponding clause number of the GC.
PC 1. Definitions (GC Clause 1)
The Bank is: The World Bank . The co financiers of the Project are: the French
Development Agency (AFD) and the European Commission (EC)
Country of Origin: all countries and territories as indicated in Section V of the bidding
documents; Eligible Countries.
PC 5.1 The Contract shall be interpreted in accordance with the laws of: State of Palestine
PC 7.3 The Contractor agrees to supply spare parts for a period of 5 years starting at Final
Acceptance, however the availability of spare parts shall be guaranteed at least for
a period of 15 years
PC 8.1 The Contractor shall commence work on the Facilities within sixty (60).days from
the Effective Date for determining Time for Completion as specified in the
Contract Agreement.
Pursuant to Clauses 1.3 and 2.1.9 of the ESHS Specifications of the Contract,
written instruction from the Employer is required prior to commencing operation
on any of the Worksites. For that purpose, the Contractor shall submit an updated
W-ESMP specifying all relevant information pertaining to the ESHS management
on this specific Worksite.
3-96 Section VIII. Particular Conditions
PC 8.2 The Time for Completion of the whole of the Facilities shall be nine hundred ten
(910) days from the Effective Date as described in the Contract Agreement.
PC 11.2 The Contract Price shall be adjusted in accordance with the provisions of
Appendix 2 (Price Escalation) of the Contract Agreement.
PC 13.3.1 The amount of performance security, as a percentage of the Contract Price for the
Facility or for the part of the Facility for which a separate Time for Completion is
provided, shall be: 10% of the Contract price.
PC 13.3.2 The performance security shall be in the form of the bank guarantee attached
hereto in Section IX, Contract Forms.
PC 13.3.3 The performance security shall be reduced to ten percent (10%) of the value of the
component covered by the extended defect liability in accordance with the
provisions in the PC, pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 27.10.
PC 14.2 (a 7 b) The Contarctor will be granted for the Contrcat Ceiling VAT
exemption to enable the Contrcator issuing the required Zero VAT invoices and
the Contractor will be granted donation number for all Plant and Equipmnet
importaed from abroad, all as per applicable procedures by MoF. However, the
Contractor shall copmply with all the requirements related to registration of the
contracting entity (individual firm or Joint Ventures) as per applicable and adapted
procedures in Palestine. Furher details are presented in the Employer Requiremnets
Annex 5. Considerations For Delivering Imported Goods And Equipment To
The Site.
If the Project Manager fails to take such action within the said fourtytwo (42) days,
then the said document shall be deemed to have been approved by the Project
Manager.
PC 23.1 After Completion of the Facility, the Contractor shall at his own expense carry out
all the tests to ensure that:
- the Facility and all systems and components is traceable to the pertinent data
quality objectives from the applicable guidelines as set-out in the Employer
Requirements;
- the Facility and all systems and components are in accordance with the
Employer Requirements and with the Design Specifications;
- the performance of the Facility and all systems and components is suitable for
treatment of the waste water of the Municipality of Hebron.
25.2.2 The Guarantee Test of the Facilities shall be successfully completed within 120
days from the date of completion.
PC 26.2 Applicable rate for liquidated damages: 0.5% per week of the Total Contract price.
The above rate applies to the price of the part of the Facilities, as quoted in the
Price Schedule, for that part for which the Contractor fails to achieve Completion
within the particular Time for Completion.
Maximum deduction for liquidated damages: 10% of the Total Contract price.
3-98 Section VIII. Particular Conditions
PC 26.3 Applicable (amount or rate) for the bonus for early Completion:
No bonus will be given for earlier Completion of the Facilities or part thereof.
PC 46.1 The DB shall be appointed within [28 days] after the Effective Date.
PC 46.1 The DB shall comprise three suitably qualified members.
Each Party shall nominate for approval of the other Party. The first two members
shall recommend and the Parties shall agree upon the third member, who shall act
as chairman. Each of the members shall be fluent in the language for
communication defined in the Contract and shall be professionally experienced in
the type of activities involved in the performance of the Contract and with the
interpretation of contractual documents.
(b) Any dispute between the Employer and a Contractor who is a national of the
Employer’s country arising in connection with this Contract shall be referred to
adjudication or arbitration in accordance with the laws of the Employer’s
Country.
Table of Forms
. . . . . . . date. . . . . . .
This is to notify you that your Bid dated . . . . date . . . . for execution of the . . . . . . . . .
.name of the contract and identification number, as given in the Contract Data . . . . . . . . . .
for the Accepted Contract Amount of the equivalent of . . . . . . . . .amount in numbers and
words and name of currency . . . . . . . . ., as corrected and modified in accordance with the
Instructions to Bidders is hereby accepted by our Agency.
You are requested to furnish the Performance Security within 28 days in accordance with the
Conditions of Contract, using for that purpose the of the Performance Security Form included
in Section VI of the Bidding Document.
Contract Agreement
WHEREAS the Employer desires to engage the Contractor to design, manufacture, test,
deliver, install, complete and commission certain Facilities, viz. Hebron Wastewater
Treatment Plant _________________ (“the Facilities”), and the Contractor has agreed to
such engagement upon and subject to the terms and conditions hereinafter appearing.
(f) Drawings
(g) Other completed bidding forms submitted with the Bid
(h) Other documents forming part of the Employer’s
4 Section IX. Contract Forms
Requirements:
(i) [Any other documents shall be added here]
1.2 Order of Precedence (Reference GC Clause 2)
In the event of any ambiguity or conflict between the Contract
Documents listed above, the order of precedence shall be the order
in which the Contract Documents are listed in Article 1.1 (Contract
Documents) above.
1.3 Definitions (Reference GC Clause 1)
Capitalized words and phrases used herein shall have the same
meanings as are ascribed to them in the General Conditions.
Article 2. Contract 2.1 Contract Price (Reference GC Clause 11)
Price and Terms of The Employer hereby agrees to pay to the Contractor the Contract
Payment Price in consideration of the performance by the Contractor of its
obligations hereunder. The Contract Price shall be the aggregate of:
__________________, _______________ as specified in Price
Schedule No. 4 (Grand Summary), and_______________,
_________________, or such other sums as may be determined in
accordance with the terms and conditions of the Contract.
2.2 Terms of Payment (Reference GC Clause 12)
The terms and procedures of payment according to which the
Employer will reimburse the Contractor are given in the Appendix
(Terms and Procedures of Payment) hereto.
The Employer may instruct its bank to issue an irrevocable
confirmed documentary credit made available to the Contractor in a
bank in the country of the Contractor. The credit shall be for an
amount of ________________________; and shall be subject to the
Uniform Customs and Practice for Documentary Credits 1993
Revision, ICC Publication No. 600.
In the event that the amount payable under Schedule No. 1 is
adjusted in accordance with GC 11.2 or with any of the other terms
of the Contract, the Employer shall arrange for the documentary
credit to be amended accordingly.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Employer and the Contractor have caused this
Agreement to be duly executed by their duly authorized representatives the day and
year first above written.
[ Signature ]
[ Title ]
in the presence of
[ Signature ]
[ Title ]
[ Signature ]
[ Title ]
in the presence of
[ Signature ]
[ Title ]
APPENDICES
In accordance with the provisions of GC Clause 12 (Terms of Payment), the Employer shall
pay the Contractor in the following manner and at the following times, on the basis of the
Price Breakdown given in the section on Price Schedules. Payments will be made in the
currencies quoted by the Bidder unless otherwise agreed between the Parties. Applications
for payment in respect of part deliveries may be made by the Contractor as work proceeds.
TERMS OF PAYMENT
In respect of plant and equipment supplied from abroad, the following payments shall
be made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total CIP amount as an advance payment against receipt of
invoice and an irrevocable advance payment security (ref. Chapter 5 “Bank Guarantee
Form for Advance Payment”) for the equivalent amount made out in favor of the
Employer. The advance payment security may be reduced in proportion to the value of
the plant and equipment delivered to the site, as evidenced by shipping and delivery
documents.
Eighty percent (80%) of the total or pro rata DDP amount upon Incoterm “DDP”, upon
delivery to the carrier within forty-five (45) days after receipt of documents.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata DDP amount upon issue of the Completion
Certificate, within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata DDP amount upon issue of the Operational
Acceptance Certificate, within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Schedule No. 2. Plant and Equipment Supplied from within the Employer’s Country
In respect of plant and equipment supplied from within the Employer’s country, the
following payments shall be made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total EXW amount as an advance payment against receipt of
invoice, and an irrevocable advance payment security (ref. Chapter 5 “Bank Guarantee
Form for Advance Payment”) for the equivalent amount made out in favor of the
Employer. The advance payment security may be reduced in proportion to the value of
the plant and equipment delivered to the site, as evidenced by shipping and delivery
documents.
Eighty percent (80%) of the total or pro rata EXW amount upon Incoterm “Ex-Works,”
upon delivery to the carrier within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice and
documents.
8 Section IX. Contract Forms
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata EXW amount upon issue of the Completion
Certificate, within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata EXW amount upon issue of the Operational
Acceptance Certificate, within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
In respect of design services for both the foreign currency and the local currency
portions, the following payments shall be made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total design services amount as an advance payment against
receipt of invoice, and an irrevocable advance payment security (ref. Chapter 5 “Bank
Guarantee Form for Advance Payment”) for the equivalent amount made out in favor of
the Employer.
Ninety percent (90%) of the total or pro rata design services amount upon acceptance of
design in accordance with GC Clause 20 by the Project Manager within forty-five (45)
days after receipt of invoice.
Schedules No. 4 a, and 4 b. Installation Services – Earth Works and Site Preparation and
Building Civil Works and other Construction Works
In respect of installation services for both the foreign and local currency portions, the
following payments shall be made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total installation services amount as an advance payment
against receipt of invoice, and an irrevocable advance payment security (ref. Chapter 5
“Bank Guarantee Form for Advance Payment”) for the equivalent amount made out in
favor of the Employer. The advance payment security may be reduced in proportion to
the value of work performed by the Contractor as evidenced by the invoices for
installation services.
Eighty percent (80%) of the value of work measured under Schedules 4 a and 4 b and
performed by the Contractor, as identified in the said Program of Performance, during
the preceding month, as evidenced by the Employer’s authorization of the Contractor’s
application, will be made monthly within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata value of installation services under Schedules
4 a and 4 b performed by the Contractor as evidenced by the Employer’s authorization
of the Contractor’s monthly applications, upon issue of the Completion Certificate,
within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata value of installation services under Schedules
4 a and 4 b performed by the Contractor as evidenced by the Employer’s authorization
Section IX. Contract Forms 9
In respect of ESHS for both the foreign and local currency portions, the following
payments shall be made:
Ten percent (10%) of the total installation services amount as an advance payment
against receipt of invoice, and an irrevocable advance payment security (ref. Chapter 5
“Bank Guarantee Form for Advance Payment”) for the equivalent amount made out in
favor of the Employer. The advance payment security may be reduced in proportion to
the value of work performed by the Contractor as evidenced by the invoices for
installation services.
Eighty percent (80%) of the value of work measured under Schedule 5 and performed
by the Contractor, as identified in the said Program of Performance, during the
preceding month, as evidenced by the Employer’s authorization of the Contractor’s
application, will be made monthly within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata value of installation services under Schedule 5
performed by the Contractor as evidenced by the Employer’s authorization of the
Contractor’s monthly applications, upon issue of the Completion Certificate, within
forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
Five percent (5%) of the total or pro rata value of installation services under Schedule 5
performed by the Contractor as evidenced by the Employer’s authorization of the
Contractor’s monthly applications, upon issue of the Operational Acceptance
Certificate, within forty-five (45) days after receipt of invoice.
In the event that the Employer fails to make any payment on its respective due date, the
Employer shall pay to the Contractor interest on the amount of such delayed payment at the
rate of half percent (0.5%) per month for period of delay until payment has been made in full.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES
The procedures to be followed in applying for certification and making payments shall be as
follows:
The contractor shall make application for payment by submitting a statement at the end of
each month to the Project Manager, in a tabulated form approved by the Employer, showing
the amounts to which the Contractor considers himself entitled. The statement shall include
the following items:
(a) The value of payments for work executed up to the end of the month, as determined
in accordance with GC Clause 12, at the Unit Prices shown in Schedule1;
10 Section IX. Contract Forms
(b) The value of payments for work executed up to the end of the month, as determined
in accordance with GC Clause 12, at the Unit Prices shown in Schedule 2;
(c) The value of payments for work executed up to the end of the month, as determined
in accordance with GC Clause 12, at the Unit Prices shown in Schedule 3
(d) The value of payments for work executed up to the end of the month, as determined
in accordance with GC Clause 12, at the Unit Prices shown in Schedules 4 a and 4 b;
(e) The value of payments for work executed up to the end of the month, as determined
in accordance with GC Clause 12, at the Unit Prices shown in Schedule 5;
(f) The value of any change orders executed up to the end of the month;
(g) Any credit or debit for the month in respect of ……
(h) Any amount withheld under the retention provisions of the Contract;
(i) Any amount to be deducted as repayment of the Advance under GC Clause…
The Employer will make payments on the certified Interim Payment Certificate within 45
days after receiving the Zero VAT Invoice and the Deduction of Source Clerance Stamped
by MoF relevant department, as further described in the General Conditions of Contract.
Section IX. Contract Forms 11
Where the Contract Period (excluding the Defect Liability Period) exceeds eighteen (18)
months, it is normal procedure that prices payable to the Contractor shall be subject to
adjustment during the performance of the Contract to reflect changes occurring in the cost of
labour and material components. In such cases the bidding documents shall include in this
Appendix 2 a formula of the following general type, pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 11.2. Where
Contracts are of a shorter duration than eighteen (18) months or in cases where there is to
be no Price Adjustment, the following provision shall not be included. Instead, it shall be
indicated under this Appendix 2 that the prices are to remain firm and fixed for the duration
of the Contract.
Sample Price Escalation Formula
Prices payable to the Contractor, in accordance with the Contract, shall be subject to
adjustment during performance of the Contract to reflect changes in the cost of labor
and material components, in accordance with the following formula:
L1 M1
P1 P0 ( a b c ) P0
L0 M0
in which:
L0, L1 = labor indices applicable to the appropriate industry in the country of origin
on the base date and the date for adjustment, respectively
M0, M1= material and equipment indices in the country of origin on the base date and
the date for adjustment, respectively
Note that the sum of percentages a, b, c, etc… in formula must always be equal to
100%!
Base Date
Item Source of Indices Used
Indices
The base date shall be the date thirty (30) days prior to the Bid closing date.
(a) No price increase will be allowed beyond the original delivery date unless
covered by an extension of time awarded by the Employer under the terms of the
Contract. No price increase will be allowed for periods of delay for which the
Contractor is responsible. The Employer will, however, be entitled to any price
decrease occurring during such periods of delay.
(b) If the currency in which the Contract price, P0, is expressed is different from the
currency of the country of origin of the labour and/or materials indices, a
correction factor will be applied to avoid incorrect adjustments of the Contract
price. The correction factor shall correspond to the ratio of exchange rates
between the two currencies on the base date and the date for adjustment as
defined above.
(c) No price adjustment shall be payable on the portion of the Contract price paid to
the Contractor as an advance payment.
For complex plant supply and installation involving several sources of supply and/or a
substantial amount of installation works, a family of formulas may be necessary, with
provision for the usage of Contractor’s equipment in the works formula.
Section IX. Contract Forms 13
Parties Insured
The Employer shall be named as co-insured under all insurance policies taken out by the
Contractor pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 34.1, except for the Third Party Liability, Workers’
Compensation and Employer’s Liability Insurances, and the Contractor’s Subcontractors
shall be named as co-insured under all insurance policies taken out by the Contractor
pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 34.1, except for the Cargo, Workers’ Compensation and
Employer’s Liability Insurances. All insurer’s rights of subrogation against such co-insureds
for losses or claims arising out of the performance of the Contract shall be waived under such
policies.
DEDUCTIBLE Parties
Amount From To
LIMITS insured
[in
[names] [place] [place]
currency(ies)]
110% of the
DDP price of Supplier/
none See above HRWWTP
the goods or Subcontractor
equipment
DEDUCTIBLE Parties
From To
Amount LIMITS insured
[in currency(ies)] [names] [place] [place]
14 Section IX. Contract Forms
USD
20,000,000 not not
none See above
(Twenty applicable applicable
million)
DEDUCTIBLE Parties
Amount From To
LIMITS insured
[in currency(ies)] [names] [place] [place]
USD
not not
10,,000,000 USD 1,000 See above
applicable applicable
(Ten million)
Covering professional negligence including faults in design and the Financial loss caused by
an error or omission in the services and/or the given advice.
none
16 Section IX. Contract Forms
Pursuant to GC Sub-Clause 20.3.1, the Contractor shall prepare, or cause its Subcontractor to
prepare, and present to the Project Manager in accordance with the requirements of GC Sub-
Clause 18.2 (Program of Performance), the following documents for
A. Approval
B. Review
1. General
This Appendix sets out
(d) the formula for calculation of liquidated damages for failure to attain the
functional guarantees.
2. Preconditions
The Contractor gives the functional guarantees (specified herein) for the facilities,
subject to the following preconditions being fully satisfied:
3. Functional Guarantees
Subject to compliance with the foregoing preconditions, the Contractor guarantees
as follows:
Note: The figures entered below shall be fully consistent with the corresponding
values for each functional guarantee of the proposed plant and equipment offered
by the Bidder in the Bidding Forms of Part 1, Sections IV and V.
Date: ________________
We have been informed that [name of Contractor] (hereinafter called “the Contractor”) has
entered into Contract No. [reference number of the contract] dated ____________ with you, for
the execution of [name of contract and brief description of Facilities] (hereinafter called “the
Contract”).
At the request of the Contractor, we [name of Bank] hereby irrevocably undertake to pay you
any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of [amount in figures] (___) [amount in
19
words] , upon receipt by us of your first demand in writing accompanied by a written
statement stating that the Contractor is in breach of its obligation(s) under the Contract,
without your needing to prove or to show grounds for your demand or the sum specified
therein.
This guarantee shall be reduced by half upon our receipt of:
(a) twelve months after our receipt of either (a) or (b) above; or
(b) eighteen months after our receipt of:
19
The Guarantor shall insert an amount representing the percentage of the Contract Price specified in the
Contract and denominated either in the currency(ies) of the Contract or a freely convertible currency
acceptable to the Employer.
20
This text shall be revised as and where necessary to take into account (i) partial acceptance of the Facilities
in accordance with Sub-Clause 25.4 of the GCC; and (ii) extension of the performance security when the
Contractor is liable for an extended warranty obligation pursuant to Sub-Clause 27.10 of the GCC
(although in this latter case the Employer might want to consider an extended warranty security in lieu of
the extension of the performance security).
24 Section IX. Contract Forms
Consequently, any demand for payment under this guarantee must be received by us at this
office on or before that date.
This guarantee is subject to the Uniform Rules for Demand Guarantees, ICC Publication No.
458, except that subparagraph (ii) of Sub-article 20(a) is hereby excluded.
_____________________
[signature(s)]
21
Insert the date twenty-eight days after the expected expiration date of the Defect Liability Period. The
Employer should note that in the event of an extension of the time for completion of the Contract, the
Employer would need to request an extension of this guarantee from the Guarantor. Such request must be
in writing and must be made prior to the expiration date established in the guarantee. In preparing this
guarantee, the Employer might consider adding the following text to the form, at the end of the penultimate
paragraph: “The Guarantor agrees to a one-time extension of this guarantee for a period not to exceed [six
months][one year], in response to the Employer’s written request for such extension, such request to be
presented to the Guarantor before the expiry of the guarantee.”
Section IX. Contract Forms 25
Date:
Grant/Credit No:
IFB No:
[Name of Contract]
We refer to the Contract Agreement (“the Contract”) signed on [date] between you and
[name of Contractor] (“the Contractor”) concerning design, execution and completion of
[Brief description of the Facilities].
By this letter we, the undersigned, [name of Bank], a Bank (or company) organized under the
laws of [country of Bank] and having its registered/principal office at [address of Bank], do
hereby jointly and severally with the Contractor irrevocably guarantee payment owed to you
by the Contractor, pursuant to the Contract, up to the sum of [amount], equivalent to
[number] percent ( %) [amount shall not exceed ten percent (10%) in any case] of the
Contract Price until the date of the Operational Acceptance Certificate and thereafter up to a
sum of [amount], equivalent to [number] percent ( %) [amount shall not exceed five percent
(5%) in any case] of the Contract Price, until twelve (12) months after the date of
Operational Acceptance, or eighteen (18) months after Completion of the Facilities,
whichever comes first.
Where it is agreed between you and the Contractor that the Facilities are to be accepted in
parts, and thus where there are separate Completion and Operational Acceptance Certificates
for each part, this Letter of Guarantee shall be apportioned to the value of each such part and
shall reduce or expire as provided above on or following Completion or Operational
Acceptance of each part.
We shall only undertake to make payment under this Letter of Guarantee upon our receipt of
a written demand signed by your duly authorized officer for a specified sum, where such
demand sets out the reasons for your claim under this Letter of Guarantee and is
accompanied by
(a) a copy of the written notice sent by you to the Contractor before making the claim
under this Guarantee, specifying the Contractor’s breach of contract and
requesting the Contractor to remedy it
(b) a letter signed by your duly authorized officer certifying that the Contractor has
failed to remedy the default within the period allowed for remedial action
26 Section IX. Contract Forms
(c) a copy of your written notice to the Contractor stating your intent to claim under
this Letter of Guarantee because of the Contractor’s failure to remedy the default
in accordance with the request referred to in para. (a) above.
Our liability under this Letter of Guarantee shall be to pay to you whichever is the lesser of
the sum so requested or the amount then guaranteed hereunder in respect of any demand duly
made hereunder prior to expiry of this Letter of Guarantee, without being entitled to inquire
whether or not this payment is lawfully demanded.
This Letter of Guarantee shall be valid from the date of issue until the earlier of twelve (12)
months after the date of Operational Acceptance or eighteen (18) months after the date of
Completion of the Facilities or, where the Facilities are to be accepted in parts, twelve (12)
months after the date of Operational Acceptance or eighteen (18) months after the date of
Completion of the last part or [date], whichever comes first.
Except for the documents herein specified, no other documents or other action shall be
required, notwithstanding any applicable law or regulation.
If the Defect Liability Period is extended with respect to any part of the Facilities in
accordance with the Contract, you shall notify us, and the validity of this Letter of Guarantee
shall be extended with respect to the percentage of the Contract Price stipulated in the
notification until expiry of such extended Defect Liability Period.
Our liability under this Letter of Guarantee shall become null and void immediately upon its
expiry, whether it is returned or not, and no claim may be made hereunder after such expiry
or after the aggregate of the sums paid by us to you shall equal the sums guaranteed
hereunder, whichever is the earlier.
All notices to be given hereunder shall be given by registered (airmail) post to the addressee
at the address herein set out or as otherwise advised by and between the parties hereto.
We hereby agree that any part of the Contract may be amended, renewed, extended,
modified, compromised, released or discharged by mutual agreement between you and the
Contractor, and this security may be exchanged or surrendered without in any way impairing
or affecting our liabilities hereunder without notice to us and without the necessity for any
additional endorsement, consent or guarantee by us, provided, however, that the sum
guaranteed shall not be increased or decreased.
No action, event or condition which by any applicable law should operate to discharge us
from liability hereunder shall have any effect and we hereby waive any right we may have to
apply such law, so that in all respects our liability hereunder shall be irrevocable and, except
as stated herein, unconditional in all respects.
Yours truly,
[Name of the Bank]
Authorized Signature
Section IX. Contract Forms 27
28 Section IX. Contract Forms
Date: ..............................................................................................................................................................................................................
Advance Payment Guarantee No.: .....................................................................................................................................
We have been informed that . . . . . name of the Contractor. . . . . (hereinafter called “the
Contractor”) has entered into Contract No. . . . . . reference number of the Contract. . . . . dated
. . . . . . . .with you, for the execution of . . . . . . name of contract and brief description of the Facilities. .
. . . (hereinafter called “the Contract”).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the Conditions of the Contract, an
advance payment in the sum . . . . . name of the currency and amount in figures. . . . . . (. . . . . amount
in words. . . . . ) is to be made against an advance payment guarantee.
............................
Seal of Bank and Signature(s)
Note: All italicized text is for guidance on how to prepare this demand guarantee
and shall be deleted from the final document.
Section IX. Contract Forms 29
* Insert the expected expiration date of the Time for Completion. The Employer should note that in the event of an
extension of the time for completion of the Contract, the Employer would need to request an extension of this guarantee
from the Guarantor. Such request must be in writing and must be made prior to the expiration date established in the
guarantee. In preparing this guarantee, the Employer might consider adding the following text to the form, at the end of the
penultimate paragraph: “The Guarantor agrees to a one-time extension of this guarantee for a period not to exceed [six
months][one year], in response to the Employer’s written request for such extension, such request to be presented to the
Guarantor before the expiry of the guarant.